SETTINGS

COMPANY XXX

ADDRESS

CHECK POSTAL CODE

Should the system check if the postal code is added to all the available post codes or not? If not, it is possible to add new post codes directly in the customer dialog screen.

CHECK POSTAL CODE QUESTION

Should the system tell if the post code does not exist in the system?

POSTAL CODE UNIQUE

Should it be possible to have several postal areas on the same post code?

ARTICLE

ARTICLE TYPE T1 DESC

In Evatic under Settings-Project-Service Articles you can set up articles that can simplify the operators' job of reporting in projects (see: help for service articles in the Evatic help file). You have also the possibility to set up the article as travel time or work time. This setting decides what the description of the articles you have chosen as standard travel time will be.

ARTICLE TYPE T2 DESC

Example: ARTICLE TYPE T2 DESC = Travel 50%
In Evatic under Settings-Project-Service Articles you can set up articles that can simplify the operators' job of reporting in projects (see: help for service articles in the Evatic help file). You have also the possibility to set up the article as travel time or work time. This setting decides what the description of the articles you have chosen as travel time overtime step 1 will be.

ARTICLE TYPE T3 DESC

Example: ARTICLE TYPE T3 DESC = Travel 100%
In Evatic under Settings-Project-Service Articles you can set up articles that can simplify the operators' job of reporting in projects (see: help for service articles in the Evatic help file). You have also the possibility to set up the article as travel time or work time. This setting decides what the description of the articles you have chosen as travel time overtime step 2 will be.

ARTICLE TYPE W1 DESC

Example: ARTICLE TYPE W1 DESC = Work
In Evatic under Settings-Project-Service Articles you can set up articles that can simplify the operators' job of reporting in projects (see: help for service articles in the Evatic help file). You have also the possibility to set up the article as travel time or work time. This setting decides what the description of the articles you have chosen as standard working hours will be.

ARTICLE TYPE W2 DESC

Example: ARTICLE TYPE W2 DESC = Work 50%
In Evatic under Settings-Project-Service Articles you can set up articles that can simplify the operators' job of reporting in projects (see: help for service articles in the Evatic help file). You have also the possibility to set up the article as travel time or work time. This setting decides what the description of the articles you have chosen as working hour's overtime step 1 will be.

ARTICLE TYPE W3 DESC

Example: ARTICLE TYPE W3 DESC = Work 100%
In Evatic under Settings-Project-Service Articles you can set up articles that can simplify the operators' job of reporting in projects (see: help for service articles in the Evatic help file). You have also the possibility to set up the article as travel time or work time. This setting decides what the description of the articles you have chosen as working hour's overtime step 2 will be.

CAMPAIGN PRICE ON

Should the system inform you that you can use campaign price on order or not?

DEF ACCOUNT NO

Example: DEF ACCOUNT NO = 1500
This is the standard account number when setting up a new article. This value will be automatically selected as the account number when entering a new article.

DEF ACCOUNT NO PURCHASE

Example: DEF ACCOUNT NO PURCHASE = 1600
This is the standard account purchase number when setting up a new article. This value will be automatically selected as the account purchase number when entering a new article.

DEF UNIT

Example: DEF UNIT = UNIT
This is the standard unit when setting up a new article. This value will be automatically selected as the unit when entering a new article.

DEF VAT

Example: DEF VAT = 24
This is the standard level of VAT when setting up a new article. This value will be automatically selected as the VAT level when entering a new article.

ECO TAX ON

If checked, the fields for ECO Tax will be visible in article and order windows

ORDER MAX TRAVELTIME

Example: ORDER MAX TRAVELTIME = 2
If this setting is set to more than 0, Evatic will check each order line when you complete an order to see if any of the lines that are travel time exceed the maximum number set up here. If the number is exceeded, you will receive a warning and the possibility to change the line if there is an error.

ORDER MAX WORKTIME

Example: ORDER MAX WORKTIME = 2
If this setting is set to more than 0, Evatic will check each order line when you complete an order to see if any of the lines that are work time exceed the maximum number set up here. If the number is exceeded, you will receive a warning and the possibility to change the line if there is an error.

SG DEFAULT VALUES USE DISCOUNT

Should discount 1 and 2 be added to the sortg roups default (see settings/Article in Evatic Service).

SHOW OPEN ORDERS

Should the order open tab be displayed within the Article screen dialog in Evatic?

SORTGROUP CONTRACT TYPE

Example: SORTGROUP CONTRACT TYPE = 1
Setting to decide what the standard sort group number is when using 'Articles included' on Contract Type.

SORTGROUP DISCOUNT

Example: SORTGROUP DISCOUNT = 1
This must be one of the 5 sort groups. The allowed values are 1,2,3,4 and 5. Which sort group for article should be used as default when adding a new discount row.

ARTICLE EXTERNAL SYSTEM

ON

Should all fields for external information be available in Evatic Service?

ARTICLE SEARCH

SEARCH SG CHOICE 1

Example: SEARCH SG CHOICE 1 = 3 (= sort group 3)
Which article sort group should be used. You can select between 1-5 (this search is for article search, CTRL + F3, in the modules Sales project and Order)

SEARCH SG CHOICE 2

Example: SEARCH SG CHOICE 2 = 4 (= sort group 4)
Which article sort group should be used. You can select between 1-5 (this search is for article search, CTRL + F3, in the modules Sales project and Order)

ASSIGN

MINUTES TO CHECK FOR OTHER TASKS

Example: MINUTES TO CHECK FOR OTHER TASKS = 15
When assigning tasks to a resource in Evatic, Evatic can check if this resource has already been assigned a task within the same point of time.
Example: MINUTES TO CHECK FOR OTHER TASKS is set to 15. Resource number 15 has been assigned a task at 15:00. If you attempt to assign a task to the same resource between 14:45 and 15:15 Evatic will inquire if you really will assign a new task to this resource. If this function is not required, set MINUTES TO CHECK FOR OTHER TASKS = 0

CALENDAR

AVAILABILITY SEL TIME

Example: AVAILABILITY SEL TIME = 0
Setting to change the calender view for the availability period. 0 = whole day. 1 = the time frame you mark in the calendar (e.g. 4 hours).

CALENDAR COLORS

The days in the resource calendar in Evatic change colour dependant upon the number of hours a resource is occupied for each particular day. Example: HOURS STEP 1 is set to 3 and HOURS STEP 2 is set to 7. If the resource is occupied for less than 3 hours or is absent, but more than 0, the background colour for the day will be green. If the resource is occupied for less than 7 hours or absent, but more than 3 hours, the background colour for the day will be yellow. If the resource is occupied for more than 7 hours or is absent the background colour for the day will be red.

HOURS STEP 1

Example: HOURS STEP 1 = 3
Denoting: up to the limit for the color green and down to the limit for the color yellow.

HOURS STEP 2

Example: HOURS STEP 1 = 7
Denoting: up to the limit for the color yellow and down to the limit for the color red.

COMBO COLUMNS

ADDRESS ADDRESS 1

Example: ADDRESS ADDRESS 1 = 2600

ADDRESS ADDRESS 2

Example: ADDRESS ADDRESS 2 = 2000

ADDRESS ADDRESS 3

Example: ADDRESS ADDRESS 3 = 1500

ADDRESS ADDRESS ID

Example: ADDRESS ADDRESS ID = 1500

ADDRESS ADDRESS NAME

Example: ADDRESS ADDRESS NAME = 3000

ADDRESS CUSTOMER NAME

Example: ADDRESS CUSTOMER NAME = 3000

ADDRESS CUSTOMER NO

Example: Address Customer No= 600

ADDRESS POSTAL CODE

Example: ADDRESS POSTAL CODE= 600

ADDRESS POSTAL DESCRIPTION

Example: ADDRESS POSTAL DESCRIPTION= 1000
Settings used to change the length of the fields in the drop down list for customer search (CTRL + F)

CUSTOMER SEARCH CUSTOMER NAME

Example: CUSTOMER SEARCH CUSTOMER NAME = 2500

CUSTOMER SEARCH CUSTOMER NAME2

Example: CUSTOMER SEARCH CUSTOMER NAME = 2000

CUSTOMER SEARCH CUSTOMER NAME3

Example: Customer Search Customer Name = 2000

CUSTOMER SEARCH CUSTOMER NAME4

Example: CUSTOMER SEARCH CUSTOMER NAME = 2000

CUSTOMER SEARCH CUSTOMER NO

Example: Customer SEARCH CUSTOMER NO = 1000

CUSTOMER SEARCH DEPT

Example: CUSTOMER SEARCH DEPT = 500

CUSTOMER SEARCH POST DESCRIPTION

Example: CUSTOMER SEARCH POST DESCRIPTION = 1500

CUSTOMER SEARCH POSTAL CODE

Example: CUSTOMER SEARCH POSTAL CODE = 1000

CUSTOMER SEARCH SALESMAN

Example: CUSTOMER SEARCH SALESMAN = 500
Settings to change the length of the fields in the drop down list for machine.

MACHINE INSTALLATION

Example: MACHINE INSTALLATION= 100

MACHINE LOCATION

Example: MACHINE LOCATION= 1000

MACHINE MACHINE NO

Example: MACHINE MACHINE NO= 600

MACHINE MODEL TYPE

Example: MACHINE MODEL TYPE= 1000

MACHINE VISIT NAME

Example: MACHINE VISIT NAME= 1000

CONTRACT

003 EXTRA VOLUME ON

If this setting is checked and the choice "Automatic volume adjustment during reporting' is set on a contract with calculation method 003 it is possible to choose that the adjusted volume is saved as an extra volume and the original volume is noted changed.

004 INVOICE PERIOD USE LETTER RANGE

If you set this setting to No, then the invoice period used on order lines created from a 004 contract will be calculated based on the start and end reading date of the period
If you set this to Yes, then the invoice period used on order lines created from a 004 will be calculated based on the letter date and the frequency of the letter

ADD INFO ON ALL MACHINES

Should information for all machines be added to the invoice?

ADJUST PERCENT WITH DECIMAL

This is a setting for users using the setting USE METER VOLUME.
Should the adjustment include decimal or not?

AUTO ADD NAME DATE IN INFO FIELD

Should Evatic automatically add (name, date and time) in the general information field when entering information.

The same as CTRL + N.

AUTO NOT ACTIVE ON LAST FP ROW

Previously the contract was automatically set to not active when the termination invoice for a fixed price row was generated and all other fixed price and volume rows were terminated. 1 for yes (1 = set inactive automatically) and 0 for no (0 = the contract must be set inactive manually)

AUTO NUMBER NEXT

Example: AUTO NUMBER NEXT = 800
Next contract number if Auto Number On = 1

AUTO NUMBER NEXT (DEPT)

Example: AUTO NUMBER NEXT (DEPT) = 500
Next contract number for selected department if Auto Number On = 1 (If blank the Auto Number Next is used).

AUTO NUMBER ON

Example: AUTO NUMBER ON = 1
Should Evatic automatically generate contract numbers? 1 for yes, and 0 for no.

AUTO NUMBER PREFIX

Example: AUTO NUMBER PREFIX = NL
You can enter a fixed prefix which will be added in front of the contract number

CONTRACT CREDIT ORDER TYPE MULTI

Should it be possible to create more than one dealer credit on a contract and contract row?
If checked, a virtual credit will be issued for each dealer.

CREDIT ES ARTICLE NO

Example: CREDIT ES ARTICLE NO = 1200
Which article number should be used for dealer credits

CREDIT ES ARTICLE NO FIXED

Example: CREDIT ES ARTICLE NO FIXED = 1210
Which article number should be used for dealer credits fixed amount

CREDIT ES ORDER TYPE

Example: CREDIT ES ORDER TYPE = CON
Order type for dealer credit orders.

CREDIT ESTIMATED ON

Possible to set up a special dealer credit. Should this functionality be activated or not?

DAY LIMIT FOR COMMON INV

Example: DAY LIMIT FOR COMMON INV = 25
The number of days forward that Evatic should search for periodic volume rows within contracts that have periods and readings that are to be invoiced, within the same contract. Select <Invoice all contract rows when meter readings are reported in> from within the contract header. If this is selected all the contract rows with <Next invoice from> before today's date will be added to the same invoice. All rows with <Next invoice from> minus DAY LIMIT FOR COMMON INV equal to or less than today's date will also be added to the same invoice. Example: Running the meter reading invoicing on the 25.05.2001. The periodic volume has <Next invoice from> equal to 01.06.2001. With DAY LIMIT FOR COMMON INV = 0 the periodic volume will not come out on the same invoice, but with DAY LIMIT FOR COMMON INV for example greater than 7 periodic volumes will come out on the same invoice.

DAY LIMIT FOR METER READING

Example: DAY LIMIT FOR METER READING = 40
The number of days differing between <Next invoice from> and <Next Meter reading letter> before the periodic volume is to be invoiced where the period and the reading for the same contract are to be invoiced.
You can select <Invoice all contract rows when meter readings are reported in> within the contract header. If this is selected the periodic volume will not normally be invoiced with the standard contract invoicing, but if the difference between <Next invoice from> and <Next meter reading letter> is greater (<Next meter reading letter> minus <Next invoice from>) than DAY LIMIT FOR METER READING the periodic volume from the contract rows will be invoiced when the standard contract invoicing takes place.
Example: Within a contract row the <Next invoice from> is 01.06.2001 and <Next Meter reading letter> is 01.07.2001. If contract invoicing is then run the DAY LIMIT FOR METER READING must be less than 30 so that the periodic volume will be generated on this invoice. If it is not generated on this invoice, it will be generated after the meter reading letter sent out 01.07.2001 is returned.

DEF ALLOW CREDIT FP

Example: DEF ALLOW CREDIT = 1 (default value = 0)
= 1 Will credit the days where the Fixed price contract is not active, but the customer has already been invoiced for.

DEF ALLOW CREDIT PV

Example: DEF ALLOW CREDIT = 1 (default value = 0)
= 1 Will credit the days where the Volume contract is not active, but the customer has already been invoiced for.

DEF CONTRACT PERIOD

Example: DEF CONTRACT PERIOD = 36
This is the standard period of time for a contract when a new contract row is created. This value will be automatically entered as the length of the contract when a new contract row is created.

DEF EXTENSION PERIOD

Example: DEFAULT EXTENSION PERIOD = 12
This setting works together with Default Pre Termination Limit and will prolong the contract with '12' months '3' months before the contract end date. Number of months are defined in the 2 mentioned settings.

DEF INVOICE FREQ

Example: DEF INVOICE FREQ = 3
This is the standard number of months between each invoice when a new contract row is created. This value will be automatically entered in as Months between invoices when a new contract row is created.

DEF INVOICE LAYOUT

Example: DEF INVOICE LAYOUT = INV
This is the standard invoice layout when a new contract row is created. This value will be automatically entered in as the invoice layout when a new contract row is created.

DEF LEASING DEPT

Example: DEF LEASING DEPT = 50
Standard department for leasing rows. A Leasing row is an option for a fixed price row, where you can select that the fixed price rows are related to a different department than the one defined in the contract header.

DEF MR ARTICLE NO

Example: DEF MR ARTICLE NO = 1234MR
This is the standard article number for meter reading lines when a new contract row is created. This value will be automatically entered in as the article number for meter reading when a new contract row is created.

DEF PRE TERMINATION LIMIT

Example: Default Pre Termination Limit = 3 (Default value empty)
This setting works together with Default Extension Period and will prolong the contract with '12' months '3' months before the contract end date. Number of months are defined in the 2 mentioned settings.

DEF PV ARTICLE NO

Example: DEF PV ARTICLE NO = 1234PV
This is the standard article number for periodic volume when a new contract row is created. This value will be automatically entered in as the article number for periodic volume when a new contract row is created.

DEF READING FREQUENCE

Example: DEF READING FREQUENCE = 3
This is the standard number of months between each meter reading letter when a new contract row is created. This value will be automatically entered in as the letter frequency when a new contract row is created.

DISCOUNT ON FIXED PRICE

Should the customer's fixed discount also apply to fixed price rows?

EXCEL DUPLICATE MR USE CURRENT DATE

Excel import of meter reading letters.
Check if the meter reading date imported from excel is the same as the last registered reading (if type L (Letter)).
If it is the same date and the setting Duplicate MR USE CURRENT DATE = checked, then change the date to the current date and insert and report the meter as a normal meter reading (letter).
If Duplicate MR USE CURRENT DATE= unchecked, do not import the meter and show this as an error in report.

EXCEL IMPORT MR DUPLI CHECK CON

If the system finds several machines with the same machine number/serial number (e.g. when the setting EXCEL IMPORT MR NO CHECK MODEL = checked) and this setting
EXCEL IMPORT MR DUPLI CHECK CON = checked, then the system will check which machine has an active contract and select this machine, if only this machine has an active contract.

EXCEL IMPORT MR NO CHECK MODEL

Should the system check the model when importing meters from Excel.
When checked then: If the system finds several machines with the same model, the meters will not be imported, but a text will be added as information in the Excel file.

EXCEL IMPORT NOT CHECK SERVICE READING

Should import of meter reading readings (letter) from excel validate the data using both service readings and letter readings?
Unchecked = validate the new reading using both service and letter readings
Checked = validate the new reading using only letter readings

EXCEL IMPORT NOT LETTER ADD AS SERVICE

Excel import of meter reading letters.
If this setting is checked and the file includes a meter reading for a meter where no meter reading letter is sent, the meter reading will instead be imported as s service reading.

FIXED PRICE COPY USE TODAY

Should the system use the todays date as start date, when coping a fixed price row.

FP WARRANTY FROM MACHINE

Setting to enable functionality for setting warranty fields from machine on contract.

INV METER READING FIRST

Should the system check if all meter reading letters reported in have been invoiced before' normal' invoicing is started?

INVOICE OWNER CONTRACT

A setting that indicates which company owns the invoice information on a contract. If Invoice Owner Contract is checked, the owner of the order from a contract invoice is the customer on the contract header and the invoice receiver is the invoice receiver on each contracts row, if those addresses are not similar. If Invoice Owner Contract is unchecked, both owner of the order and invoice receiver are the customer on the contract header.

LETTER AUTO REMOVE 0 ROWS

When reporting meter reading letters, where the price e.g. is 0,-, the system will produce an 0-invoice. Should the system create those invoices or automatically remove all invoices where the price = 0,-.

LETTER NOT CHECK SERVICE READING

Should manually input of meter reading letters validate the data using both service readings and letter readings?
Unchecked = validate the new reading using both service and letter readings
Checked = validate the new reading using only letter readings

LETTER TO FILE FOLDER

Example: \ Letter To File Folder = c:\temp\
When using file to send meter reading letter, the path to save the letters can be filled in here.
If this setting is blank, the files will be placed under the users main folder.
E.g.: C:\Documents and Settings\xxx\local settings\evatic\Meter Reading Letters)
The name on the file will always contain contract number, row number and time the letter was printed.

METER IMPORT PERCENT CHECK

Example: METER IMPORT PERCENT CHECK = 20
Meter reading letter - Status of import from excel
Decides which imported rows that will show with a special color in the list.
In the list there is a column that shows the difference in percent between the reported counter and the estimated counter for the same date.

• Calculation of the percent difference: ((('Imported reading'*100)/'Estimated reading')- 100)
• Example: New reading is 1000 and estimated reading for the same date is 1200 the difference in percent is 20
• Rows with an absolute difference bigger than 'Company YYY \ Contract \ METER IMPORT PERCENT CHECK' will have a different color in the list and you can also choose to only see those rows.

METER REPORTING CREATE 0 ORDERS

Should it be possible to create not invoiceable orders from the meter reporting? (= not invoiceable meter readings)
In order to use this setting the following settings must be set:
Company XXX \ Contract \ ADD INFO ON ALL MACHINES = checked
Company XXX \ Contract \ LETTER AUTO REMOVE 0 ROWS = unchecked

METER REPORTING FOCUS

Example: METER REPORTING FOCUS = 2
Setting that decides witch field to get focus after the user is finished updating a letter on the tab "Reporting' in the "Meter reporting' window.
Values can be: 1 (Contract number), 2 (Customer number) or 3 (Machine number).

MINIMUM METER INVOICE SUM

Example: MINIMUM METER INVOICE SUM = 20
All meter reading invoices below this sum (but higher than 0) will automatically be marked and can easily be deleted on the <Invoicing>-tab of the Meter reading letter window.

MONTHS BEFORE PRICE CHANGE

Example: MONTHS BEFORE PRICE CHANGE = 6
Setting that decides the number of month after start date on the contract that the price increase from date get as default. The default value is 12 (1 year).

PREPAID UNITS DEF PERIOD

Example: PREPAID UNITS DEF PERIOD = 3
This is the standard period of time when new prepaid units are created. This value will be automatically entered as the length.

PREPAID UNITS ON

Should prepaid units' functionality be used or not.

SERVER INVOICE PREVIEW

Setting that decides if the preview and invoicing of periodic contract invoices and meter reading invoices should be run from the server.

SERVER INVOICE PREVIEW SAVE XML

Example: SERVER INVOICE PREVIEW SAVE XML= 1
Setting to decide the way data is stored in the database. 1 is default and should be used, because this is the quickest way.
Faster preview on big contracts when the setting Server Invoice Preview = 1

Only change this setting in cooperation with our support.

SHOW MACHINE COST N CHECK START

Can only be used when Show Machine Cost On Stat = checked (existing setting)
If the setting SHOW MACHINE COST N CHECK START = unchecked, then the system gets cost from machines and check invoice date on the order is bigger than the start date on the row in addition to contract active from-to
If the setting SHOW MACHINE COST N CHECK START = checked, then the system gets cost from machines and check only if the invoice date is between contract active from-to

SHOW MACHINE COST ON STAT

Check if you want machine costs displayed on the Project->Report for contract orders.

SHOW NI ORDER ON STAT

Setting that decides if the not invoiceable fixed price contract rows should be added to the statistics or not. Checked = not showing and unchecked = showing.
Sometimes the fixed price rows will be displayed as -1 to show the costs.

The following setting can also be used: Company XXX \ Contract \ SHOW MACHINE COST ON STAT

UPDATE DEALER CREDIT MR ALL ROWS

When this is changed to 1, When you press the button 'Update all rows' in the dealer credit window from the contract header, the percentage for MR will be set to the same value as you have for PV.

USE CUSTOMER CREDIT TERM

Setting that decide if the credit term from customer or contract heading should be used. Uncheck for using credit term from contract heading and check for using customer credit term.

USE CUSTOMER DEPT ON

Default is setting checked. If checked, the system uses the department from customer, if unchecked it uses the department from user.

USE DEBTOR ON CONRACT

Setting that decides if you like to send the invoice to the customer set as debtor (see Evatic Service//Customer/Address tab).

USE INVOICED TO METER READING

If meter reading invoices use the number invoiced in advance from the contract row as the basis for calculation against a meter reading (Use INVOICED TO METER READING = checked), If the calculation should be the previous meter reading + (monthly volume * meter reading frequency) (USE INVOICED TO METER READING = unchecked) on contracts with calculation methods 001, 002 and 003.
In Evatic/Contract/Contract header the system will show which setting it used as a default value for new contracts. The field 'Use invoiced to volume' shows if the setting is set to checked (= marked) or unchecked (= not marked).

USE METER VOLUME

In volume contracts with several machines it is possible to apportion the volume for each machine. This apportioning decides how much of the income from the contract row is to come from the different machines. This is done by indicating the percentage each machine is to have (Use Meter Volume = unchecked) or by indicating how great a portion of the volume each machine is to have. (Use Meter Volume = checked).

USE PRICE FROM ARTICLE DIVIDER

When using the price from the article on contract fixed price rows (USE PRICE FROM ARTICLE ON = checked), the price from the article will be used as the contract row price. In Evatic, the price is always per month. If the price on the article is not a price per month, but for example per year, the USE PRICE FROM ARTICLE DIVIDER can be set to divide the price so that the price per month is right. Example: Price on article is 1200, but the price per month on the contract row must be 100. Then set the USE PRICE FROM ARTICLE DIVIDER to checked.

USE PRICE FROM ARTICLE ON

When creating a fixed price contract row, and this setting is checked, it's possible to use the price from the article as the price for the fixed price contract row. A new check box under the article no. in the fixed price screen will allow this.
When activating this setting the following fields are available: 'Items on row' and 'Use price from article on invoicing'.

USE SUB CONTRACT LIST

Should sub contract numbers be a free text field or a drop down list for pre-defined sub contract numbers.
Uncheck for free text and check for drop down list.

VOLUME AUTO ADJUST MONTHLY

Example: VOLUME AUTO ADJUST MONTHLY = 6
For some contacts you can adjust the monthly volume to the same as the last period when the meter readings are reported in. The volume can then be adjusted to the nearest 1000 (higher or lower, but not under 1000).
If this setting is <blank>, the system will calculate: (volume used in period/months in period) * 12 -> adjusted to the nearest 1000 to find the new 'year volume', then this number is again divided with 12 to find the new monthly volume.
Example: reporting 2300 copies (2300 x 12 = 27600) The system will adjust to the nearest 1000, which is 28000. The volume for the next period is then (28000/12) 2333 (per month).
If this setting e.g. is 6, this number 6 is used in the adjustment.

The system will use the meter dates of the new reading and the old reading to get the months between these dates. For the first period it uses the meter start-date. Beware that the start-date of the contract should not be higher than the meter start-date, otherwise the system will use the latest date in some cases (when there are multiple machines on one volume-row and the machines have different meters).

CONTRACT INFO

INFO 01

Example: INFO 01 = Information
Within the contract dialog it is possible to add extra 10 fields which can be used freely (see Info tab). The text entered here will be the field name for the first field. Only the settings with a value will be displayed.

INFO 02

Example: INFO 02 = Information
Within the contract dialog it is possible to add extra 10 fields which can be used freely (see Info tab). The text entered here will be the field name for the second field. Only the settings with a value will be displayed.

INFO 03

Example: INFO 03 = Information
Within the contract dialog it is possible to add extra 10 fields which can be used freely (see Info tab). The text entered here will be the field name for the third field. Only the settings with a value will be displayed.

INFO 04

Example: Info 04 = Information
Within the contract dialog it is possible to add extra 10 fields which can be used freely (see Info tab). The text entered here will be the field name for the fourth field. Only the settings with a value will be displayed.

INFO 05

Example: INFO 05 = Information
Within the contract dialog it is possible to add extra 10 fields which can be used freely (see Info tab). The text entered here will be the field name for the second fifth. Only the settings with a value will be displayed.

INFO 06

Example: INFO 06 = Information
Within the contract dialog it is possible to add extra 10 fields which can be used freely (see Info tab). The text entered here will be the field name for the sixth field. Only the settings with a value will be displayed.

INFO 07

Example: INFO 07 = Information
Within the contract dialog it is possible to add extra 10 fields which can be used freely (see Info tab). The text entered here will be the field name for the seventh field. Only the settings with a value will be displayed.

INFO 08

Example: INFO 08 = Information
Within the contract dialog it is possible to add extra 10 fields which can be used freely (see Info tab). The text entered here will be the field name for the eighth field. Only the settings with a value will be displayed.

INFO 09

Example: INFO 09 = Information
Within the contract dialog it is possible to add extra 10 fields which can be used freely (see Info tab). The text entered here will be the field name for the ninth field. Only the settings with a value will be displayed.

INFO 10

Example: INFO 10 = Information
Within the contract dialog it is possible to add extra 10 fields which can be used freely (see Info tab). The text entered here will be the field name for the tenth field. Only the settings with a value will be displayed.

INFO FP 01

Example: INFO FP 01 = Information
Within the contract dialog it is possible to add extra 10 fields which can be used freely (see Volume tab/General). The text entered here will be the field name for the first field. Only the settings with a value will be displayed.

INFO FP 02

Example: INFO FP 02 = Information
Within the contract dialog it is possible to add extra 10 fields which can be used freely (see Volume tab/General). The text entered here will be the field name for the second field. Only the settings with a value will be displayed.

INFO FP 03

Example: INFO FP 03 = Information
Within the contract dialog it is possible to add extra 10 fields which can be used freely (see Volume tab/General). The text entered here will be the field name for the third field. Only the settings with a value will be displayed.

INFO FP 04

Example: INFO FP 04 = Information
Within the contract dialog it is possible to add extra 10 fields which can be used freely (see Volume tab/General). The text entered here will be the field name for the fourth field. Only the settings with a value will be displayed.

INFO FP 05

Example: INFO FP 05 = Information
Within the contract dialog it is possible to add extra 10 fields which can be used freely (see Volume tab/General). The text entered here will be the field name for the second fifth. Only the settings with a value will be displayed.

INFO FP 06

Example: INFO FP 06 = Information
Within the contract dialog it is possible to add extra 10 fields which can be used freely (see Volume tab/General). The text entered here will be the field name for the sixth field. Only the settings with a value will be displayed.

INFO FP 07

Example: INFO FP 07 = Information
Within the contract dialog it is possible to add extra 10 fields which can be used freely (see Volume tab/General). The text entered here will be the field name for the seventh field. Only the settings with a value will be displayed.

INFO FP 08

Example: INFO FP 08 = Information
Within the contract dialog it is possible to add extra 10 fields which can be used freely (see Volume tab/General). The text entered here will be the field name for the eighth field. Only the settings with a value will be displayed.

INFO FP 09

Example: INFO FP 09 = Information
Within the contract dialog it is possible to add extra 10 fields which can be used freely (see Volume tab/General). The text entered here will be the field name for the ninth field. Only the settings with a value will be displayed.

INFO FP 10

Example: INFO FP 10 = Information
Within the contract dialog it is possible to add extra 10 fields which can be used freely (see Volume tab/General). The text entered here will be the field name for the tenth field. Only the settings with a value will be displayed.

INFO PV 01

Example: INFO PV 01 = Information
Within the contract dialog it is possible to add extra 10 fields which can be used freely (see Fixed price tab). The text entered here will be the field name for the first field. Only the settings with a value will be displayed.

INFO PV 02

Example: INFO PV 02 = Information
Within the contract dialog it is possible to add extra 10 fields which can be used freely (see Fixed price tab). The text entered here will be the field name for the second field. Only the settings with a value will be displayed.

INFO PV 03

Example: INFO PV 03 = Information
Within the contract dialog it is possible to add extra 10 fields which can be used freely (see Fixed price tab). The text entered here will be the field name for the third field. Only the settings with a value will be displayed.

INFO PV 04

Example: INFO PV 04 = Information
Within the contract dialog it is possible to add extra 10 fields which can be used freely (see Fixed price tab). The text entered here will be the field name for the fourth field. Only the settings with a value will be displayed.

INFO PV 05

Example: INFO PV 05 = Information
Within the contract dialog it is possible to add extra 10 fields which can be used freely (see Fixed price tab). The text entered here will be the field name for the second fifth. Only the settings with a value will be displayed.

INFO PV 06

Example: INFO PV 06 = Information
Within the contract dialog it is possible to add extra 10 fields which can be used freely (see Fixed price tab). The text entered here will be the field name for the sixth field. Only the settings with a value will be displayed.

INFO PV 07

Example: INFO PV 07 = Information
Within the contract dialog it is possible to add extra 10 fields which can be used freely (see Fixed price tab). The text entered here will be the field name for the seventh field. Only the settings with a value will be displayed.

INFO PV 08

Example: INFO PV 08 = Information
Within the contract dialog it is possible to add extra 10 fields which can be used freely (see Fixed price tab). The text entered here will be the field name for the eighth field. Only the settings with a value will be displayed.

INFO PV 09

Example: INFO PV 09 = Information
Within the contract dialog it is possible to add extra 10 fields which can be used freely (see Fixed price tab). The text entered here will be the field name for the ninth field. Only the settings with a value will be displayed.

INFO PV 10

Example: INFO PV 10 = Information
Within the contract dialog it is possible to add extra 10 fields which can be used freely (see Fixed price tab). The text entered here will be the field name for the tenth field. Only the settings with a value will be displayed.

CONTRACT PART CREDIT

TEXT CHANGED FROM

Example: TEXT CHANGED FROM= Changed from (Volume/Price)
For text on part credit invoices.

TEXT CHANGED TO

Example: TEXT CHANGED TO= Changed to (Volume/Price)
For text on part credit invoices.

TEXT INVOICE

Example: TEXT INVOICE= Change of invoice
For text on part credit invoices. The text added here is followed by the invoice number that was the original invoice number before the crediting.

TEXT MACHINE

Example: TEXT MACHINE= Machine no
For text on part credit invoices.

TEXT MODEL

Example: TEXT MODEL= Model
For text on part credit invoices.

TEXT ORDER

Example: TEXT ORDER= Change of order
For text on part credit invoices. The text added here is followed by the order number that was the original order number before the crediting.

If the previous change was an order number (0 orders from meter reporting)

CONTRACT TEMPLATE

TOTAL VOLUME ALL ROWS ON

Should the checkbox on Contract Template, 'Calculate all volume rows as a total volume' be visible or not. Check for yes (= the contract is generated as a total volume contract) and uncheck for no.

CUSTOMER

AUTO ADD NAME DATE IN INFO FIELD

Should Evatic automatically add (name, date and time) in the note field when entering information.

The same as CTRL + N.

AUTO NUMBER NEXT

Example: AUTO NUMBER NEXT = 10000
The next customer number if AUTO NUMBER ON = 1

AUTO NUMBER NEXT ADDRESS ID

Example: AUTO NUMBER NEXT ADDRESS ID = 100
Numeric value. If the setting does not contain a valid number, the auto number function will not be used

• the setting contains the next auto number to use
• the auto number function will only be used on new addresses
• the setting will be incremented with 1 each time a new address is added

AUTO NUMBER NEXT PROSPECT

Example: AUTO NUMBER NEXT PROSPECT = 10000000
The next prospect number if AUTO NUMBER ON = checked. This counter subtracts each time it is used.

AUTO NUMBER ON

Should Evatic automatically generate customer numbers and prospect numbers? (Prospect numbers are generated automatically if the credit control is on, despite if this setting is set to false).

CHANGE STATUS

Should you be able to change the status on the customer (Evatic/Customer/Details tab). The user must also have writing access on Sale Credit Approve (see Evatic Admin/Usergroup) to change the status. The user can change the status directly in the combo box on the tab details (see Customer/Evatic Service)

CHECK BALANCE

ATTENTION! This is only used in connection with integration of accounting systems.
Should Evatic automatically check if the customer has overdrawn its credit limit?

CONTACT VCF EXPORT ON

Should it be possible to export contact info to mail systems like e.g. Outlook?
(The mail system need to support VCF-filetype).

CUSTOMER EXT TASK AUTO ON

Should Evatic ask if an activity should be added to the external machine or not.

DEF NOT ALLOW PARTLY DELIVER

Should the check box 'Not allow partly deliver' be checked when creating new customer or not?

DISABLE EXTERNAL ADDRESS

Should Evatic make it possible to see that an address is owned by an external system.

DISCOUNT PER DEPT

Should it be possible to add discount per department?

FIELD MAX ADDRESS1

Example: FIELD MAX ADDRESS1 = 30
It is possible to have a limited number of characters for the customer address1. Minimum 1 and maximum 60 characters.

FIELD MAX ADDRESS2

Example: FIELD MAX ADDRESS2 = 40
It is possible to have a limited number of characters for the customer address2. Minimum 1 and maximum 60 characters.

FIELD MAX ADDRESSNAME

Example: FIELD MAX ADDRESSNAME = 50
It is possible to have a limited number of characters for the customer address name. Minimum 1 and maximum 60 characters.

FIELD MAX CUSTOMERNAME

Example: FIELD MAX CUSTOMERNAME = 60
It is possible to have a limited number of characters for the customer name. Minimum 1 and maximum 60 characters.

FIELD MAX CUSTOMERNAME2-4

Example: FIELD MAX CUSTOMERNAME2 = 60
It is possible to have a limited number of characters for the customername2, 3 and 4. Minimum 1 and maximum 60 characters.

LAST CUSTOMERS FORMAT

Example: LAST CUSTOMERS FORMAT = <CUSTOMER NAME 1>
The option <Last customer> in the menu show as default the customer name. If another name should be listed here, this can be selected by using another bookmark.
E.g.:

• <CUSTOMER NAME 1> = customer name 1
• <CUSTOMER NAME 2> = customer name 2
• <CUSTOMER NAME 3> = customer name 3
• <CUSTOMER NAME 4> = customer name 4
• <CUSTOMER SEARCH NAME> = Search name

LINK BUTTON 1 ACTION

Example: LINK BUTTON 1 ACTION = http://www.evatic.com/
In the customer screen, what command should be run when clicking link button 1? Enter the command as you would enter it in the Start --> Run window in Windows
Bookmarks:

• <CUSTOMER NO> selected customer
• <USERNAME> the logged in user in Evatic Service
• <PASSWORD> the password the user logged in to Evatic with.

Also the bookmarks under Company XXX \ Mail Project \ Technician Message can be used.

LINK BUTTON 1 TEXT

Example: LINK BUTTON 1 TEXT = Evatic Homepage
In the customer screen, what text should appear on link button 1?

LINK BUTTON 2 ACTION

Example: LINK BUTTON 2 ACTION = winword.exe
In the customer screen, what command should be run when clicking link button 2? Enter the command as you would enter it in the Start --> Run window in Windows
Bookmarks:

• <CUSTOMER NO> selected customer
• <USERNAME> the logged in user in Evatic Service
• <PASSWORD> the password the user logged in to Evatic with.

Also the bookmarks under Company XXX / Mail Project / Technician Message CAN BE USED.

LINK BUTTON 2 TEXT

Example: LINK BUTTON 2 TEXT = Microsoft Word
In the customer screen, what text should appear on link button 2?

LINK BUTTON 3 ACTION

Example: LINK BUTTON 3 ACTION = notepad.exe
In the customer screen, what command should be run when clicking link button 3? Enter the command as you would enter it in the Start --> Run window in Windows
Bookmarks:

• <CUSTOMER NO> selected customer
• <USERNAME> the logged in user in Evatic Service
• <PASSWORD> the password the user logged in to Evatic with.

Also the bookmarks under Company XXX / Mail Project / Technician Message can be used.

LINK BUTTON 3 TEXT

Example: LINK BUTTON 3 TEXT = Open Notepad
In the customer screen, what text should appear on link button 3?

LINK BUTTON 4 ACTION

Example: LINK BUTTON 4 ACTION = mstsc.exe 192.168.XXX.XXX
In the customer screen, what command should be run when clicking link button 4? Enter the command as you would enter it in the Start --> Run window in Windows
Bookmarks:

• <CUSTOMER NO> selected customer
• <USERNAME> the logged in user in Evatic Service
• <PASSWORD> the password the user logged in to Evatic with.

Also the bookmarks under Company XXX / Mail Project / Technician Message can be used.

LINK BUTTON 4 TEXT

Example: LINK BUTTON 4 TEXT = Remote Desktop to office
In the customer screen, what text should appear on link button 4?

NUM EXTRA CUSTOMER NAMES

Example: NUM EXTRA CUSTOMER NAMES = 0
It is possible to have from 1 to 4 fields for the customer name in the customer dialog in Evatic and Evatic Sales. Select here, from 0 to 3 extra fields for customer name.

ORDER TEXT POPUP ON

Should the tab for <Order info> be displayed in the customer dialog in Evatic? If the setting is checked, you will be able to have different order text as popups on your orders.

QUICKSEARCH SHOW CUSTOMER NAME 2

Should customer name 2 show in the quick search result list?

QUICKSEARCH SHOW CUSTOMER NAME 3

Should customer name 3 show in the quick search result list?

QUICKSEARCH SHOW CUSTOMER NAME 4

Should customer name 4 show in the quick search result list?

SEARCH SHOW CUSTOMER NAME 2

Should customer name 2 be shown in the drop-down list when searching for a customer? (regarding all drop down lists) They will also be added in the search result.

SEARCH SHOW CUSTOMER NAME 3

Should customer name 3 be shown in the drop-down list when searching for a customer? (regarding all drop down lists) They will also be added in the search result.

SEARCH SHOW CUSTOMER NAME 4

Should customer name 4 be shown in the drop-down list when searching for a customer? (regarding all drop down lists) They will also be added in the search result.

SHOW ADDRESS ID

Should the field Address ID be added as a field under Customer->Address tab?

SHOW ADVANCED

Should the tab for <Advanced> be displayed in the customer dialog in Evatic?

SHOW BUSINESS HOURS

Should the tab for <Opening hours> be displayed in the customer dialog in Evatic?

SHOW CONTRACTS

Should the tab for <Contracts> be displayed in the customer dialog in Evatic?

SHOW DISCOUNT

Should the tab for <Discount> be displayed in the customer dialog in Evatic?

SHOW EVENTS DOCS CONTRACT

Should documents related to Contract be displayed on the Customer window?

Only works for events on the customer window

SHOW EVENTS DOCS MACHINE

Should documents related to Machine be displayed on the Customer window?

Only works for events on the customer window

SHOW EVENTS DOCS ORDER

Should documents related to Order be displayed on the Customer window?

Only works for events on the customer window

SHOW EVENTS DOCS PROJECT

Should documents related to Project be displayed on the Customer window?

SHOW INSTALLATIONS

Should the tab for <Installations> be displayed in the customer dialog in Evatic?

SHOW MACHINE LIST PROFIT CHOICE

Should the check box that will show the machine profit or not, be displayed in the customer dialog in Evatic? If no check box, the profit for the machine will always be shown.

SHOW MACHINES

Should the tab for <Machines> be displayed in the customer dialog in Evatic?

SHOW NOTES

Should the tab for <Notes> be displayed in the customer dialog in Evatic?

SHOW ORDER INFO

Should the tab for <Order info> be displayed in the customer dialog in Evatic?

SHOW REMOTE ACCESS

Should the tab for >Remote access> be displayed in the customer dialog in Evatic?

SHOW TECHNICIANS

Should the tab for <Technicians> be displayed in the customer dialog in Evatic?

SHOW XML FORMAT

Should the field for <Make XML file of invoice> be displayed in the order dialog in Evatic?

USE FREE TEXT SEARCH

Setting for customer search (CTRL + F). Should you be able to only search for customer name (= unchecked) or customer number, -name, address name, address 1-2, post code, postal area and contact person (= checked).

USE FULL NAME

Check to display the salesman name/full name in the event tab in the customer/calendar screen
All the settings in this chapter are valid for each department.

DEPARTMENT XXX

ALARM COLOR

The color that is to be used in the Project Overview for tasks where the response time has almost expired. This value can also be set up in Evatic->Settings->Project->Priority.

ALARM MINUTES

Example: ALARM MINUTES = 30
The number of minutes before the response time for a task expires in the Project Overview that the task changes color. This value can also be set up in Evatic->Settings->Project->Priority

ASSIGN COLOR ONLY COLUMN

Should the color used in the Project Overview for tasks that have been allocated to a resource only be valid for the resource column, or should it be valid for the whole line. Assign Color Only Column is checked means only the column and Assign Color Only Column is unchecked means the whole line. This value can also be set up in Evatic->Settings->Project->Priority

ASSIGNED COLOR

The color to be used in the Project Overview for tasks that have been allocated to a resource. This value can also be set up in Evatic->Settings->Project->PRIORITY

CHECK SERVICE ARTICLE TYPE

If the technician should only be allowed to select from the service articles connected to the technician, set this to checked. If the technician should be allowed to select any service article, set this to unchecked (default).
If checked, the service articles code must be added to the technician screen in Evatic Service (see Settings/Resource/Resource), in order for the technician to select from the service articles codes in mobile. If unchecked, the technician can select from all the service articles codes linked to the department.

DEF TASK TREE NODE

Example: DEF TASK TREE NODE = 1 Alle 2 Inkommet
Denotes the standard node in the project tree for incoming tasks that don't have machine or where machine does not have a standard node. Only valid here if Global User->Tree->FOR EACH DEPARTMENT is checked. If this is unchecked, you can find the correct setting on Company XXX->Project->DEF TASK TREE NODE

DEF TASK TREE NODE INSTALLATION

Example: DEF TASK TREE NODE INSTALLATION = 1 All 2 Incoming 3 New machine
By using the calculation module in Evatic you can automatically generate a project for the installation of a machine when you sell a new machine. This task will be automatically added to the project tree under the node set up here. Only valid here if Global User->Tree->FOR EACH DEPARTMENT is checked. If this is unchecked, you can find the correct setting on Company XXX->Project->DEF TASK TREE NODE INSTALLATION

DEFAULT SERVICEARTICLES CODE

Example: DEFAULT SERVICEARTICLES CODE = STD
Standard service articles when creating a new machine. This value will be automatically added as service article when creating a new machine.

EPW FINISHED PROJECTS NODE

Example: EPW FINISHED PROJECTS NODE = 1 All 2 Finished EPW
If the setting Global User \ Tree \ FOR EACH DEPARTMENT is checked, then this setting will be used to determine the node completed project tasks will be placed into.

INVOICE CLEAN C INFO 1 LINE

If INVOICE CLEAN ON is checked and INVOICE CLEAN C INFO 1 LINE is checked the price per copy and the number of copies invoiced will be added to the same line on the invoices created from the contract module.

INVOICE CLEAN CONTRACT CONST

Example: INVOICE CLEAN CONTRACT CONST = Contract no:
The value found on the invoice layout for the contract number. If you want to use the invoice clean function for several invoice layouts, the same value must be used for all layouts.

INVOICE CLEAN LOCATION CONST

Example: INVOICE CLEAN LOCATION CONST = Location:
The value found on the invoice layout for location. If you want to use the invoice clean function for several invoice layouts, the same value must be used for all layouts.

INVOICE CLEAN M INFO 1 LINE

If INVOICE CLEAN ON is checked and INVOICE CLEAN M INFO 1 LINE is checked the machine number, model type and location will be added to the same line on the invoices created from the contract module.

INVOICE CLEAN M INFO 2 LINE

If INVOICE CLEAN ON is checked and Invoice Clean M Info 2 Line is checked the machine number and model type will be added to the same line on the invoices created from the contract module. If INVOICE CLEAN M INFO 1 LINE is checked this will override INVOICE CLEAN M INFO 2 LINE.

INVOICE CLEAN MACHINE CONST

Example: INVOICE CLEAN MACHINE CONST = Machine no:
The value found on the invoice layout for machine number. If you want to use the invoice clean function for several invoice layouts, the same value must be used for all layouts.

INVOICE CLEAN METER O N U 1 LINE

Meter reading: If Invoice Clean On is checked and Invoice Clean Meter O N U 1 Line is checked, prev. meter reading, reported meter reading and used copies will be added to the same line on the invoices created from the contract module.

INVOICE CLEAN MODEL CONST

Example: INVOICE CLEAN MODEL CONST = Model:
The value found on the invoice layout for model. If you want to use the invoice clean function for several invoice layouts, the same value must be used for all layouts.

INVOICE CLEAN ON

Invoice clean will (if checked) try to reduce the number of order lines on invoices generated from the contract module. If possible, it will group order lines for the same machine by moving them next to each other. Then it will move all Information about the machine over the order lines pertained to said machine so that it is not repeated for each article.
Invoice clean can also move other information to the same line to create extra room as described in the following settings:

• INVOICE CLEAN C INFO 1 LINE
• INVOICE CLEAN M INFO 1 LINE
• INVOICE CLEAN M INFO 2 LINE
• INVOICE CLEAN P INFO 1 LINE

INVOICE CLEAN P INFO 1 LINE

If Invoice Clean On is checked and Invoice Clean P Info 1 Line is checked the period (number months invoiced) and the, from - to date will be added to the same line on the invoices created from the contract module.

INVOICE CLEAN R INFO 1 LINE

Setting to set the Meter reading date in brackets behind the reading on the layout.

INVOICE FEE ADD ON

Should it be possible to set up that the customer will be automatically charged an invoicing charge for all invoices.

INVOICE FEE ARTICLE NO

Example: INVOICE FEE ARTICLE NO = Art123
What is the article number for the invoicing charge? This is used on completion of an order if the customer is selected to have <Invoice charge> within the miscellaneous tab in the customer dialog.

INVOICE FEE MULTIPLE ON

Should it be possible to add invoice fee for each partly invoiced order? (If this is unchecked, the fee is only added to the amalgamate order)

INVOICE FEE ON

The standard value for the invoicing charge (Yes/No) when creating a new customer. This value will be automatically entered in as the invoicing charge when a new customer is created.

MACHINE NO FOCUS

Should the focus be on the customer number field or the machine number field when creating a new order or using customer call? Check for customer number, uncheck for machine number.

MAIL PROJECT RECEIVER NODE

Example: MAIL PROJECT RECEIVER NODE = 1 All 2 Incoming 3 From e-mail
The standard node in the project tree for tasks that have been automatically created from e-mail. Only valid if Global User->Tree->FOR EACH DEPARTMENT is checked. If this is unchecked the correct setting is found at Company XXX->Mail Project Receiver->NODE

MAIL PROJECT TASK NODE

Example: MAIL PROJECT TASK NODE = 1 All 2 Incoming 3 From e-mail
The standard node in the project tree for tasks for incoming e-mail. Only valid If Global User->Tree->FOR EACH DEPARTMENT is checked. If this is unchecked the correct setting is found at Company XXX->Mail Project Task->NODE

MAIL PROJECT TASK NODE 10

Example: MAIL PROJECT TASK NODE 10 = 1 All 2 Incoming 3 From e-mail
The standard node in the project tree for tasks for incoming e-mail. Only valid If Global User->Tree->FOR EACH DEPARTMENT is checked. If this is unchecked the correct setting is found at Company XXX->Mail Project Task->NODE

MAIL PROJECT TASK NODE 2

Example: MAIL PROJECT TASK NODE 2 = 1 All 2 Incoming 3 From e-mail
The standard node in the project tree for tasks for incoming e-mail. Only valid If Global User->Tree->FOR EACH DEPARTMENT is checked. If this is unchecked the correct setting is found at Company XXX->Mail Project Task->NODE

MAIL PROJECT TASK NODE 3

Example: MAIL PROJECT TASK NODE 3 = 1 All 2 Incoming 3 From e-mail
The standard node in the project tree for tasks for incoming e-mail. Only valid If Global User->Tree->FOR EACH DEPARTMENT is checked. If this is unchecked the correct setting is found at Company XXX->Mail Project Task->NODE

MAIL PROJECT TASK NODE 4

Example: MAIL PROJECT TASK NODE 4 = 1 All 2 Incoming 3 From e-mail
The standard node in the project tree for tasks for incoming e-mail. Only valid If Global User->Tree->FOR EACH DEPARTMENT is checked. If this is unchecked the correct setting is found at Company XXX->Mail Project Task->NODE

MAIL PROJECT TASK NODE 5

Example: MAIL PROJECT TASK NODE 5 = 1 All 2 Incoming 3 From e-mail
The standard node in the project tree for tasks for incoming e-mail. Only valid If Global User->Tree->FOR EACH DEPARTMENT is checked. If this is unchecked the correct setting is found at Company XXX->Mail Project Task->NODE

MAIL PROJECT TASK NODE 6

Example: MAIL PROJECT TASK NODE 6 = 1 All 2 Incoming 3 From e-mail
The standard node in the project tree for tasks for incoming e-mail. Only valid If Global User->Tree->FOR EACH DEPARTMENT is checked. If this is unchecked the correct setting is found at Company XXX->Mail Project Task->NODE

MAIL PROJECT TASK NODE 7

Example: MAIL PROJECT TASK NODE 7 = 1 All 2 Incoming 3 From e-mail
The standard node in the project tree for tasks for incoming e-mail. Only valid If Global User->Tree->FOR EACH DEPARTMENT is checked. If this is unchecked the correct setting is found at Company XXX->Mail Project Task->NODE

MAIL PROJECT TASK NODE 8

Example: MAIL PROJECT TASK NODE 8 = 1 All 2 Incoming 3 From e-mail
The standard node in the project tree for tasks for incoming e-mail. Only valid If Global User->Tree->FOR EACH DEPARTMENT is checked. If this is unchecked the correct setting is found at Company XXX->Mail Project Task->NODE

MAIL PROJECT TASK NODE 9

Example: MAIL PROJECT TASK NODE 9 = 1 All 2 Incoming 3 From e-mail
The standard node in the project tree for tasks for incoming e-mail. Only valid If Global User->Tree->FOR EACH DEPARTMENT is checked. If this is unchecked the correct setting is found at Company XXX->Mail Project Task->NODE

MOBILE AC SET FROM VALUE 1

Example: MOBILE AC SET FROM VALUE 1 = WARR (Warranty)
The action code(s) which decides if the job should be placed in a defined node (Only valid if MOBILE AC SET FROM VALUE 1 NODE..3 NODE is used). Use the # sign to add different action codes.
Remember! Only one of the action codes is required in order for the service job to be placed in the defined node.

MOBILE AC SET FROM VALUE 1 NODE

Example: MOBILE AC SET FROM VALUE 1 NODE = 1 All 2 Warranty
The node in the project tree for tasks that have a defines action code (see MOBILE AC SET FROM VALUE 1...3)
E.g.:

• MOBILE AC SET FROM VALUE 1 = #1 PM#1 WARR#3 GA#
• MOBILE AC SET FROM VALUE 1 NODE = 1 All 2 Warranty

The service jobs will be placed here in the node 'Warranty' if they include the action code 1 = PM or WARR or action code 3 = GA.

MOBILE AC SET FROM VALUE 2

Example: MOBILE AC SET FROM VALUE 2= WARR (Warranty)
The action code(s) which decides if the job should be placed in a defined node (Only valid if MOBILE AC SET FROM VALUE 1 NODE..3 NODE is used). Use the # sign to add different action codes.
Remember! Only one of the action codes is required in order for the service job to be placed in the defined node.

MOBILE AC SET FROM VALUE 2 NODE

Example: MOBILE AC SET FROM VALUE 2 NODE = 1 All 2 Warranty
The node in the project tree for tasks that have a defines action code (see MOBILE AC SET FROM VALUE 1...3)
E.g.:

• MOBILE AC SET FROM VALUE 2 = #1 PM#1 WARR#3 GA#
• MOBILE AC SET FROM VALUE 2 NODE = 1 All 2 Warranty

The service jobs will be placed here in the node 'Warranty' if they include the action code 1 = PM or WARR or action code 3 = GA.

MOBILE AC SET FROM VALUE 3

Example: MOBILE AC SET FROM VALUE 3 = WARR (Warranty)
The action code(s) which decides if the job should be placed in a defined node (Only valid if MOBILE AC SET FROM VALUE 1 NODE..3 NODE is used). Use the # sign to add different action codes.
Remember! Only one of the action codes is required in order for the service job to be placed in the defined node.

MOBILE AC SET FROM VALUE 3 NODE

Example: MOBILE AC SET FROM VALUE 3 NODE = 1 All 2 Warranty
The node in the project tree for tasks that have a defines action code (see MOBILE AC SET FROM VALUE 1...3)
E.g.:

• MOBILE AC SET FROM VALUE 3 = #1 PM#1 WARR#3 GA#
• MOBILE AC SET FROM VALUE 3 NODE = 1 All 2 Warranty

The service jobs will be placed here in the node 'Warranty' if they include the action code 1 = PM or WARR or action code 3 = GA.

MOBILE BOOKED PROJECTS NODE

Example: MOBILE BOOKED PROJECTS NOde = 1 All 2 Supplier order
The node in the project tree for tasks with order lines that are marked as 'booked' in Evatic Mobile. If set blank, the tasks will not be moved.

MOBILE FINISHED PROJECTS NODE

Example: MOBILE FINISHED PROJECTS NODE = 1 All 2 Finished
The node in the project tree for tasks that are completed in Evatic Mobile. Only valid if Global User->Tree->FOR EACH DEPARTMENT is checked. If this is unchecked the correct setting is found at Company XXX->Evatic Mobile->MOBILE FINISHED PROJECTS NODE

MOBILE NOT SYNC PROJECTS NODE

Example: MOBILE NOT SYNC PROJECTS NODE = 1 All 2 Allocated 3 Awaiting parts# All 2 Allocated 3 Assigned
Only valid when SYNC ONLY TECHNICIAN NODE is unchecked.
The node(s) in the project tree for tasks that should not be synchronized. This means that jobs that are assigned and are stored under those nodes, will not be synchronized, even if Sync Only Technician Node is unchecked (regarding also the NODES MOBILE RETURNED PROJECTS NODE and MOBILE FINISHED PROJECTS NODE)

This setting can also be found under Department XXX, depending on the setting Global User \ Tree \ FOR EACH DEPARTMENT.

MOBILE RETURNED PROJECTS NODE

Example: MOBILE RETURNED PROJECTS NODE = 1 All 2 Allocated 3 Returned from mobile
The node in the project tree for tasks that are not completed in Evatic Mobile, but have been returned by the resource. Only valid if Global User->Tree->FOR EACH DEPARTMENT is checked. If this is unchecked the correct setting is found at Company XXX->Evatic Mobile->MOBILE RETURNED PROJECTS NODE

PLANNED HOURS BEFORE SYNC

Example: PLANNED HOURS BEFORE SYNC = 8
When should planned tasks be send to Evatic mobile? The system will look at the planned start time and entered hours here. E.g. if this setting is set to 24 hours, the task will pop up on the Mobile 24 hours before the planned start date/time.

PROJECT TAB

Example: PROJECT TAB = 1
Which tab in Project should be opened automatically when creating a new project? 0 for General, 1 for Machine etc.

WORK HOURS NORMAL

Example: WORK HOURS NORMAL = 8
Setting for entering the normal working hours for your company (= W1). This is used together with ADD TECHNICIAN OVERTIME (= calculating overtime automatically for the technicians)

WORK HOURS TO OVERTIME

Example: WORK HOURS TO OVERTIME= 5
Setting for entering hours to overtime for your company (=W2). This is used together with ADD TECHNICIAN OVERTIME (= calculating overtime automatically for the technicians)

DOCUMENT

INFO CHECKBOX 01

Example: INFO CHECKBOX 01 = Web
Extra columns (1-5) for the documents can be added. The text entered here will be the column name. Only the settings with a value will be displayed.
In Evatic Service see document/event tab under machine, model, contract, project, order

INFO CHECKBOX 02

Example: INFO CHECKBOX 02 = Web
Extra columns (1-5) for the documents can be added. The text entered here will be the column name. Only the settings with a value will be displayed.
In Evatic Service see document/event tab under machine, model, contract, project, order

INFO CHECKBOX 03

Example: INFO CHECKBOX 03 = Web
Extra columns (1-5) for the documents can be added. The text entered here will be the column name. Only the settings with a value will be displayed.
In Evatic Service see document/event tab under machine, model, contract, project, order

INFO CHECKBOX 04

Example: INFO CHECKBOX 04 = Web
Extra columns (1-5) for the documents can be added. The text entered here will be the column name. Only the settings with a value will be displayed.
In Evatic Service see document/event tab under machine, model, contract, project, order

INFO CHECKBOX 05

Example: INFO CHECKBOX 05 = Web
Extra columns (1-5) for the documents can be added. The text entered here will be the column name. Only the settings with a value will be displayed.
In Evatic Service see document/event tab under machine, model, contract, project, order

ECMM

CONSUMABLE ZERO VALUES CHECK ON IMPORT

If a DCA at one point reports the value 0 (zero) for all mapped consumables on the device, should the system then ignore to import these values to Eva tic?
If you set this setting to No, then the levels will be imported
If you set this to Yes, then the system will ignore to import these values.
This happen if all reported and mapped consumables have the value 0 at the same reporting time. This rule can be overruled by:
- If no level is reported for this machine and this consumable before
- Or if the last level was lower than the value set in the setting “CONSUMABLE ZERO VALUES LAST LEVEL LESS THAN”
- Or if the last reported consumable level was calculated to have a lower “remaining days” than the value set in “CONSUMABLE ZERO VALUES LAST CALC DAYS LESS THAN”

CONSUMABLE ZERO VALUES LAST CALC DAYS LESS THAN

Here you set number of days, numeric value
if the check "CONSUMABLE ZERO VALUES CHECK ON IMPORT" is turned on the values can be imported if the last reported consumable level was calculated to have a lower “remaining days” than the value set in this setting (CONSUMABLE ZERO VALUES LAST CALC DAYS LESS THAN).

See also description for "CONSUMABLE ZERO VALUES CHECK ON IMPORT"

CONSUMABLE ZERO VALUES LAST LEVEL LESS THAN

Here you set a level, numeric value between 0 and 100
if the check "CONSUMABLE ZERO VALUES CHECK ON IMPORT" is turned on the values can be imported if the last reported level was lower than the value set in this setting (CONSUMABLE ZERO VALUES LAST LEVEL LESS THAN).

See also description for "CONSUMABLE ZERO VALUES CHECK ON IMPORT"

DATE WARNING DAYS

Example: DATE WARNING DAYS = 10
Number of days since last consumable information when status should change to date warning.

DELIVERY COST ARTICLE NO

Example: DELIVERY COST ARTICLE NO = 100
Delivery cost article no.

DELIVERY COST HIDE

Set delivery cost not invoiceable and hide - for cost purposes only
If this setting is checked, then it will be visible and the contract type decides if it should be invoiceable

DELIVERY COST ON

Should delivery cost be on/off.

NO DAYS MAN ORDER CHANGE TO WFNP

Example: NO DAYS MAN ORDER CHANGE TO WFNP = 10
Default value 10
If the ECMM status is 'Normal' and the number of days since 'Last del. date' is smaller than this setting ( NO DAYS MAN ORDER CHANGE TO WFNP), and there have not been any toner changes (peaks) after the last delivery date then the system will automatically change status to 'Wait for next peak'. This means that another user has already sent a toner to the customer and this toner is still not replaced.
Exception; If ECMM status is DATE WARNING and no data has yet been received on the machine (history is empty) and there is sent a toner to the customer Evatic will change status when the first data is received. If the data is higher than PEAK HIGH VALUE then the status will be set to Normal. If the data is lower that PEAK HIGH VALUE the status will be set to WAIT NEXT PEAK
You can turn off this function if you set the setting to 0 or negative number

NO DAYS MAN ORDER CHANGE UN RE

Example: NO DAYS MAN ORDER CHANGE UN RE = 10
Default value 10
If the ECMM status is 'Unexpected refill' and the number of days since 'Last del. date' is smaller or the same than this setting, then the system will automatically change status to 'Normal Refill'

NOT CALC DAYS WITHOUT CHANGE

In the calculation of remaining days should the calculation remove days where there is no change.

ON

Should the ECMM fields be visible in Evatic Service (new tab on contract, new column in model window - 'units per article'new window My Evatic \ Order \ ECMM Consumable preview).

ORDER TYPE

Example: ORDER TYPE = CONS
Order type for orders created in My Evatic \ Order \ ECMM Consumable preview.
When should the system set consumable (toner) as replaced?

PEAK ALWAYS DELTA VALUE

This setting is used together with the setting PEAK ALWAYS VALUE.
Possible values are between 0-100

PEAK ALWAYS VALUE

Example: PEAK ALWAYS VALUE = 90

PEAK DELTA VALUE

Example: PEAK DELTA VALUE = 15

PEAK HIGH VALUE

Example: PEAK HIGH VALUE = 70

PEAK LOW VALUE

Example: PEAK LOW VALUE = 40
Case 1
a. new level must be higher than last level (before 'new' level)
b. new level must be higher or equal PEAK HIGH VALUE
c. last level (before 'new' level) must be smaller or equal PEAK LOW VALUE
Case 2
a. new level must be higher than last level (before 'new' level)
b. new level must be higher or equal PEAK ALWAYS VALUE
c. The difference between last level and new level is bigger or equal to PEAK ALWAYS DELTA VALUE
Case 3
a. new level must be higher than last level (before 'new' level)
b. The difference between last level and new level is bigger or equal to PEAK DELTA VALUE

USE MACHINE VISIT ADDRESS AS DELIVERY

If not checked, the delivery addresses used on orders are:
1) If a delivery address is set and saved in the 'Delivery Address' - button on machine, this address is used
2) Else, the delivery address on the contract is used.
If checked, the delivery addresses used on orders are:
1) If a delivery address is set and saved in the 'Delivery Address' - button on machine, this address is used
2) Else, the visit address on the machine is used.

Evatic AI

CLIENT ID

Client Id used for authentication for your instance of the Evatic AI API

SECRET

Secret used for authentication for your instance of the Evatic AI API

URL

Base Url used for your instance of the Evatic AI API

Evatic Map

ADDRESS SELECTION

Which address should be used in Evatic Map, address used for getting coordinates.

• Address 1, post code and post location (and country)
• Address 2, post code and post location (and country)
• Address 3, post code and post location (and country)
• Address 1 address 2, post code and post location (and country)
• Address 2 address 3, post code and post location (and country)
• Address 1 address 2 address 3, post code and post location (and country)
• Address 1, post location (and country)
• Address 2, post location (and country)
  

GEOCODING MIN RELEVANCE

Put in the minumum relevance that is expected from mapbox for the address to be accepted when you do a geocoding request. Put in a number between 10 to 100. The number you add here will be divided by 100 and then be checked if the relevance from mapbox is higher than this number. Mapbox returns a number between 0 and 1 for instance 0.89

MAPBOX TOKEN

Needed to load map in Evatic 9. Ask support to get your Mapbox access token

Evatic Mobile

ADD ON ORDER CUSTOMER

If an open order exists on the same task, the order from mobile will be automatically added to this order. If an open project order exists for the same customer, but not on the same task, you can decide if the order from mobile should be added to this order or not.If unchecked a new order will be created.

ADD ON ORDER NOT ORDER TYPE

Example: ADD ON ORDER NOT ORDER TYPE = CALC;
Then Evatic will not add new items from the task on mobile, to any order with order type CALC. All other ordertypes goes in this example.
In the setting you can add order types that you not want order lines from mobile solutions to be added to. You can add one or several order types. You must add ; after each order type. Examples:

• STD;
• STD;SAL;
• GA;STD;SAL;

ADD ON ORDER PROJECT

If an open order exists on the same task, the order from mobile will be automatically added to this order. If an open order exists on the same project, but not on the same task, you can decide if the order from mobile should be added to this order or not. If unchecked a new order will be created.

ADD TECHNICIAN OVERTIME

Should the system calculate overtime for the technician automatically when he works outside the companies working hours (can be set up differently for each department).
The different overtime hours/levels are set here:

• Company XXX/Department YYY/ WORK HOURS NORMAL

<li>
    Normal working day (default = 8)
</li>

• Company XXX/Department YYY/ WORK HOURS TO OVERTIME
• Working hours from normal working day ends to overtime (default = 5).

Example:

• W1 07:00 - 15:00 8 hours
• W2 15:00 - 20:00 5 hours
• W3 20:00 - 21:00 1 hour (calc. automatically)

Note When the technician adds from-to time that includes over midnight (e.g. 23:30-00:30), the order will include two order lines. Despite the settings Add Work Overtime/ Add Travel Overtime = unchecked
Hours added in the calendar before the working day starts, will calc.100% overtime (if ADD WORK OVERTIME = checked)
Hours added in the calendar where the company has closed, will calc.100% overtime (if ADD WORK OVERTIME = checked)

Add Work Overtime must also be checked.

ADD TRAVEL OVERTIME

When is checked, the system will automatically calculate overtime. If the travel time from Mobile exceeds the department's opening hours, a new order line will be added. T2 will be used as article for the overtime. Any order with overtime will have status 'O' - Open.
(Tip: have a look at the setting Auto Split Rounding)
Hours added in the calendar before the working day starts, will calc.100% overtime (if ADD TRAVEL OVERTIME = checked)
Hours added in the calendar where the company has closed, will calc.100% overtime (if ADD TRAVEL OVERTIME = checked)

Use also the following setting: Evatic Mobile/ HOURS TO MAX OVERTIME
When the technician adds from-to time that includes over midnight (e.g. 23:30-00:30), the order will include two order lines. Despite the settings Add Work Overtime/ ADD TRAVEL OVERTIME = unchecked

ADD VISIT ADDRESS AS FIRST LINE

Should a text line be added to orders from mobile?
The text line will be added at the top and contain address name, address 1-3, post code and postal description. This address is the visit address from the project.

ADD WORK OVERTIME

When checked, the system will automatically calculate overtime. If the work time from Mobile exceeds the department's opening hours, a new order line will be added. W2 will be used as article for the overtime. Any order with overtime will have status 'O' - Open.

Use also the following setting: Evatic Mobile/ HOURS TO MAX OVERTIME
(Tip: have a look at the setting Auto Split Rounding)

AGGREGATE USE DEFAULT STOCK

When is checked, the default stock no from the included articles is used. If unchecked, the technicians default stock is used.

ALLOW ASSIGN OTHERS

Should it be possible to assign task to other technicians when adding new task.

ALLOW CHANGE COST PRICE AG LINES

Should it be possible to change the cost price on aggregated articles.

ALLOW CHANGE QTY AG DOWN

Should it be possible to change the quantity down on aggregated articles.

ALLOW CHANGE QTY AG UP

Should it be possible to change the quantity up on aggregated articles.

ALLOW CHANGE SERV ART INV TYPE

Should it be possible to change service article invoice type? (If unchecked, the drop down list with the values contract/invoiceable/not invoiceable are not displayed)

ALLOW CHANGE STOCK

Should it be possible to change the stock.
If unchecked, then the drop-down to select stock is removed so that it is not possible to select another stock for the articles. It will then always use technician's stock.

ALLOW DEL AG LINES

Should it be possible to delete aggregated article lines.

ALLOW EDIT COST PRICE

Should it be possible to edit cost price.

Sync Cost Price must be checked.

ALLOW EDIT INTERNAL INFO

Should it be possible to edit internal info. If unchecked the internal info is not available.

ALLOW EDIT PROJECT INFO

If checked, then it is possible to edit the project and task info fields in EMA/EMS and then update this on the project/task in ES.

ALLOW FINISH PROJECT

Should it be possible to complete tasks and orders from Evatic Mobile.

ALLOW FINISH PROJECT AC CODE

Example: ALLOW FINISH PROJECT AC CODE= FIN; DEF
Finish projects and the connected order automatically from mobile if the task has a defined action code. Enter action code value. Several action codes can be entered, separated by semicolon.
This will work even if the settings Evatic Mobile / ALLOW FINISH PROJECT OR ALLOW FINISH PROJECTS ONLY is unchecked.

ALLOW FINISH PROJECT AC NO

Example: ALLOW FINISH PROJECT AC NO = 3
Finish projects and the connected order automatically from mobile if the task has a defined action code. Which action code (1-3) should be checked?
This will work even if the settings Evatic Mobile / ALLOW FINISH PROJECT or ALLOW FINISH PROJECTS ONLY is unchecked.

ALLOW FINISH PROJECT CUST SG NO

Example: ALLOW FINISH PROJECT CUST SG NO= 4
Finish projects and the connected order automatically from mobile if the task has a defined customer sortgroup. Which sort group (1-5) should be checked?
This will work even if the settings Evatic Mobile / ALLOW FINISH PROJECT or ALLOW FINISH PROJECTS ONLY Is unchecked.

ALLOW FINISH PROJECT CUST SG VALUE

Example: ALLOW FINISH PROJECT CUST SG VALUE= PRIV
Finish projects and the connected order automatically from mobile if the task has a defined customer sort group. Enter sort group value. Several sort groups can be entered, separated by semicolon.
This will work even if the settings Evatic Mobile / Allow Finish Project or Allow Finish Projects Only is unchecked.

ALLOW FINISH PROJECT ONLY

Should it be possible to complete project task and not the connected order.

This setting Allow Finish Project Only = checked, will only have effect when Allow Finish Project is unchecked.

ALLOW FINISH PROJECT SC CODE

Example: ALLOW FINISH PROJECT SC CODE= FIN; CLEAN
Finish projects and the connected order automatically from mobile if the task has a defined symptom code. Enter symptom code value. Several symptom codes can be entered, separated by semicolon.
This will work even if the settings Evatic Mobile / Allow Finish Project or Allow Finish Projects Only is unchecked

ALLOW FINISH PROJECT SC NO

Example: ALLOW FINISH PROJECT SC NO = 1
Finish projects and the connected order automatically from mobile if the task has a defined symptom code. Which symptom code (1-3) should be checked?
This will work even if the settings Evatic Mobile / Allow Finish Project or Allow Finish Projects Only is unchecked

ALLOW NEGATIVE STOCK

EMS: Should it be possible to add order lines with negative stock value.

ALLOW START TIME MULTIPLE

Should it be possible to start travel/work time on several tasks at the same time?

ALLOW USE NOT ACTIVE ARTICLES

Should it be possible to use non active articles (= and send the order back to Evatic Service. If unchecked the order will be stopped?

ARTICLE ONLINE SEARCH

Should an online search be set up direct to the Evatic Service database for the articles in EMS/EMA. This in order to not have to synchronize all the articles to the mobile device. See also Sync Articles.
E.g.: the settings can be combined. (Sync Articles = checked and Article Online Search = checked). Articles that are flagged with "Use in mobile' will be synchronized, but at the same time you can do an online search (those articles does not need to be flagged in Evatic Service as 'use in mobile')

ARTICLE SEARCH AUTOSYNC ON

Should the system do an auto sync when searching after article on stock the first time?

AUTO ADD DEF QTY ARTICLES

Should service articles set as default be added automatically when synchronizing data to Evatic Service?
PS! These are service-articles that have a default QTY added in the service-article setup in Evatic Service.

AUTO ADD ON EXISTING

If project consumables are to be added to an existing order, you can decide if the order texts should be automatically added to this order or not.

If Company XXX/Order Text/Auto Add On Existing is checked, this setting here will overwrite the text entered under ORDER TEXT.

AUTO ADD TEXT LINES

Example: AUTO ADD TEXT LINES = 0
Should it automatically be added text lines to the order when finishing a project. Info comes from ORDER TEXT in Evatic Admin.
Note If Company XXX/Order Text/AUTO ADD ON EXISTING is unchecked and Company XXX/Evatic Mobile/AUTO ADD TEXT LINES is checked; text will be added.

AUTO SPLIT ROUNDING

Should automatically the rounding (e.g. 0,5:0,5) from the service articles tables be used when synchronizing orderliness to Evatic Service?

AUTOSYNC DISABLE IN PROJECT

EMS: Should auto sync be turned off, when working on a project

AUTOSYNC ON

Should auto sync be activated, in order for the system to automatically check if the technician has new projects/tasks or not?

AUTOSYNC REFRESH INTERVAL

Example: AUTOSYNC REFRESH INTERVAL = 30
Number of minutes EMS/EMA should check for new tasks, messages, undo checkout etc. with Evatic Service.

AUTOTIME STOP ON SIGNATURE

(Not in use) Setting for Evatic Mobile PC: Should the work end time automatically be set when you complete the task?

CAL SHOW HISTORY MONTHS

Example: CAL SHOW HISTORY MONTHS = 3 (months)
EMS: Number of months back and forth to check for calendar entries (= completed service tasks).

CHANGE PROJECT STATUS ON

(Not in use) Setting for Evatic Mobile PC: Should it be possible to move a task from the Outbox to the Inbox and therefore change its status.

CHECK LIST HIDE LISTVIEW

The checklist can be displayed as a tree structure or list form. Should the tree structure be hidden?

CHECK LIST MACHINE INFO

Example: CHECK LIST MACHINE INFO = <VISIT ADDRESS NAME><VISIT ADDRESS 1><VISIT POSTAL CODE><VISIT POST DESC>
Machine address information can be displayed below the selected checklist if a machine is linked to the checklist. This information is labeled 'Address'.
If the setting has no value, the label is not displayed.
Available bookmarks:

• <VISIT ADDRESS NAME>
• <VISIT ADDRESS 1>
• <VISIT ADDRESS 2>
• <VISIT ADDRESS 3>
• <VISIT POSTAL CODE>
• <VISIT POST DESC>
• <LOCATION>

CHECK PRE ORDER ARTICLES

Should it be a check for the pre-orders when completing projects? If the technician tries to complete a project that includes pre-order articles that has not been checked and are still marked with <PRE>, a pop up warning will appear. He need to mark those articles as 'used' in order to complete the task.

CHECKLIST ON

Should checklist be used or not?

CREATE MACHINE ON MODEL ARTICLE

Setting to help creating new machines directly from EMA. Articles used on the mobile device which are linked to a model will create machines automatically in Evatic Service.
Following issues to remember:
1. The models in Evatic Service must be linked to an article.
2. The articles used on EMA, which creates the machines, will be deleted from the order.
New Machine:
3. Machine number/Serial number will be the text entered in the article description field on the EMA
4. If the service project is linked to another machine, the same address will be used for the new machine. If not, the first visit address on the customer card will be used.
5. If the service project is linked to another machine, the same installation date is used. If not, to days' date is used.
6. Phone and fax number is added from the project.
7. Project node is blank/not set.
8. Machine information field is filled with the text NEW FROM PDA (searchable).

CREATE PROJECT DEPT LIMIT

If checked, then the department from the logged in technician is used to limit the customer and machine search when creating new projects. If unchecked, no department limitation.

CREATE SUPPLIER ORDER FROM BOOK

Should a supplier order from EMS automatically be created, when the order lines in mobile are flagged as 'booked'?
The system places this as an existing order for the supplier in Evatic service (see Stock Admin/Existing order).

When this setting is checked, SAVE ORDER PROP FROM BOOK must be unchecked.

CUSTOMER REF FROM PROJECT ON

Which reference person should be set on the orders from EMS?
When this is checked, the contact person on the project (see General tab) will be chosen as "Your reference'.

CUSTOMER SALESMAN OUR REF ON

Should the reference person on orders be the salesman? (If unchecked, the technician is used).

CUSTOMER SATISFACTION SURVEY MODE

EMS: Should emoticons to indicate customer satisfaction be used or not?
If the setting is checked, a 3-point semantic differential scale using 7-point scale values are displayed in the Signature-tab (1: Very Unsatisfied > 4: Neither satisfied nor unsatisfied > 7: Very Satisfied)

DEFAULT DURATION

Example: DEFAULT DURATION=60
The number of minutes to be set as default planned time when creating a new task from the calendar.

DEFAULT RESPONSE TIME

.

DOCUMENT ON

Should the Attachment tab in EMS be visible or not?

FINISH NULL ORDER

Should it be possible to finish 0 orders automatically from mobile (and linked projects) even if the setting Allow Finish Project is unchecked.

FINISH ORDER ON OPEN PROJECT

Should the order be completed even if the project is not completed?

FIXED MESSAGES

Used to add fixed messages (templates) to send from EMS. Messages must be added, separated by semicolon.
Example = Meeting;Birthday;Training

GPS COORD AUTO WORK HOURS

Example: GPS COORD AUTO WORK HOURS = 0
Should the GPS position only be sent to the server inside the work hours according to the calendar in Evatic? (Company or department or technicians calendar) (only works if technician has agreed to the geolocation consent.)

GPS COORD INTERVAL

Example: GPS COORD INTERVAL = 30
1 -> 60. Number of minutes between each time the mobile solution should send the GPS position to the server
(only works if technician has agreed to the geolocation consent.)

HIDE SYNC SERVICES ARTICLES

EMS: Should it be possible to hide the option 'Sync services/articles' in the menu?

HIDE UPDATE BASIC DATA MENU

Should the option 'Update basic data' be hidden from the Synchronization menu?

HISTORY GENERAL

Which projects history should be displayed. If checked, then projects linked to customer, with or without machine are displayed.
If unchecked, only machine history is displayed for task with machine and only customer history for task without machine.

HISTORY SHOW AC TEXT

(Not in use) *** Should the action code text or the code itself show in the history tab in Evatic Mobile PC? Checked = text, unchecked = code

HISTORY SHOW ALL ORDERS

(Not in use) *** Should all historic orders show in the history tab in Evatic Mobile PC?

HISTORY SHOW SAME PROJECT

When project data has been returned to the server, should that data show in the history for the project task you are still working on?

HISTORY SHOW SC TEXT

(Not in use) *** Should the symptom code text or the code itself show in the history tab in Evatic Mobile PC? Checked = text, unchecked = code

HISTORY SHOW TECHNICIAN NAME

(Not in use) *** Should the technician's name or number show in the history tab in Evatic Mobile PC? Checked = name, unchecked = number

HOURS TO MAX OVERTIME

Example: HOURS TO MAX OVERTIME = 5
If 100% overtime should be used, this setting defines how many hours to add to the department's closing time before 100% overtime will be calculated. For example, if the department's closing time is 16:00 and the setting is 5, 100% overtime will be calculated from 21:00. Any order with overtime will have status 'O' - Open.

Use also the setting Evatic Mobile/ADD WORK OVERTIME

INT MOVE OWN STOCK

Should the technician be able to move articles from his own stock to another technician's stock?

Stock Admin Qty Update must be checked if the technician should be able to move articles to another stock.

LEGAL AGREEMENT CONFIRME BEFORE SIGNING

Example: LEGAL AGREEMENT CONFIRME BEFORE SIGNING= Please confirm the legal terms before signing
EMS: It is possible to enter some text (for example legal terms) which the customer needs to confirm before signing. This appears when the customer taps the Customer-signature field in the Signature-tab.
If the setting has no value (default), this will not appear and the customer will be sent directly to the signature.

MACHINE ACCESSORIES CHANGE ON

Should it be possible to add, change or delete machine accessories?

MACHINE EDIT ON

This setting has been changed and moved to the users (see Mobile Admin).

MACHINE PROPERTIES CHANGE ON

EMS: Should it be possible to change machine properties?

MAIL ADD CHECKLIST AS ATTACHMENT

Should checklist also be added to the email when sending the service report to the customer.
The customer will receive a document for all the checklist added to the task
(see SEND MAIL TO CUSTOMER ON)

MAIL ADD CHECKLIST MERGED NAME

Example: MAIL ADD CHECKLIST MERGED NAME = <PROJECT NO>/<TASK NO> <CUSTOMER NAME> Checklists merged.pdf

Name of the merged pdf file. Here you can use bookmarks same as in setting 'Technician Message'

MAIL ADD CHECKLIST MERGED ON

If this setting is checked, then all the checklists created as pdf-files and sent as attachment in auto mail from project is being merged into 1 pdf document.

MANDATORY AC 1

Should action code1 be filled in before a project in Evatic Mobile can be completed?

MANDATORY AC 2

Should action code 2 be filled in before a project in Evatic Mobile can be completed?

MANDATORY AC 3

Should action code 3 be filled in before a project in Evatic Mobile can be completed?

MANDATORY ACTION TEXT

Should action text be filled in before a project in Evatic Mobile can be completed?

MANDATORY ACTION TEXT RETURN

Should action text be filled in before a project in Evatic Mobile can be returned?

MANDATORY CHECK LIST ID

Should checklist ID be filled in before a project in Evatic Mobile can be completed?

MANDATORY METER READING

Should all meter readings be filled in before a project in Evatic Mobile can be completed?

MANDATORY REFERENCE

Should reference be filled in before a project in Evatic Mobile can be completed?

MANDATORY SC 1

Should symptom code 1 be filled in before a new project in Evatic Mobile can be added?

MANDATORY SC 2

Should symptom code 2 be filled in before a new project in Evatic Mobile can be added?

MANDATORY SC 3

Should symptom code 3 be filled in before a new project in Evatic Mobile can be added?

MANDATORY SIGNATURE CUSTOMER

Should customer signature be filled in before a project in Evatic Mobile can be completed?

MANDATORY SIGNATURE CUSTOMER NAME

Should customer signature name be filled in before a project in Evatic Mobile can be completed?

MANDATORY SIGNATURE TECH

Should technician signature be filled in before a project in Evatic Mobile can be completed?

MANDATORY SYMPTOM TEXT

Should symptom text be filled in before a new project in Evatic Mobile can be added?

MANDATORY TRAVEL TIME

Should travel time be filled in before a project in Evatic Mobile can be completed?

MANDATORY TRAVEL TIME RETURN

Should travel time be filled in before a project in Evatic Mobile can be returned?

MANDATORY WORK TIME

Should work time be filled in before a project in Evatic Mobile can be completed?

MANDATORY WORK TIME RETURN

Should work time be filled in before a project in Evatic Mobile can be returned?

METER READING VALIDATION

This setting is created for a specific customer. Please contact support for further details.

METER READING VALIDATION NODE

This setting is created for a specific customer. Please contact support for further details.

MOBILE AC SET FROM VALUE 1

Example: MOBILE AC SET FROM VALUE 1 = WARR (Warranty)
The action code(s) which decides if the job should be placed in a defined node (Only valid If MOBILE AC SET FROM VALUE 1 NODE..3 Node is used). Use the # sign to add different action codes.
Remember! Only one of the action codes is required in order for the service job to be placed in the defined node.

MOBILE AC SET FROM VALUE 1 NODE

Example: MOBILE AC SET FROM VALUE 1 NODE = 1 All 2 Warranty
The node in the project tree for tasks that have a defines action code (see MOBILE AC SET FROM VALUE 1...3)
E.g.:

• MOBILE AC SET FROM VALUE 1 = #1 PM#1 WARR#3 GA#
• MOBILE AC SET FROM VALUE 1 NODE = 1 All 2 Warranty

The service jobs will be placed here in the node 'Warranty' if they include the action code 1 = PM or WARR or action code 3 = GA.

MOBILE AC SET FROM VALUE 2

Example: MOBILE AC SET FROM VALUE 2 = WARR (Warranty)
The action code(s) which decides if the job should be placed in a defined node (Only valid If MOBILE AC SET FROM VALUE 1 NODE..3 Node is used). Use the # sign to add different action codes.
Remember! Only one of the action codes is required in order for the service job to be placed in the defined node.

MOBILE AC SET FROM VALUE 2 NODE

Example: MOBILE AC SET FROM VALUE 2 NODE = 1 All 2 Warranty
The node in the project tree for tasks that have a defines action code (see MOBILE AC SET FROM VALUE 1...3)
E.g.:

• MOBILE AC SET FROM VALUE 2 = #1 PM#1 WARR#3 GA#
• MOBILE AC SET FROM VALUE 2 NODE = 1 All 2 Warranty

The service jobs will be placed here in the node 'Warranty' if they include the action code 1 = PM or WARR or action code 3 = GA.

MOBILE AC SET FROM VALUE 3

Example: MOBILE AC SET FROM VALUE 3 = WARR (Warranty)
The action code(s) which decides if the job should be placed in a defined node (Only valid If MOBILE AC SET FROM VALUE 1 NODE..3 Node is used). Use the # sign to add different action codes.
Remember! Only one of the action codes is required in order for the service job to be placed in the defined node.

MOBILE AC SET FROM VALUE 3 NODE

Example: MOBILE AC SET FROM VALUE 3 NODE = 1 All 2 Warranty
The node in the project tree for tasks that have a defines action code (see MOBILE AC SET FROM VALUE 1...3)
E.g.:

• MOBILE AC SET FROM VALUE 3 = #1 PM#1 WARR#3 GA#
• MOBILE AC SET FROM VALUE 3 NODE = 1 All 2 Warranty

The service jobs will be placed here in the node 'Warranty' if they include the action code 1 = PM or WARR or action code 3 = GA.

MOBILE BOOKED PROJECTS NODE

Example: MOBILE BOOKED PROJECTS NODE = 1 All 2 Supplier order
The node in the project tree for tasks with order lines that are marked as 'booked' in Evatic Mobile. If set blank, the tasks will not be moved.

This setting can also be found under Department XXX, depending on the setting Global User \ Tree \ FOR EACH DEPARTMENT.

MOBILE FINISHED PROJECTS NODE

Example: MOBILE FINISHED PROJECTS NODE = 1 All 2 Finished
The node in the project tree for tasks that are completed in Evatic Mobile. Only valid if Global User->Tree->FOR EACH DEPARTMENT is unchecked. If this is checked the correct setting is found at Company XXX->Department XXX->MOBILE FINISHED PROJECTS NODE

MOBILE NOT SYNC PROJECTS NODE

Example: MOBILE NOT SYNC PROJECTS NODE = 1 All 2 Allocated 3 Awaiting parts# All 2 Allocated 3 Assigned
Only valid when Sync Only Technician Node is unchecked.
The node(s) in the project tree for tasks that should not be synchronized. This means that jobs that are assigned and are stored under those nodes, will not be synchronized, even if Sync Only Technician Node is unchecked (regarding also the nodes Mobile Returned Projects Node and Mobile Finished Projects Node)

This setting can also be found under Department XXX, depending on the setting Global User \ Tree \ FOR EACH DEPARTMENT.

MOBILE RETURNED PROJECTS NODE

Example: MOBILE RETURNED PROJECTS NODE = 1 All 2 Allocated 3 Returned from mobile
The node in the project tree for tasks that are not completed in Evatic Mobile, but returned by a resource. Only valid if Global User->Tree->For Each Department is unchecked. If this is checked, the correct setting is found at Company XXX->Department XXX->Mobile Returned Projects Node

MOVE MACHINE BETWEEN CUSTOMER

EMA: should it be possible to select a machine from another customer?
When checked this means:

• you can add a machine from another customer to a task (EMA - INFO - change machine)
• you can add a machine from another customer when creating a new task on EMA

NEW TASK ADD MACHINE FROM SC

If this setting is checked and you create a new project from mobile without a machine the system will try to add a machine to the project.
The system will only add a machine if the customer connected to the project has:

• A machine where sort group 1 = symptom code 1 or symptom code 2 or symptom code 3
• Only if this machine is the only machine the customer has of this model

ORDER NOT ADD OUR REF

New setting that decides if orders created from mobile solutions should get the field 'Our Ref' filled in with the technician name. (Default unchecked = technician name is used as 'Our ref').

PERCENT INCREASE

Example: PERCENT INCREASE = 30
This is a check for the meter you enter in Evatic Mobile. The Value should not be higher than expected % increase based on previous readings. E.g. If your meter in average has used 100 copies each day between the last two readings before the third one and you have entered 30 (%) here, then you will get a warning if your meter has used more than 130 copies each day since the last reading.

PLANNER ONLY TECH MOBILE

Planner functionality: When assigning jobs to other technician in the technician list, should all technician be visible or only technicians with mobile.
If checked, then only the technicians that is set up to use mobile are shown. If unchecked, then all technicians are visible in the planner list.

You can also combine this with the setting Planner Only Tech Own Dept

PLANNER ONLY TECH OWN DEPT

Planner functionality: When assigning jobs to other technician in the technician list, should all technician be visible or only technicians from the same department.

You can also combine this with the setting PLANNER ONLY TECH MOBILE

PLANNER SHOW NODE ASSIGNED

Should planner assign tree be visible or not. (Default unchecked; node assigned tree is not visible).

PUSH GPS COORD INTERVAL

Example: PUSH GPS COORD INTERVAL = 0 0/20 * * * ?
EMS: How often should EMS send push notifications to the device to request GPS coordinates?
For more information about the format used:

    http://www.quartz-scheduler.net/documentation/quartz-2.x/tutorial/crontrigger.html

PUSH NEW TASK INTERVAL

Example: PUSH NEW TASK INTERVAL = 0 0/1 * * * ?
EMS: How often should EMS check for new tasks and send push notifications to the
device regarding new tasks for download?
For more information about the format used:

    http://www.quartz-scheduler.net/documentation/quartz-2.x/tutorial/crontrigger.html

PUSH RESEND GPS COORD INTERVAL

Example: PUSH RESEND GPS COORD INTERVAL = 15 
EMS: If there is no response to Push Gps Coord Interval, how often should EMS re-send push notifications to the device to request GPS coordinates? Number added here is minutes.

PUSH RESEND NEW TASK INTERVAL

Example: PUSH RESEND NEW TASK INTERVAL = 10
EMS: If there is no response to Push New Task Interval, how often should EMS re-send push notifications to the device regarding new tasks for download? Number added here is minutes.

QUICK ORDER FREQ LIST SG NO

Example: Quick Order Freq List Sg No = 1
(Not in use) ***This must be one of the 5 sort groups. The allowed values are 1,2,3,4 and 5. Which sort group from article should be used as extra column in the quick order and frequency list.

SAVE ORDER PROP FROM BOOK

Should it be possible when marking the order lines as "booked/ordered', that the system places this as new orders for the supplier in Evatic service? The system will not create one supplier order, but gather all proposals and show them when you press "Generate order proposal' under Article/Stock Admin/New order tab.
Note When this setting is checked, the setting CREATE SUPPLIER ORDER FROM BOOK will not work.

SEARCH SUPPLIER ARTICLE NO

Should it be possible to search for the supplier article number or not.

SEND MAIL CONTACT GROUP COPY

Example: SEND MAIL CONTACT GROUP COPY = Admin
Add the name of the contact person group in this setting to send the service report to all active contact persons on the customer that has this contact group and that has an email-address in Email
The mail will be sent with one time with all the email addresses in the 'to' field on the mail.

SEND MAIL TO CUSTOMER ON

A service report can automatically be generated and sent by e-mail to the customer when finishing a project.
If a contact person with an email address is added to the task, the e-mail address is automatically suggested as the receiver of the email when this setting is checked.
If unchecked, an email address must be selected or added manually.
The following settings must also be set:
Company XXX \ Mail Project \ REPLY ADDRESS Company XXX \ Mail Project \ REPLY NAME Company XXX \ Mail Project \ SUBJECT

For the mail to be sent, Server Auto Mail must be turned on. 1. Stop the program Evatic Server 2. In Evatic Admin set: Company XXX \ Evatic Server \ Send Mail Auto = 1
Check also: Company XXX \ Mail \ SYSTEM = SMTP Company XXX \ Mail \ SERVER Company XXX \ Mail \ SMTP LOGIN Company XXX \ Mail \ SMTP PASSWORD
3. Then start Evatic Server again and the program will send the emails.

SERVICE ARTICLES DEPT LIMIT

If checked, then only service articles connected to your department will be visible.

SERVICE ARTICLES TECH ONLY

If checked, then only service articles connected to the technician will be available.

SERVICES RESOURCE ON

Should it be possible for a technician to add service articles (work, travel etc.) for other technicians or not.
(When is unchecked, the drop down list will not be visible).

SET HIDE ON NONE INV SER LINES

When the service lines are not invoiceable, the 'Hide'-function will be used.

SET NODE FROM PROJECT INFO NUMBER

Example: SET NODE FROM PROJECT INFO NUMBER = 01
When the user creates a new project from mobile and the info fields are used.
If this is set to 01 then the node will be set to the node with the same name that is added in the info field 1
If 02 info field 2 is used.

SET PROJECT TASK STATUS NEW TASK

Example: SET PROJECT TASK STATUS NEW TASK= <blank>
Set this value to the default project task status on new tasks from mobile solutions, e.g. NEW.

The code must be added to the table in Evatic Service (see settings/Project/Task status).

SHOW METER

Should the 'Meter' Information show in Evatic Mobile?

SHOW MODEL AS TYPE OR DESC

Setting that decides if model type or model description should be visible in mobile
If this setting is unchecked, then model type is shown
if this setting is checked then model description is shown

SHOW ORDER OPTION FROM ADD ARTICLE

Should the checkbox/button 'Order' (booking) be shown in the article window.

SHOW ORDERLINE INFO 01

Should order line info 01 be visible on the article and order lines?
See setting Order Info

SHOW ORDERLINE INFO 02

Should order line info 02 be visible on the article and the order lines?
See setting Order Info

SHOW ORDERLINE INFO 03

Should order line info 03 be visible on the article and the order lines?
See setting Order Info

SHOW ORDERLINE INFO 04

Should order line info 04 be visible on the article and the order lines?
See setting Order Info

SHOW ORDERLINE SG1 ON

(Not in use)*** In Evatic Mobile PC, should article sort group 1 be visible on the order lines?

SHOW ORDERLINE SG2 ON

(Not in use)*** In Evatic Mobile PC, should article sortgroup2 be visible on the order lines?

SHOW SERVICES COST PRICE

(Not in use)*** In Evatic Mobile PC: Should cost price be shown on service articles?

SHOW TECHNICIAN START STOP

Should start/stop time be shown in the calendar even if the project has not been completed. If checked, the system will save all start/stop times (travel and work)
Colors uses:

• Company YYY \ Project \ TECHNICIAN START STOP W COLOR
• Company YYY \ Project \ TECHNICIAN START STOP T COLOR

SIGNATURE ON

Should it be possible to enter signature or not.

SIGNATURE PAD TYPE

Example: SIGNATURE PAD TYPE = TOPAZ
Enter the signature pad type

STOCK ADMIN AUTO ADD STOCK INFO

Should automatic stock info be added when marking 'Order' in the mobile solutions.
If checked and the technicians order one article, the article is marked as stock tracking and the amount in stock will be set to unchecked.

STOCK ADMIN DELIVER ARTICLES

Should articles be removed from stock (e.g. same as if you generate a 'packing slip' in ES), whenever stock articles are used on an order in Evatic Mobile.

STOCK ADMIN DELIVERY ADDRESS

Should stock articles in the order be set as default?

STOCK ADMIN ORDER CREATE

Should it be possible for the technician to do stock-refill. An order proposal will be created directly from mobile (see Stock Admin/New orders in ES).
See also SAVE ORDER PROP FROM BOOK

STOCK ADMIN QTY UPDATE

Should it be possible for the technician to update his stock directly on the mobile.
If checked, it can be combined with the setting INT MOVE OWN STOCK.

STOCK ADMIN SYNC MEAN COST PRICE

Should it be possible to sync the mean cost price.

USE MEAN COST PRICE must also be checked.

STOCK MINIMUM

Example: STOCK MINIMUM = -1
When synchronizing articles from the technician stock, should only articles which are on stock be synchronized or not. 0 = Only article on stock will be synchronized where qty is higher then 0. -1 = All articles linked to technicians stock will be synchronized (where qty is higher then -1)
See also SYNC ARTICLE FROM OTHER STOCK and Use technician stock on

SUPPLIER CHANGE INFO REQUIRED

If a default supplier is not selected on the order lines, the Order-Info field must be entered.

SUPPLIER ORDER ALSO ADD ORDER

Should an order proposal for the supplier and order lines automatically be created in Evatic Service when you mark the articles in Evatic Mobile as "booked'?
This setting can be combined with the settings: Company XXX \ Evatic Mobile \ SAVE ORDER PROP FROM BOOK and Company XXX \ Evatic Mobile \ CREATE SUPPLIER ORDER FROM BOOK.

SYNC ARTICLE FROM OTHER STOCK

Should articles from other stock be synchronized If checked, the articles must be marked as 'Sync with Mobile' (see Article in Evatic Service). See also Stock Minimum and Use Technician Stock On

SYNC ARTICLE NUM EACH TIME

Example: SYNC ARTICLE NUM EACH TIME = 5000
How many articles should be synchronized each time?

Due to memory problems on the Evatic Mobile EMS/EMA, this should maximum be 10.000 articles at a time.
Example: If you have 20.000 articles which should be synchronized, and you have set this setting to 5000, the articles will be synchronized 4 times x 5000 articles.

SYNC ARTICLES

Should articles from Evatic Service be synchronized?
Default is checked. If unchecked, only the service articles in Evatic Service will be synchronized to EMS/EMA. If the setting is unchecked, then the setting ARTICLE ONLINE SEARCH must be checked.

SYNC COST PRICE

Should cost price be synchronized and visible in Mobile?

SYNC COST PRICE FOR OWN STOCK

Should cost price from technicians own stock be synchronized and visible in Mobile?
If checked and SYNC COST PRICE is unchecked, only the articles the technician has on stock will have cost price.

SYNC DOC CUSTOMER NO [DEPT NO]

Example: SYNC DOC CUSTOMER NO [DEPT NO] = 1500
Should it be possible to sync documents (not depended on project) for this department? If yes, enter the customer number here. If this is set blank, the SYNC DOC CUSTOMER NO is used.

SYNC DOCS FROM MOBILE ON

Should it be possible to sync documents back into Evatic server?

SYNC FREQ LIST

Should it be possible to sync the frequent list from Evatic Service?

SYNC FREQ QUICK SG

Example: SYNC FREQ QUICK SG = 2
Value 1 to 5, which article sort group should be show as a column in mobile

SYNC ONLY TECHNICIAN NODE

Should the job be synchronized to the assigned technician only if the task is saved in the technician node?

SYNC PROJECT CHECK REQ SYNC ON

If this setting is checked, then 2 extra columns are added to the Mobile Admin, where you can check for automatic sync of basic data and articles to the mobile device.

SYNC QUICK ORDER

Should it be possible to sync the quick order list from Evatic Service (see Model)?

SYNC SALES PRICE

Should sales price be synchronized and visible in Mobile?

SYNC SUPPLIER ORDER

Should supplier orders connected to the technicians' stock be synchronized to Mobile PC or not?

SYNC TIME DIFF MINUTES MAX

Example: SYNC TIME DIFF MINUTES MAX = 0
Functionality to set max difference time for server clock and local PC clock when synchronizing data. Default is 0 (= no check for the difference between the clocks) If e.g. 10, then no more than 10 Minutes difference can be between the clocks. The user will then receive a warning.

TASK LIST FORMAT

Example: TASK LIST FORMAT = <PROJECT NO>/<TASK NO><CUSTOMER NAME><RECEIVED DATE><SYMPTOM TEXT><MODEL TYPE><CONTACT>
Which fields should be displayed in the task list?
Available field names:

DataField	Description
COMPANY	Company code
PROJECT NO	Project number
TASK NO	Task number
STATUS	Task status (0=open, 1=closed)*
DEPT	Department*
CUSTOMER NO	Customer number
MAIN CUSTOMER NAME	Customer name*
P CUSTOMER NAME	Customer name on project heading
CUSTOMER NAME	Customer name (visit address name) from Machine on task
ADDRESS 1	Address 1
ADDRESS 2	Address 2
ADDRESS 3	Address 3
POSTAL CODE	Postal code
POSTAL DESCRIPTION	Postal description
P ADDRESS 1	Address 1 on project heading
P ADDRESS 2	Address 2 on project heading
P ADDRESS 3	Address 3 on project heading
P POSTAL CODE	Postal code on project heading
P POSTAL DESCRIPTION	Postal description on project heading
CONTACT	Contact person (As PT CONTACT if set. If not like P CONTACT.)
CONTACT EMAIL	Contact person email address (As PT CONTACT EMAIL if set. If not like P CONTACT EMAIL)
PHONE NO	Phone number (As PT PHONE NO if set. If not like P PHONE NO)
FAX NO	Fax number (As PT FAX NO if set. If not like P FAX NO)
MOBILE PHONE NO	Mobile number (As PT MOBILE PHONE NO if set. If not like P MOBILE PHONE NO)
PT CONTACT	Contact name from the Machine tab in ES (PROJECT TASK table)
PT CONTACT EMAIL	Contact email from the Machine tab in ES (PROJECT TASK table)
PT PHONE NO	Contact phone no from the Machine tab in ES (PROJECT TASK table)
PT FAX NO	Contact fax no from the Machine tab in ES (PROJECT TASK table)
PT MOBILE PHONE NO	Contact mobile phone no from the Machine tab in ES (PROJECT TASK table)
P CONTACT	Contact name from the General tab in ES (PROJECT TASK table)
P CONTACT EMAIL	Contact email from the General tab in ES (PROJECT TASK table)
P PHONE NO	Contact phone no from the General tab in ES (PROJECT TASK table)
P FAX NO	Contact fax no from the General tab in ES (PROJECT TASK table)
P MOBILE PHONE NO	Contact mobile phone no from the General tab in ES (PROJECT TASK table)
P CONTACT	Contact name from the Machine tab in ES (PROJECT TASK table)
SALESMAN CODE	Salesman code
SALESMAN NAME	Salesman name
RECEIVED BY	Received by, user name, on task
RECEIVED DATE	Received date on task
RESPONSE DATE	Response date on task
PLANNED FROM	Planned from date/time on task
PLANNED TO	Planned to date/time on task
PRIORITY CODE	Priority code on task
TIME ESTIMATE	Planned duration on task
SOLUTION DATE	Solution time on task*
TECHNICIAN NO	Technician number*
CUSTOMER REFERENCE	Customer reference on task*
TASK TITLE	Task title
INFO 01	Project info field 1
INFO 02	Project info field 2*
INFO 03	Project info field 3*
INFO 04	Project info field 4*
INFO 05	Project info field 5*
INFO 06	Project info field 6*
TASK INFO 01	Task info field 1
TASK INFO 02	Task info field 2*
TASK INFO 03	Task info field 3*
TASK INFO 04	Task info field 4*
TASK INFO 05	Task info field 5*
TASK INFO 06	Task info field 6*
SYMPTOM CODE 1	Symptom code 1
SYMPTOM CODE 3	Symptom code 2
SYMPTOM CODE 3	Symptom code 3
SYMPTOM TEXT	Symptom text
ACTION CODE 1	Action code 1
ACTION CODE 2	Action code 2
ACTION CODE 3	Action code 3
ACTION TEXT	Action text
MACHINE NO	Machine number/serial number
ID NO	Machine ID number*
MODEL TYPE	Model type
MODEL DESC	Model description*
LOCATION	Machine location
INFORMATION	Machine information
SERVICES CODE	Machine service articles code
INSTALLATION DATE	Installation date
CONTRACT CODE	Contract code
CONTRACT DESCRIPTION	Contract code description
CONTRACT VALID TO	Contract valid to
CONTRACT TERMINATION DATE	Contract termination date
DAYS SINCE LAST VISIT	Number of days since last visit
ACTIVITIES LAST 3 MONTHS	Number of activities last 3 months*
UNITS SINCE LAST VISIT	Number of units used since last visit
MCBV	MCBV (monthly copies between visits)
PRICE LIST	Customer price list*
RESOURCE PRIORITY	Resource priority*
TIME ESTIMATE	Planned duration*
INVOICE ADDRESS NAME	Invoice address name*
INVOICE ADDRESS 1	Invoice address 1*
INVOICE ADDRESS 2	Invoice address2*
INVOICE ADDRESS 3	Invoice address 3*
INVOICE ADDRESS POSTAL CODE	Invoice address postal code*
INVOICE ADDRESS POSTAL DESCRIPTION	Invoice address postal description*
COORD X	Coordinates Latitude*
COORD Y	Coordinates Longitude*

TASK LIST PLANNER OPEN FORMAT

Example: TASK LIST PLANNER OPEN FORMAT = <<PROJECT NO>/<TASK NO><CUSTOMER NAME><RECEIVED DATE><SYMPTOM TEXT><MODEL TYPE>
Which fields should be displayed in the planner task list? Functionality as TASK LIST FORMAT (the datafields marked with (*) are only used for TASK LIST FORMAT

If a numeric value is set, the planner will fail.

TASK LIST PLANNER TECH FORMAT

Example: TASK LIST PLANNER TECH FORMAT= <PROJECT NO>/<TASK NO><CUSTOMER NAME><RECEIVED DATE><SYMPTOM TEXT><MODEL TYPE>
Which fields should be displayed in the planner task list in the Assinged-tab? Same functionality as TASK LIST FORMAT

This setting is not used in EMS

TIME EDIT

Should it be possible to edit work and travel time?

TIME ESTIMATE CHECK

Should the system check for actual used working time against the planned time? If the working time is higher than the planned time, the working hour will be split into several order lines. The working hour that is over the planned time will be set as invoicable.

UPDATE SALES PR AND DISC NOT ART

Example: UPDATE SALES PR AND DISC NOT ART = #5000#5001#5002#
Which articles with fixed price and discount should not be updated, when synchronizing service projects back to Evatic Service?

UPDATE SALES PR AND DISC ON SYNC

Should articles be updated according to the price list (+ discount) set on the customer card, when synchronizing service projects back to Evatic Service?

When the setting is checked:
Pri 1. Whenever a discount is set for the article (service article) for the selected customer, then this discounted price is used.
Pri 2. If an own cost price/sales price for T1-3 and W1-3 is set on the technician card, then this price is used.
Pri 3. If neither 1 or 2 is set, the prices in the service article table are used.

UPDATE SALES PR DISC ON SYNC SER

Should articles with fixed price and discount be updated, when synchronizing service projects back to Evatic Service?

When the setting is 1, the standard service article prices will be overwritten. (Only valid with checked setting UPDATE SALES PR AND DISC ON SYNC).

UPDATE SALES PRICE ON SYNC

Should articles be updated according to the price list, when synchronizing service projects back to Evatic Service?

Changes on the price in Evatic Mobile will be overwritten and prices on service articles will not be changed.

USE TECHNICIAN MAILBOX

Should the Message option (see menu) be available?

USE TECHNICIAN STOCK ON

Should articles connected to the technician stock be synchronized to Mobile or only articles marked as 'Sync with Mobile' (see Article/Evatic Service). Checked = technician stock, unchecked = articles marked as 'Sync with Mobile'.
See also STOCK MINIMUM and SYNC ARTICLE FROM OTHER STOCK

Evatic Partner Web

ADMIN PER DEPT

Which project tasks should be visible in EPW. If unchecked, Admin can see all the projects. If checked, Admin can only see projects in his own department.

ALLOW ADD SYMPTOM TEXT

Should it be possible to add symptom text?
Note If an existing symptom text is present, this is not editable.

ALLOW FINISH PROJECT

Should it be possible to complete tasks and orders from EPW.
If checked, the user is allowed to finish the project task.
If unchecked, the project task will be placed in the node identified with in the setting: EPW FINISHED PROJECTS NODE

ALLOW FINISH PROJECT AC CODE

Example: ALLOW FINISH PROJECT AC CODE = FIN; DEF
Finish projects automatically from EPW if the task has a defined action code. Enter action code value. Several action codes can be entered, separated by semicolon
This will work even if the settings EPW / ALLOW FINISH PROJECT or ALLOW FINISH PROJECTS ONLY is unchecked

ALLOW FINISH PROJECT AC NO

Example: ALLOW FINISH PROJECT AC NO = 3
Finish projects automatically from EPW if the task has a defined action code. Which action code (1-3) should be checked?
This will work even if the settings EPW / ALLOW FINISH PROJECT or ALLOW FINISH PROJECTS ONLY is unchecked

ALLOW FINISH PROJECT CUST SG NO

Example: ALLOW FINISH PROJECT CUST SG NO = 4
Finish projects automatically from EPW if the task has a defined customer sort group. Which sort group (1-5) should be checked?
This will work even if the settings EPW / ALLOW FINISH PROJECT or ALLOW FINISH PROJECTS ONLY is unchecked.

ALLOW FINISH PROJECT CUST SG VALUE

Example: ALLOW FINISH PROJECT CUST SG VALUE = Priv
Finish projects automatically from EPW if the task has a defined customer sort group. Enter sort group value. Several sort groups can be entered, separated by semicolon.
This will work even if the settings EPW / Allow Finish Project or Allow Finish Projects Only is unchecked

ALLOW FINISH PROJECT SC CODE

Example: ALLOW FINISH PROJECT SC CODE= FIN; DEF
Finish projects automatically from EPW if the task has a defined symptom code value. Several symptom code values can be entered, separated by semicolon.
This will work even if the settings Evatic Partner Web/ALLOW FINISH PROJECT or Evatic Partner Web/ALLOW FINISH PROJECTS ONLY is not set.

APP DEALER TYPE

Used in meter reading. If unchecked, then all machines connected to the logged in customer will be displayed. If checked, then all machines linked to the customer as responsible customer will be displayed.

ASSIGN DEFAULT TECHNICIAN

Should a new project automatically be assigned to the technician responsible for the machine (= Project with machine included)?

ASSIGN DEFAULT TECHNICIAN C

Should a new project automatically be assigned to the technician responsible for the customer?

AUTO ADD TEXT LINES

Should order text lines automatically be added when finishing a project? If checked, Evatic sets additional info on last order line.

CHECK LIST

If checked, then show 'Check list' as menu button.

The checkpoints are displayed as folders.

CUSTOM ACTION CODE 3 NODE

Used when project task is synchronized and CUSTOM TASK STATUS is not equal with project task status.
If project task Action Code 3 is equal to CUSTOM ACTION CODE 3 then CUSTOM ACTION CODE 3 NODE is set as node in project task.

CUSTOM LOGIN PAGE

If a filename is entered, this file will be used as the login page. However, since a few tricks need to be used, this is only available if Evatic AS has created this file for you.

CUSTOM NODES

Used when project task is synchronized. If set then the app allows to set custom project task node. Depends on settings: CUSTOM TASK STATUS and CUSTOM ACTION CODE 3 NODE

CUSTOM ORDER STATUS

If not empty the STATUS code is set to this value in a new order instead of default value

CUSTOM TASK STATUS

Used when project task is synchronized. If project task status is equal to CUSTOM TASK STATUS then CUSTOM TASK STATUS NODE is set as node in project task.

CUSTOMER EDIT ON

If checked, and you are logged in as Evatic user, it is possible to edit the customer information.

Available only for user.

CUSTOMER MACHINE NO EDIT

If checked, and you are logged in as Evatic user, it is possible to edit machine numbers.

DEFAULT AMOUNT OF ROWS SEARCH

Example: DEFAULT AMOUNT OF ROWS SEARCH = 25
The amount entered here is the default amount of results shown per page in search results. Used in menu option 'Personalisation'.

DEFAULT AMOUNT OF ROWS SUMMARY

Example: DEFAULT AMOUNT OF ROWS SUMMARY = 25
The amount entered here is the default amount of PROJECTS shown per page in the summary. Used in menu option 'Personalisation'.

DEFAULT LANGUAGE

Example: DEFAULT LANGUAGE = country code, e.g. 47 for Norway
Sets the default language used in the application.

DEFAULT LOGIN TYPE

Example: DEFAULT LOGIN TYPE = 1
This setting is used when there is a possibility for logging in as Customer or as a User. This setting provides which of the two types is default selected on the login page.
1 = Customer (Partner)
2 = User (Evatic user).

DEFAULT NEW PROJECT NODE

Example: DEFAULT NEW PROJECT NODE = 1 All 2 Incoming EPW
Projects registered within Project Registration will be placed in the node defined in this setting. If this setting is empty, the project will be placed in the root node of the task tree (e.g. All).

DEFAULT ORDER TYPE

Example: DEFAULT ORDER TYPE = WEB
The standard order type for all new orders created from EPW.

DEFAULT SERVICE REQUEST CODE

Example: DEFAULT SERVICE REQUEST CODE = SER
The standard value for symptom code 1 for all new projects.

DISABLE MANDATORY AC1

Example: DISABLE MANDATORY AC1 = 001
When the user selects this action code from the first action code list for the project task, all mandatory fields are disabled, allowing the user to return the project task when selecting complete task. This means the project will not be finished, just sent back to another location defined in the setting EPW Returned Projects Node.

DISABLE MANDATORY AC2

Example: DISABLE MANDATORY AC2 = 002
When the user selects this action code from the second action code list for the project task, all mandatory fields are disabled, allowing the user to return the project task when selecting complete task. This means the project will not be finished, just sent back to another location defined in the setting EPW Returned Projects Node.

DISABLE MANDATORY AC3

Example DISABLE MANDATORY AC3 = 002
When the user selects this action code from the third action code list for the project task, all mandatory fields are disabled, allowing the user to return the project task when selecting complete task. This means the project will not be finished, just sent back to another location defined in the setting EPW Returned Projects Node.

DISABLE MANDATORY SC1

Example: DISABLE MANDATORY SC1 = 001
When the user selects this symptom code from the first symptom code list for the project task, all mandatory fields are disabled, allowing the user to return the project task when selecting complete task. This means the project will not be finished, just sent back to another location defined in the setting EPW Returned Projects Node.

DISABLE MANDATORY SC2

Example: DISABLE MANDATORY SC2 = 002
When the user selects this symptom code from the second symptom code list for the project task, all mandatory fields are disabled, allowing the user to return the project task when selecting complete task. This means the project will not be finished, just sent back to another location defined in the setting EPW Returned Projects Node.

DISABLE MANDATORY SC3

Example: DISABLE MANDATORY SC3 = 002
When the user selects this symptom code from the third symptom code list for the project task, all mandatory fields are disabled, allowing the user to return the project task when selecting complete task. This means the project will not be finished, just sent back to another location defined in the setting EPW Returned Projects Node.

ENABLE LINK LOGIN ON

If checked, it's possible to login via a link generated by email. (This functionality might not be available in your current version)

ENABLE LOGIN RESTRICTION

Enable login restrictions, e.g. max amount of login attempts

ENABLE UPDATES NO CHECK OUT

If checked, and logged in as user, it is possible to update response date/time and action codes/text without the project being checked out or assigned.

ENABLED LANGUAGES

Example: ENABLED LANGUAGES = ##44##47##46##
Used in menu option 'Personalisation', to enable specific languages. The languages codes are to be entered here.

Set to empty to see all available languages.

EPW FINISHED PROJECTS NODE

Example: EPW FINISHED PROJECTS NODE= 1 All 2 Finished EPW
The node the finished projects will be placed into when it's not allowed to finish a project. This setting is only used when the setting Global User \ Tree \ FOR EACH DEPARTMENT is set to 0. Otherwise the same setting under the Department XXX will be used

EPW NOT SYNC PROJECTS NODE

Example: EPW NOT SYNC PROJECTS NODE = 1 All 2 Assigned
Node with projects which should not to be displayed in EPW.

FINISH ORDER ON OPEN PROJECT

Should the order be completed even if the project is not completed?

FIRST INSTALLATION MAIL SUBJECT

Example: FIRST INSTALLATION MAIL SUBJECT = Subject
The text entered will also be the text of the subject of the form send for first installation with the CustomerNo attached at the end of this text.

FORM FROM ADDRESS

Example: FORM FROM ADDRESS = Support@evatic.com
Mail forms send from the application use this mail address entered her as the sender's mail address.

FORM RECEIPT ADDRESS

Example: FORM RECEIPT ADDRESS= Support@evatic.com
Mail forms send from the application will be send to this mail address.

FRAME FOOTER HEIGHT

Height of the footer of the application.

FRAMES BANNER HEIGHT

Height of the banner of the application.

FULL APPLICATION URL

This setting is automatically generated by the EPW application and contains the URL for the application. This setting is used by when generating mail. (This functionality might not be available in your current version, although the setting exists.)

LOGIN TYPE

Example: LOGIN TYPE = 1
What should be used for login into EPW?

• If 1, only dealers can log in
• If 2, only users can log in
• If 3, both can log in

MACHINE INFO VISIBLE

If checked, then 'machine info' in the project details tab under project reporting is displayed.

MANDATORY AC 1

Should it be mandatory to enter an action code 1 in order to finish a project task?

MANDATORY AC 2

Should it be mandatory to enter an action code 2 in order to finish a project task?

MANDATORY AC 3

Should it be mandatory to enter an action code 3 in order to finish a project task?

MANDATORY ACTION TEXT

Should it be mandatory to enter the action text in order to finish a project task?

MANDATORY DOC SYM CODE

Example: MANDATORY DOC SYM CODE = 1
Should it be mandatory to enter a document based on different symptom codes when completing a project? 0 = no. The other codes used here = 1,2 and 3. They are related to symptom code 1,2 and 3. This setting is connected to the following settings Mandatory Doc Sym Value (and Project Rep Doc = 1).

MANDATORY DOC SYM VALUES

Example: MANDATORY DOC SYM VALUES = SER#GAR#DEL
Should it be mandatory to enter a document based on different symptom codes when completing a project? The values entered here are linked to the code in Mandatory Doc Sym Code. If e.g MANDATORY DOC SYM CODE =1, the values found in the symptom code 1 should be entered here. If e.g MANDATORY DOC SYM CODE =2, the values found in the symptom code 2 should be entered here etc.

MANDATORY METER READING

Should it be mandatory to enter the meter readings in order to finish a project task?

MANDATORY ORDER LINE INFO 01

Should it be mandatory to enter an order line info 01 in order to finish an order?

MANDATORY ORDER LINE INFO 02

Should it be mandatory to enter an order line info 02 in order to finish an order?

MANDATORY TRAVEL TIME

Should it be mandatory to enter travel time in order to finish a project task?

MANDATORY WORK TIME

Should it be mandatory to enter work time in order to finish a project task?

MENU FIRST INSTALLATION

Determines if menu item First Installation should be shown.

MENU METER READING EXCEL IMPORT

Determines if menu item Import meter reading should be shown.

Available only for customers.

MENU METER READING LETTER

Determines if menu item Meter Reading Letter should be shown.

Available only for customers.

MENU OPTIONS PROCEDURE

Example: MENU OPTIONS PROCEDURE= sp get SPECIAL MENU OPTIONS
Determines what procedure that should be run in order to return the menu options for a customer.
The procedure defined in this setting must have the parameters @COMPANY varchar(3) and @CUSTOMER NO varchar(30), which reference company code and customer number.
The procedure must return a result set containing integers in a specific order and with a specific name, the value of the integer must be either 0 (not show) or 1 (show), and should contain the different menu options:

• MENU DELIVERY REQUEST
• MENU FIRST INSTALLATION
• MENU METER READING LETTER
• MENU PERSONALIZATION
• MENU PROJECT
• MENU PROJECT HISTORY
• MENU PROJECT LIST
• MENU PROJECT REG
• MENU PROJECT REP
• MENU SERVICE REQUEST
• MENU SPACE HEIGHT
• MENU SQL REPORTS
• MENU WARRANTY

Please consult Evatic Support before entering a value in this setting.

MENU PERSONALIZATION

Determines if menu item Personalization should be shown.

MENU PROJECT

Determines if the menu item Project should be shown.

Available only for users

MENU PROJECT HISTORY

Determines if the menu item Project history should be shown.

Must be technician: which means 'User ' is a technician or customer has a technician assigned to him

MENU PROJECT LIST

Determines if the menu item Project Summary should be shown.

MENU PROJECT REG

Determines if the menu item Project Registration should be shown.

Available only for customers

MENU PROJECT REP

Determines if the menu item Project Reporting should be shown.

MENU SPACE HEIGHT

Determines any open space above the menu on the left side.

MENU SQL REPORTS

Determines if the menu item Sql Reports should be shown.

MENU WARRANTY

Determines If the menu item Warranty should be shown.

Available only for customers

NODE STATUS DEPTH

Example: node status depth = 1
The status used in the project registration overview is based on the node that the project is placed in. The depth applied by this setting determines how many sub nodes will be shown in the status field. For example, if the node is 1 Incoming 2 MySelf 3 Finished and this setting will be set to 1, then the status will show Finished. If it's 2, the status will show MySelf Finished.

ORDER LINE INFO 01 VALUES

Example: ORDER LINE INFO 01 VALUES = New;old;test
Values which should be displayed in drop down for info 1 on order lines.

ORDER LINE INFO 02 VALUES

Example: ORDER LINE INFO 02 VALUES = yes;no
Values which should be displayed in drop down for info 2 on order lines.

ORDER ORDERLINES INVOICEABLE

Decides if the articles inserted from EPW is to be invoiced.

ORG TREE SG DEPT

Example: ORG TREE SG DEPT = 1
Determines which Sort group of customer is used for department in organization tree for Project registration. (1-5).

ORG TREE SG DEPT SEARCH NAME

Determines if the search name should be used for department instead of ORG TREE SG DEPT setting.

ORG TREE SG ORG

Example: ORG TREE SG ORG = 1
Determines which sort groups (1 to 5) of customer is used to determines the rank of the customer. Whether is it an organization, a department or single customer in tree for organization for project registration (1-5).

ORG TREE SG RANK

Example: ORG TREE SG RANK = 1
Determines which sort groups value (1 to 5) of customer is used to determines the rank of the customer. Whether is it an organization, a department or single customer in tree for organization for project registration (1-5).

PERCENT INCREASE

Example: PERCENT INCREASE= 10
This is a check for the meter you enter in EPW. The Value should not be higher than expected % increase based on previous readings.

PROJECT FINISH ACTION CODES

Example: PROJECT FINISH ACTION CODES = GAR;SER
When there are any codes in this setting, the 'Finish' button is disabled on the project until the user selects action code from the setting (example either GAR or SER). This is valid for action codes 3 and the codes must be separated with semicolons in this setting.

PROJECT INFO 01

Example: PROJECT INFO 01 = Information
Within the project dialog it is possible to add extra 6 fields which can be used freely. The text entered here will be the field name for the first field. Only the settings with a value will be displayed.

PROJECT INFO 02

Example: PROJECT INFO 02 = Information
Within the project dialog it is possible to add extra 6 fields which can be used freely. The text entered here will be the field name for the second field. Only the settings with a value will be displayed.

PROJECT INFO 03

Example: PROJECT INFO 03 = Information
Within the project dialog it is possible to add extra 6 fields which can be used freely. The text entered here will be the field name for the third field. Only the settings with a value will be displayed.

PROJECT INFO 04

Example: PROJECT INFO 04 = Information
Within the project dialog it is possible to add extra 6 fields which can be used freely. The text entered here will be the field name for the fourth field. Only the settings with a value will be displayed.

PROJECT INFO 05

Example: PROJECT INFO 05 = Information
Within the project dialog it is possible to add extra 6 fields which can be used freely. The text entered here will be the field name for the second fifth. Only the settings with a value will be displayed.

PROJECT INFO 06

Example: PROJECT INFO 06 = Information
Within the project dialog it is possible to add extra 6 fields which can be used freely. The text entered here will be the field name for the sixth field. Only the settings with a value will be displayed.

PROJECT OVERVIEW REFRESH TIME

Example: PROJECT OVERVIEW REFRESH TIME = 90
Time in settings. If 0, no refresh will occur. If set to for example 90, every 90 seconds a request to the server will be done to check if new projects are assigned to the logged in user. If this is the case, the project overview will be refreshed automatically and a notification sound will be played.

PROJECT REG DOC

Determines if it's possible to upload a document on the Project Registration page.

PROJECT REG EXT

Example: PROJECT REG EXT = 0
Determines if the extended project registration should be enabled. This version allows you to register a project with a machine but it's not possible to use an organization structure (See USE ORG TREE setting)

PROJECT REP DOC

Determines if it's possible to upload a document on the Documents tab of Project Summary.

PROJECT REP READ ONLY

Determines if the project reporting is read only. The only functionality enabled is to see the project info and the history. It's not possible to check out a project.

PROJECT TASK INFO 01

Example: PROJECT TASK INFO 01 = Information
Caption for project task info fields 1 to 6. The text entered here will be the field name for the field. Only the settings with a value will be displayed.

PROJECT TASK INFO 02

Example: PROJECT TASK INFO 02 = Information
Caption for project task info fields 1 to 6. The text entered here will be the field name for the field. Only the settings with a value will be displayed.

PROJECT TASK INFO 03

Example: PROJECT TASK INFO 03 = Information
Caption for project task info fields 1 to 6. The text entered here will be the field name for the field. Only the settings with a value will be displayed.

PROJECT TASK INFO 04

Example: PROJECT TASK INFO 04 = Information
Caption for project task info fields 1 to 6. The text entered here will be the field name for the field. Only the settings with a value will be displayed.

PROJECT TASK INFO 05

Example: PROJECT TASK INFO 05 = Information
Caption for project task info fields 1 to 6. The text entered here will be the field name for the field. Only the settings with a value will be displayed.

PROJECT TASK INFO 06

Example: PROJECT TASK INFO 06 = Information
Caption for project task info fields 1 to 6. The text entered here will be the field name for the field. Only the settings with a value will be displayed.

RELOAD APP SETTINGS

If checked, all application settings are loaded one time when someone logs into the web application. The setting will automatically be set back to false.

RESPONSE TIME CHANGE ON

If checked, then it is possible to change response time on project/task.

SEND MAIL CONTACT GROUP COPY

Example: SEND MAIL CONTACT GROUP COPY = Admin

Add the name of the contact person group in this setting to send the service report to all active contact persons on the customer that has this contact
group and that has an email-address in Email <br/>1. The mail will be sent with one time with all the email addresses in the &#39;to&#39; field on the mail.

SEND MAIL TO CUSTOMER ON

Example: SEND MAIL TO CUSTOMER ON = 0

Should a service report be automatically generated and sent by e-mail to the customer when finishing a project? <br/>If a contact person with an email address is added to the task, the e-mail address is automatically set as the receiver of the email. <br/>The following settings must also be set: <br/>Company XXX \ Mail Project \ REPLY ADDRESS

Company XXX \ Mail Project \ REPLY NAME

Company XXX \ Mail Project \ SUBJECT

Checklist will also be send if Evatic Mobile/ Mail Add Checklist As Attachment is set.

SERVICE NO DEFAULT DATE

If checked, then 'Active date' on service lines will not have a default value = today.

SERVICE ORDER FILENAME

Example: Service Order Filename = Default serviceorder.htm
If supplied, name of the service order template. If empty default is 'default serviceorder.htm'

SHOW CUSTOMER ADDRESS TYPE

In 'Customer' window, when logged in as Evatic user. Hide/show visit/delivery/invoice address type for addresses.

SHOW CUSTOMER AREA

In 'Customer' window, when logged in as Evatic user. Hide/show area code

SHOW CUSTOMER COUNTRY

In 'Customer' window, when logged in as Evatic user. Hide/show country code

SHOW EXISTING ORDER LINES

If checked then order lines that already exist for this project/task will be displayed in the tab 'Order lines'

SHOW MACHINE PROPERTIES

Should machine properties be visible in EPW?

SHOW METER READING LETTER TYPE ALL

Example: SHOW METER READING LETTER TYPE All=3
Setting is to be set for 1 and/or 2,3 or 5
1= Letter
2= Email
3= File
5=Show all
Default set to 5.
When you use this setting remember also the setting Company YYY \ Evatic Partner Web \ Show Meter Reading Letter Type Import
This setting decides if meter reading letters with type Import should be visible
So if you set Show Meter Reading Letter Type All = 5 you can use the setting Show Meter Reading Letter Type Import to decide if this also should include letters with type Import

SHOW METER READING LETTER TYPE IMPORT

Should the list of not reported meter reading letters in EPW include letters marked as 'Import' on the volume row?

SHOW PROJECT NOT BEFORE DATE

Example: SHOW PROJECT NOT BEFORE DATE = 30
This value determines the date after which projects will be shown in project registration history. This setting can be a specific date or it can be number of days. For example, if this setting is 01-01-2007, no projects registered before this date will be shown on the web. If this setting is 30, no projects older than 30 days compared to today will be shown on the web.

SHOW PROJECT NOT CODE TYPE

Example: SHOW PROJECT NOT CODE TYPE = 1
This setting is to determine which setting is used for not showing a project in the list of Project Registration: 1=ActionCode1, 2=ActionCode2, 3=ActionCode3, 4=SymptomCode1, 5= SymptomCode2, 6= SymptomCode3.

SHOW PROJECT NOT CODE VALUE

The value the code needs to have to not show a project registration on the web.

SHOW RETURN BUTTON

Should return button for projects be visible or not?

SHOW SALES PRICE

Should sales price be hidden from order line?

SHOW TAB ASSIGN

If checked, then display the tab 'Assign' in project reporting (NB! When logged on as a user).

SHOW TAB ORDER LINES

If checked, then display the tab 'Order lines' in project reporting.

SITE NAME

Example: SITE NAME = Evatic Partner Web
Title on the web page.

SMTP FROM ADDRESS

Example: SMTP FROM ADDRESS = support@evatic.com
Determines the from address for mail send via the SMTP server.

SMTP PASSWORD

If the SMTP-Server requires authentication, use this setting. If not, leave it blank.

SMTP SERVER

Example: SMTP SERVER = smtp@xx.com
This value determines the SMTP server used by the web application.

SMTP USER

Example: SMTP USER = administrator
This value determines username for login on the SMTP server used by the web application.

SQL REPORTS NODE

Example: SQL REPORTS NODE = 1 All 2 WebReports
SQL Reports placed in this node are shown on the web.

SQL REPORTS NODE SORT GROUP

Example: SQL REPORTS NODE SORT GROUP = 5
Customer sort group that applies the second level of the SQL reports node (1-5).
The Node of the SQL Reports is build out of 3 parts.
1. Root node of the SQL Reports tree
2. Node defined in the Sort group of the customer
3. Node defined in the setting SQL REPORTS NODE
For example: SQL REPORTS NODE has value WebReports and SQL REPORTS NODE SORT GROUP has value 3. SG3 of the customer will be used to get the name of the node.
So if you have a customer which has the value Dealer in SG3, the node where the reports of this customer will be found will be: 1 All 2 Dealer 3 WebReports
It is possible not do use the SQL REPORTS NODE SORT GROUP and in that case the reports will be in 1 All 2 WebReports, since WebReports is the value in the SQL REPORTS NODE setting.
If the SQL REPORTS NODE is empty and there is a value in the other setting, the node will be 1 All 2 Dealer.

You cannot have both empty, it that case no reports will be shown.

START PAGE

Example: START PAGE = PROJECT
Determines which page of the application will be shown first:
Possible values:

• PROJECT
• PROJECT REG
• PROJECT REP
• METER READING LETTER
• WARRANTY
• FIRST INSTALLATION
• SQL REPORTS

If no value is entered or another value not in the list, a blank page will be shown.

STOCK ADMIN DELIVER ARTICLES

If checked, Articles entered in order-lines of the project task will be set to delivered in the stock admin.

SYMPTOM TEXT LENGTH

Example: SYMPTOM TEXT LENGTH = 100
Length of the text of the symptom in the Report Summary for Project Reporting and Project.

SYNC ONLY TECHNICIAN NODE

If checked, technicians will only be able to see project tasks on the web which are placed in their own node.

TASKS SYMPTOM TEXT LENGTH

Example: TASKS SYMPTOM TEXT LENGTH = 25
Max length for symptom text when using org tree (USE ORG TREE=1)

UPLOAD EXTENSIONS

Limits the type of extensions that are allowed to upload in Project Registration if enabled.
When the value = doc,xls,txt then only files if these three types are possible to upload to the database.

Default this value is empty, which means all file types are possible to upload.

UPLOAD MAX FILE SIZE

Example: UPLOAD MAX FILE SIZE = 1024
Limits the maximum file size of the file that will be uploaded in Kb. Default this value is 1024 which means 1024Kb = 1Mb

USE FROM ACTION1

Settings to decide which codes to be used (e.g. SOFT). Action-codes are limited to the codes chosen in this setting.

USE FROM ACTION2

Settings to decide which codes to be used (e.g. SOFT). Action-codes are limited to the codes chosen in this setting.

USE FROM ACTION3

Settings to decide which codes to be used (e.g. SOFT). Action-codes are limited to the codes chosen in this setting.

USE FROM SYMTOM1

Settings to decide which codes to be used (e.g. INST). Symptom-codes are limited to the codes chosen in this setting.

USE FROM SYMTOM2

Settings to decide which codes to be used (e.g. INST). Symptom-codes are limited to the codes chosen in this setting.

USE FROM SYMTOM3

Settings to decide which codes to be used (e.g. INST). Symptom-codes are limited to the codes chosen in this setting.

USE ORG TREE

Some functions in the application (at this point yet only Project Registration) can be used by using an organization tree. Then it's possible for a parent customer organization also to see registered reports for a customer lower in the organization tree.

WARRANTY INFO 01

Example: WARRANTY INFO 01 = Info1
Within the warranty dialog it is possible to add extra 6 fields which can be used freely. The text entered here will be the field name for the second field. Only the settings with a value will be displayed.

WARRANTY INFO 02

Example: WARRANTY INFO 02 = Info1
Within the warranty dialog it is possible to add extra 6 fields which can be used freely. The text entered here will be the field name for the second field. Only the settings with a value will be displayed.

WARRANTY INFO 03

Example: WARRANTY INFO 03 = Info1
Within the warranty dialog it is possible to add extra 6 fields which can be used freely. The text entered here will be the field name for the second field. Only the settings with a value will be displayed.

WARRANTY INFO 04

Example: WARRANTY INFO 04 = Info1
Within the warranty dialog it is possible to add extra 6 fields which can be used freely. The text entered here will be the field name for the second field. Only the settings with a value will be displayed.

WARRANTY INFO 05

Example: WARRANTY INFO 05 = Info1
Within the warranty dialog it is possible to add extra 6 fields which can be used freely. The text entered here will be the field name for the second field. Only the settings with a value will be displayed.

WARRANTY INFO 06

Example: WARRANTY INFO 06 = Info1
Within the warranty dialog it is possible to add extra 6 fields which can be used freely. The text entered here will be the field name for the second field. Only the settings with a value will be displayed.

WARRANTY LIST END DATE

Example: WARRANTY LIST END DATE = 31.12.2012
The warranty end date

WARRANTY LIST START DATE

Example: WARRANTY LIST START DATE = 12.02.2012
The warranty start date

WARRANTY ON

Should it be possible to see warranty cases in EPW?

WARRANTY PURCHASED DATE READ ONLY

Should the purchased date be set as read only?

Evatic Sales

ACTIVITY CATEGORY NEEDED

Should it be mandatory to fill out category while adding a new activity with a customer connection?

ACTIVITY STATE NEEDED

Should it be mandatory to fill out state while adding a new activity with a project connection?

ALLOW CHANGE COST PRICE AG LINES

Should it be possible to change the cost price on aggregated articles.

Calc Enable Cost Price must be checked.

ALLOW CHANGE QTY AG DOWN

Should it be possible to change the quantity down on aggregated articles.

ALLOW CHANGE QTY AG UP

Should it be possible to change the quantity up on aggregated articles.

ALLOW DELETE AG LINES

Should it be possible to delete aggregated article lines.

When the setting is unchecked only the main virtual article can be deleted.

BOOKMARK PER DEPT

Should it be possible to select department for the bookmarks?

CALC ALL ROWS AS TOTAL VOLUME ON

If this setting is on, and the contract template has the option 'Calculate all volume rows as a total volume', the contract meter data can be changed for each machine even though this is a total volume contract. When the contract is created, one volume row is created for each machine instead of on total volume row for all machines.

CALC ALLOW COPY FROM OTHERS ON

Should it be possible to copy old calculation from other salespersons or not? If unchecked, only allowed to copy old calculation entered by yourselves.

CALC ARTICLE FEE ARTICLE NO

Example: CALC ARTICLE FEE ARTICLE NO = 1001
When using fee on sales calc, Evatic automatically add this article number to the order lines.

CALC ARTICLE LEASING FACTOR

Example: CALC ARTICLE LEASING FACTOR = 1002
This will give a discount row on the generated order from sales calculation. The formula for discount is (monthly price / factor %) - order sum.

CALC COST PRICE DISCOUNT ON

If this setting is on, the cost price discount 1+2 from article is shown in on the order lines. They can be modified by the user.

CALC FINISH ORDER

Should orders created by the sales calculation functionality automatically be completed or not?

CALC MACHINE ACC ONLY SERIAL NO

When the system creates machines from sale calc the lines after the machine will be added as accessories
Should only articles with serial number be added as accessories? If unchecked, articles should be added
The function only inserts accessories for order lines after the machine until a text line or a new machine is reached.
If this setting is checked and the accessories do not have a serial number available when the machine is created from calc the accessories will be added when the packing slip is printed/or the order is finished

CALC MAX DISCOUNT EXCESS COPIES

Example: CALC MAX DISCOUNT EXCESS COPIES = 50
Setting in Admin that decides how much discount the salesman can give on the excess copies before the service-line is colored red. Enter 10 (= 10%), 20 (= 20%) and so on.

CALC PRINT ORDERLINE FORMAT1

Example:<CALC ORDER ARTICLE NO>#<CALC ORDER ARTICLE DESCRIPTION>#<CALC ORDER ARTICLE QTY>'
Setting in Admin, which transfers article lines from a calculation as single lines to a table in Word. Use the bookmarks from the order lines in a calculation and separate with the '#' sign. A table in Word templates must be created with as many columns as there are number of fields, which need printing. The bookmark <CALC ORDERLINES1>...<CALC ORDERLINES10> must be set in the first field in the first column.
E.g. bookmarks:

• <CALC ORDER ARTICLE NO>
• <CALC ORDER ARTICLE DESCRIPTION>
• <CALC ORDER ARTICLE QTY>
• <CALC ORDER ARTICLE PICTURE> (Image from the article screen dialog)

See the Evatic Service helpfile for more bookmarks

Several bookmarks can be used in the same table cell. E.g.<CALC ORDER ARTICLE NO>#<CALC ORDER ARTICLE DESCRIPTION>;<CALC ORDER ARTICLE PICTURE>

Column 1 will in this example contain Article number, and Column 2 will contain Article description [line break] [image from article window].

CALC PRINT ORDERLINE FORMAT10

Example:<CALC ORDER ARTICLE NO>#<CALC ORDER ARTICLE DESCRIPTION>#<CALC ORDER ARTICLE QTY>'
Setting in Admin, which transfers article lines from a calculation as single lines to a table in Word. Use the bookmarks from the order lines in a calculation and separate with the '#' sign. A table in Word templates must be created with as many columns as there are number of fields, which need printing. The bookmark <CALC ORDERLINES1>...<CALC ORDERLINES10> must be set in the first field in the first column.
E.g. bookmarks:

• <CALC ORDER ARTICLE NO>
• <CALC ORDER ARTICLE DESCRIPTION>
• <CALC ORDER ARTICLE QTY>
• <CALC ORDER ARTICLE PICTURE> (Image from the article screen dialog)

See the Evatic Service helpfile for more bookmarks

Several bookmarks can be used in the same table cell. E.g.<CALC ORDER ARTICLE NO>#<CALC ORDER ARTICLE DESCRIPTION>;<CALC ORDER ARTICLE PICTURE>

Column 1 will in this example contain Article number, and Column 2 will contain Article description [line break] [image from article window].

CALC PRINT ORDERLINE FORMAT2

Example:<CALC ORDER ARTICLE NO>#<CALC ORDER ARTICLE DESCRIPTION>#<CALC ORDER ARTICLE QTY>'
Setting in Admin, which transfers article lines from a calculation as single lines to a table in Word. Use the bookmarks from the order lines in a calculation and separate with the '#' sign. A table in Word templates must be created with as many columns as there are number of fields, which need printing. The bookmark <CALC ORDERLINES1>...<CALC ORDERLINES10> must be set in the first field in the first column.
E.g. bookmarks:

• <CALC ORDER ARTICLE NO>
• <CALC ORDER ARTICLE DESCRIPTION>
• <CALC ORDER ARTICLE QTY>
• <CALC ORDER ARTICLE PICTURE> (Image from the article screen dialog)

See the Evatic Service helpfile for more bookmarks

Several bookmarks can be used in the same table cell. E.g.<CALC ORDER ARTICLE NO>#<CALC ORDER ARTICLE DESCRIPTION>;<CALC ORDER ARTICLE PICTURE>

Column 1 will in this example contain Article number, and Column 2 will contain Article description [line break] [image from article window].

CALC PRINT ORDERLINE FORMAT3

Example:<CALC ORDER ARTICLE NO>#<CALC ORDER ARTICLE DESCRIPTION>#<CALC ORDER ARTICLE QTY>'
Setting in Admin, which transfers article lines from a calculation as single lines to a table in Word. Use the bookmarks from the order lines in a calculation and separate with the '#' sign. A table in Word templates must be created with as many columns as there are number of fields, which need printing. The bookmark <CALC ORDERLINES1>...<CALC ORDERLINES10> must be set in the first field in the first column.
E.g. bookmarks:

• <CALC ORDER ARTICLE NO>
• <CALC ORDER ARTICLE DESCRIPTION>
• <CALC ORDER ARTICLE QTY>
• <CALC ORDER ARTICLE PICTURE> (Image from the article screen dialog)

See the Evatic Service helpfile for more bookmarks

Several bookmarks can be used in the same table cell. E.g.<CALC ORDER ARTICLE NO>#<CALC ORDER ARTICLE DESCRIPTION>;<CALC ORDER ARTICLE PICTURE>

Column 1 will in this example contain Article number, and Column 2 will contain Article description [line break] [image from article window].

CALC PRINT ORDERLINE FORMAT4

Example:<CALC ORDER ARTICLE NO>#<CALC ORDER ARTICLE DESCRIPTION>#<CALC ORDER ARTICLE QTY>'
Setting in Admin, which transfers article lines from a calculation as single lines to a table in Word. Use the bookmarks from the order lines in a calculation and separate with the '#' sign. A table in Word templates must be created with as many columns as there are number of fields, which need printing. The bookmark <CALC ORDERLINES1>...<CALC ORDERLINES10> must be set in the first field in the first column.
E.g. bookmarks:

• <CALC ORDER ARTICLE NO>
• <CALC ORDER ARTICLE DESCRIPTION>
• <CALC ORDER ARTICLE QTY>
• <CALC ORDER ARTICLE PICTURE> (Image from the article screen dialog)

See the Evatic Service helpfile for more bookmarks

Several bookmarks can be used in the same table cell. E.g.<CALC ORDER ARTICLE NO>#<CALC ORDER ARTICLE DESCRIPTION>;<CALC ORDER ARTICLE PICTURE>

Column 1 will in this example contain Article number, and Column 2 will contain Article description [line break] [image from article window].

CALC PRINT ORDERLINE FORMAT5

Example:<CALC ORDER ARTICLE NO>#<CALC ORDER ARTICLE DESCRIPTION>#<CALC ORDER ARTICLE QTY>'
Setting in Admin, which transfers article lines from a calculation as single lines to a table in Word. Use the bookmarks from the order lines in a calculation and separate with the '#' sign. A table in Word templates must be created with as many columns as there are number of fields, which need printing. The bookmark <CALC ORDERLINES1>...<CALC ORDERLINES10> must be set in the first field in the first column.
E.g. bookmarks:

• <CALC ORDER ARTICLE NO>
• <CALC ORDER ARTICLE DESCRIPTION>
• <CALC ORDER ARTICLE QTY>
• <CALC ORDER ARTICLE PICTURE> (Image from the article screen dialog)

See the Evatic Service helpfile for more bookmarks

Several bookmarks can be used in the same table cell. E.g.<CALC ORDER ARTICLE NO>#<CALC ORDER ARTICLE DESCRIPTION>;<CALC ORDER ARTICLE PICTURE>

Column 1 will in this example contain Article number, and Column 2 will contain Article description [line break] [image from article window].

CALC PRINT ORDERLINE FORMAT6

Example:<CALC ORDER ARTICLE NO>#<CALC ORDER ARTICLE DESCRIPTION>#<CALC ORDER ARTICLE QTY>'
Setting in Admin, which transfers article lines from a calculation as single lines to a table in Word. Use the bookmarks from the order lines in a calculation and separate with the '#' sign. A table in Word templates must be created with as many columns as there are number of fields, which need printing. The bookmark <CALC ORDERLINES1>...<CALC ORDERLINES10> must be set in the first field in the first column.
E.g. bookmarks:

• <CALC ORDER ARTICLE NO>
• <CALC ORDER ARTICLE DESCRIPTION>
• <CALC ORDER ARTICLE QTY>
• <CALC ORDER ARTICLE PICTURE> (Image from the article screen dialog)

See the Evatic Service helpfile for more bookmarks

Several bookmarks can be used in the same table cell. E.g.<CALC ORDER ARTICLE NO>#<CALC ORDER ARTICLE DESCRIPTION>;<CALC ORDER ARTICLE PICTURE>

Column 1 will in this example contain Article number, and Column 2 will contain Article description [line break] [image from article window].

CALC PRINT ORDERLINE FORMAT7

Example:<CALC ORDER ARTICLE NO>#<CALC ORDER ARTICLE DESCRIPTION>#<CALC ORDER ARTICLE QTY>'
Setting in Admin, which transfers article lines from a calculation as single lines to a table in Word. Use the bookmarks from the order lines in a calculation and separate with the '#' sign. A table in Word templates must be created with as many columns as there are number of fields, which need printing. The bookmark <CALC ORDERLINES1>...<CALC ORDERLINES10> must be set in the first field in the first column.
E.g. bookmarks:

• <CALC ORDER ARTICLE NO>
• <CALC ORDER ARTICLE DESCRIPTION>
• <CALC ORDER ARTICLE QTY>
• <CALC ORDER ARTICLE PICTURE> (Image from the article screen dialog)

See the Evatic Service helpfile for more bookmarks

Several bookmarks can be used in the same table cell. E.g.<CALC ORDER ARTICLE NO>#<CALC ORDER ARTICLE DESCRIPTION>;<CALC ORDER ARTICLE PICTURE>

Column 1 will in this example contain Article number, and Column 2 will contain Article description [line break] [image from article window].

CALC PRINT ORDERLINE FORMAT8

Example:<CALC ORDER ARTICLE NO>#<CALC ORDER ARTICLE DESCRIPTION>#<CALC ORDER ARTICLE QTY>'
Setting in Admin, which transfers article lines from a calculation as single lines to a table in Word. Use the bookmarks from the order lines in a calculation and separate with the '#' sign. A table in Word templates must be created with as many columns as there are number of fields, which need printing. The bookmark <CALC ORDERLINES1>...<CALC ORDERLINES10> must be set in the first field in the first column.
E.g. bookmarks:

• <CALC ORDER ARTICLE NO>
• <CALC ORDER ARTICLE DESCRIPTION>
• <CALC ORDER ARTICLE QTY>
• <CALC ORDER ARTICLE PICTURE> (Image from the article screen dialog)

See the Evatic Service helpfile for more bookmarks

Several bookmarks can be used in the same table cell. E.g.<CALC ORDER ARTICLE NO>#<CALC ORDER ARTICLE DESCRIPTION>;<CALC ORDER ARTICLE PICTURE>

Column 1 will in this example contain Article number, and Column 2 will contain Article description [line break] [image from article window].

CALC PRINT ORDERLINE FORMAT9

Example:<CALC ORDER ARTICLE NO>#<CALC ORDER ARTICLE DESCRIPTION>#<CALC ORDER ARTICLE QTY>'
Setting in Admin, which transfers article lines from a calculation as single lines to a table in Word. Use the bookmarks from the order lines in a calculation and separate with the '#' sign. A table in Word templates must be created with as many columns as there are number of fields, which need printing. The bookmark <CALC ORDERLINES1>...<CALC ORDERLINES10> must be set in the first field in the first column.
E.g. bookmarks:

• <CALC ORDER ARTICLE NO>
• <CALC ORDER ARTICLE DESCRIPTION>
• <CALC ORDER ARTICLE QTY>
• <CALC ORDER ARTICLE PICTURE> (Image from the article screen dialog)

See the Evatic Service helpfile for more bookmarks

Several bookmarks can be used in the same table cell. E.g.<CALC ORDER ARTICLE NO>#<CALC ORDER ARTICLE DESCRIPTION>;<CALC ORDER ARTICLE PICTURE>

Column 1 will in this example contain Article number, and Column 2 will contain Article description [line break] [image from article window].

CALC PROFIT USE OLD CONTRACT

Should information about 'old contract' be calculated in the result and coverage (amount and %).
(see Evatic Service/ Sales project).

CALC PROVISION CUSTOMER

The percentage of the standard bonus a salesperson is to have from sales to existing customers.

CALC PROVISION CUSTOMER OLD

The percentage of the standard bonus a salesperson is to have from sales to existing customers where the existing contacts have left the company.

CALC PROVISION NEW CUSTOMER

The percentage of the standard bonus a salesperson is to have from sales to new customers.

CALC SER PROV MONTH MINUS

Example: CALC SER PROV MONTH MINUS = 1
Here you can calculate how great a reduction in sales bonus a salesman should have if a contract is negated. The reduction is calculated using the following formula: CALC SER PROV MONTH MINUS * Volume per month * Price per copy * Remaining years = Reduction.

CALC SHOW METER QTY

Example: CALC SHOW METER QTY = 4
Here you can divide how many meters should be displayed simultaneously for the contract information within the Calculation dialog.

CALC TABS CONTRACT VISIBLE

Should the tab for <Contract> be displayed in the calculation dialog in Evatic?

CALC TABS DATA GENERATED VISIBLE

Should the tab for <Data generated> be displayed in the calculation dialog in Evatic?

CALC TABS OLD CONTRACT VISIBLE

Should the tab for <Old contract> be displayed in the calculation dialog in Evatic?

CALC TABS PROVISION VISIBLE

Should the tab for <Provision> be displayed in the calculation dialog in Evatic?

CALC TABS QUICKORDER VISIBLE

Should the tab for <Quick order> be displayed in the calculation dialog in Evatic?

CALC TABS SUBSCRIPTIONS VISIBLE

Should the tab for <Subscriptions> be displayed in the calculation dialog in Evatic?

CALC USE DISCOUNT ON ORDERLINE

If unchecked = When creating order from sales calc then the salesprice will be calculated to the discounted salesprice on orderline, and discount will be set to 0
If checked = When creating order from sales calc then the salesprice and discount will be the same as on calculation

CALC USE SALESMAN FROM USER

Should the salesman connected to the user be used as default or the salesman connected to the customer? Checked for yes (user) and unchecked for no (customer).

CALENDAR DAYVIEW BAR HEIGHT

Example: CALENDAR DAYVIEW BAR HEIGHT = 0
Here you can change the bar height for the calendar. This change affects all the calendars in the system. Higher = 1,2,3,4 etc. Smaller = -1,-2,-3,-4 etc. Standard = 0.

CALENDAR DAYVIEW TIMEUNITS

Example: CALENDAR DAYVIEW TIMEUNITS = 2
How many minutes should it be between each 'line' in the calendar view in Evatic?

• 5 minutes = 0
• 10 minutes = 1
• 15 minutes = 2
• 30 minutes = 3
• 60 minutes = 4

CALENDAR SERVER SERVER SYNC ON

For future use of Server <-> Server synchronization with activities in Evatic and Outlook/Lotus Notes.

CHANGE COST SERIAL ON ORDER

Regarding orders from the sales module: Should the cost price on the order lines change when selecting serial number for the serial number required article. It will then change to the cost price connected to the selected serial number.

CHANGE ORDER FROM CALC

Should it be to possible to change the sales prices in the order that are generated from sales calc.

CHECK FOR EXISTING CUSTOMERS ON

If the customer is adding a new customer, and there are one or more existing customers in the database with the same address 1 (first 4 letters) and post code and post description, a list of these customers is shown. The user will get a question whether to work on the new customer or use one of the existing. Default unchecked = no check for existing customers with same address-data.

CONTACT TITLE NOT SHOW SALESMAN

Example: CONTACT TITLE NOT SHOW SALESMAN = CEO;CTO;Manager
Should some contact persons (e.g. for service on machines) not be visible for the salesmen? Blank = all contact persons are shown. Job title (description) (use ';' to enter several contacts) = those are not shown for the salesmen.

CUSTOMER EXT MACHINE ON

Should the tab for <External Machines> be displayed in the customer dialog in Evatic?
Customer Ext Month Before
Example: Customer Ext Month Before = 2
Setting is in number of month. Default = 2. The start date of the activity when pressing the activity button under the External machine tab in Evatic is calculated with this value. The date is set by using the following formula: End date - number of months' notice time - CUSTOMER EXT MONTH BEFORE

CUSTOMER EXT TASK AUTO ON

Should activities automatic be generated for external machines.

CUSTOMER EXT TASK CATEGORY

Example: CUSTOMER EXT TASK CATEGORY = ME (Meeting)
Which default activity type should be used whenever creating activities for external machines.

DOCUMENT READ ONLY WARNING

Should the user receive a warning when he only has reading access to a document (see customer card).

FILE NAME FROM TEMPLATE BOOKMARK

Does the document template name contain bookmarks that should be replaced and used as filename on the new file?

KEEP FOCUS SAVE MSG

If you need to select yes or no when the pop up message for saving a document (Word/Excel) appears. If the setting is checked, you are not able to continue to work in Evatic or with other windows programs.

MACHINE NEW CREATE TASK

If a project should be automatically generated for the installation of the machine from Calculation.

MACHINE NEW CREATE TASK QUESTION

Should the system ask the user if the projects are to be made for this calc.?

MACHINE NEW SORTGROUP CODE

Example: MACHINE NEW SORTGROUP CODE = CALC
If you want to enter a value for one of the sort groups for the machine when a machine is generated from Calculation, you can enter the value here.

MACHINE NEW SORTGROUP NO

Example: MACHINE NEW SORTGROUP NO = 5
Here you can select which of the sort groups the value is to be allocated to. Machine New Sortgroup Code. Select from 1-5.

MACHINE NEW TEMP NO

Example: MACHINE NEW TEMP NO = -3000
Which temporary machine number the machine generated from Calculation is to receive. 1 is added to this number for each new machine that is generated.

NOT CHANGE COST ORDER FROM SALES

Should the cost price not be changed when the order is created in the sales project module and you change the stock (= only when average cost price is used).

ONLY NEW SERIAL ORDER FROM SALES

Should it be possible to select from both new and used serial numbers.

ORDER TYPE CALC

The standard order type for all new orders automatically created from a calculation in Evatic.

OUTLOOK SECURITY ERROR ON

Should only be used if support ask you to set the setting to checked
When the setting is checked then the system will show an error message when Evatic has problems turning off outlook security

OUTLOOK SYNC FINISHED TASKS

Decides if completed activities from Outlook should be synchronized into Evatic.

PRINT ORDERLINE FORMAT1

Example:<ORDER ARTICLE NO>#<ORDER ARTICLE DESCRIPTION>#<ORDER ARTICLE QTY>'
Setting in Admin, which transfers article lines from a sales project as single lines to a table in Word. Use the bookmarks from the order lines and separate with the '#' sign. A table in Word templates must be created with as many columns as there are number of fields, which need printing. The bookmark <ORDERLINES1>...<ORDERLINES10> must be set in the first field in the first column.
E.g. bookmark:

• <ORDER ARTICLE NO>
• <ORDER ARTICLE DESCRIPTION
• <ORDER ARTICLE QTY>
• <ORDER ARTICLE PICTURE> (Image from the article screen dialog)

See the Evatic Service help file for more bookmarks

PRINT ORDERLINE FORMAT10

Example:<ORDER ARTICLE NO>#<ORDER ARTICLE DESCRIPTION>#<ORDER ARTICLE QTY>'
Setting in Admin, which transfers article lines from a sales project as single lines to a table in Word. Use the bookmarks from the order lines and separate with the '#' sign. A table in Word templates must be created with as many columns as there are number of fields, which need printing. The bookmark <ORDERLINES1>...<ORDERLINES10> must be set in the first field in the first column.
E.g. bookmark:

• <ORDER ARTICLE NO>
• <ORDER ARTICLE DESCRIPTION
• <ORDER ARTICLE QTY>
• <ORDER ARTICLE PICTURE> (Image from the article screen dialog)

See the Evatic Service help file for more bookmarks

PRINT ORDERLINE FORMAT2

Example:<ORDER ARTICLE NO>#<ORDER ARTICLE DESCRIPTION>#<ORDER ARTICLE QTY>'
Setting in Admin, which transfers article lines from a sales project as single lines to a table in Word. Use the bookmarks from the order lines and separate with the '#' sign. A table in Word templates must be created with as many columns as there are number of fields, which need printing. The bookmark <ORDERLINES1>...<ORDERLINES10> must be set in the first field in the first column.
E.g. bookmark:

• <ORDER ARTICLE NO>
• <ORDER ARTICLE DESCRIPTION
• <ORDER ARTICLE QTY>
• <ORDER ARTICLE PICTURE> (Image from the article screen dialog)

See the Evatic Service help file for more bookmarks

PRINT ORDERLINE FORMAT3

Example:<ORDER ARTICLE NO>#<ORDER ARTICLE DESCRIPTION>#<ORDER ARTICLE QTY>'
Setting in Admin, which transfers article lines from a sales project as single lines to a table in Word. Use the bookmarks from the order lines and separate with the '#' sign. A table in Word templates must be created with as many columns as there are number of fields, which need printing. The bookmark <ORDERLINES1>...<ORDERLINES10> must be set in the first field in the first column.
E.g. bookmark:

• <ORDER ARTICLE NO>
• <ORDER ARTICLE DESCRIPTION
• <ORDER ARTICLE QTY>
• <ORDER ARTICLE PICTURE> (Image from the article screen dialog)

See the Evatic Service help file for more bookmarks

PRINT ORDERLINE FORMAT4

Example:<ORDER ARTICLE NO>#<ORDER ARTICLE DESCRIPTION>#<ORDER ARTICLE QTY>'
Setting in Admin, which transfers article lines from a sales project as single lines to a table in Word. Use the bookmarks from the order lines and separate with the '#' sign. A table in Word templates must be created with as many columns as there are number of fields, which need printing. The bookmark <ORDERLINES1>...<ORDERLINES10> must be set in the first field in the first column.
E.g. bookmark:

• <ORDER ARTICLE NO>
• <ORDER ARTICLE DESCRIPTION
• <ORDER ARTICLE QTY>
• <ORDER ARTICLE PICTURE> (Image from the article screen dialog)

See the Evatic Service help file for more bookmarks

PRINT ORDERLINE FORMAT5

Example:<ORDER ARTICLE NO>#<ORDER ARTICLE DESCRIPTION>#<ORDER ARTICLE QTY>'
Setting in Admin, which transfers article lines from a sales project as single lines to a table in Word. Use the bookmarks from the order lines and separate with the '#' sign. A table in Word templates must be created with as many columns as there are number of fields, which need printing. The bookmark <ORDERLINES1>...<ORDERLINES10> must be set in the first field in the first column.
E.g. bookmark:

• <ORDER ARTICLE NO>
• <ORDER ARTICLE DESCRIPTION
• <ORDER ARTICLE QTY>
• <ORDER ARTICLE PICTURE> (Image from the article screen dialog)

See the Evatic Service help file for more bookmarks

PRINT ORDERLINE FORMAT6

Example:<ORDER ARTICLE NO>#<ORDER ARTICLE DESCRIPTION>#<ORDER ARTICLE QTY>'
Setting in Admin, which transfers article lines from a sales project as single lines to a table in Word. Use the bookmarks from the order lines and separate with the '#' sign. A table in Word templates must be created with as many columns as there are number of fields, which need printing. The bookmark <ORDERLINES1>...<ORDERLINES10> must be set in the first field in the first column.
E.g. bookmark:

• <ORDER ARTICLE NO>
• <ORDER ARTICLE DESCRIPTION
• <ORDER ARTICLE QTY>
• <ORDER ARTICLE PICTURE> (Image from the article screen dialog)

See the Evatic Service help file for more bookmarks

PRINT ORDERLINE FORMAT7

Example:<ORDER ARTICLE NO>#<ORDER ARTICLE DESCRIPTION>#<ORDER ARTICLE QTY>'
Setting in Admin, which transfers article lines from a sales project as single lines to a table in Word. Use the bookmarks from the order lines and separate with the '#' sign. A table in Word templates must be created with as many columns as there are number of fields, which need printing. The bookmark <ORDERLINES1>...<ORDERLINES10> must be set in the first field in the first column.
E.g. bookmark:

• <ORDER ARTICLE NO>
• <ORDER ARTICLE DESCRIPTION
• <ORDER ARTICLE QTY>
• <ORDER ARTICLE PICTURE> (Image from the article screen dialog)

See the Evatic Service help file for more bookmarks

PRINT ORDERLINE FORMAT8

Example:<ORDER ARTICLE NO>#<ORDER ARTICLE DESCRIPTION>#<ORDER ARTICLE QTY>'
Setting in Admin, which transfers article lines from a sales project as single lines to a table in Word. Use the bookmarks from the order lines and separate with the '#' sign. A table in Word templates must be created with as many columns as there are number of fields, which need printing. The bookmark <ORDERLINES1>...<ORDERLINES10> must be set in the first field in the first column.
E.g. bookmark:

• <ORDER ARTICLE NO>
• <ORDER ARTICLE DESCRIPTION
• <ORDER ARTICLE QTY>
• <ORDER ARTICLE PICTURE> (Image from the article screen dialog)

See the Evatic Service help file for more bookmarks

PRINT ORDERLINE FORMAT9

Example:<ORDER ARTICLE NO>#<ORDER ARTICLE DESCRIPTION>#<ORDER ARTICLE QTY>'
Setting in Admin, which transfers article lines from a sales project as single lines to a table in Word. Use the bookmarks from the order lines and separate with the '#' sign. A table in Word templates must be created with as many columns as there are number of fields, which need printing. The bookmark <ORDERLINES1>...<ORDERLINES10> must be set in the first field in the first column.
E.g. bookmark:

• <ORDER ARTICLE NO>
• <ORDER ARTICLE DESCRIPTION
• <ORDER ARTICLE QTY>
• <ORDER ARTICLE PICTURE> (Image from the article screen dialog)

See the Evatic Service help file for more bookmarks

SALEMANUAL ARTICLE SORTGROUP

Example: SALEMANUAL ARTICLE SORTGROUP = 5
Which sort group for articles should group the articles when printing the salesman's' manual?

SALEPROJECT ON CLICK APPROVAL

Should the Evatic user be able to complete a sales project and generate data directly?

SHOW CUSTOMER RESULT ON

Here you can select if the profitability of a customer should be displayed in the customer dialog. If this is unchecked the turnover for the customer will be displayed but not the profit in currency and percent.

SHOW MACHINE

Should the Evatic user have access to the Machine dialog? This setting can be overridden by the serial code.

(only for users with a Evatic version older than 2.0)

SHOW METER

Should the Evatic user have access to the Meter dialog? This setting can be overridden by the serial code.

(only for users with a Evatic version older than 2.0)

SHOW REMINDER AS BUTTON

Should the reminder window pop up automatically or not? If checked, a button with a different color will be shown on the toolbar and the reminder window will not pop up automatically. If unchecked the reminder window will be pop up automatically.

TAPI ON

Setting to turn on TAPI-functionality in Evatic.

VAT CODES

Example: VAT CODES = 11;24
What are the different VAT codes available for selection? Each code is separated by a semi colon.

(only for users with a Evatic version older then 2.0)

WORD WAIT FOR ACTION DELAY

Example: WORD WAIT FOR ACTION DELAY = 500
Setting added to set a delay before Evatic Service tries to use MS Word. (Default 500 = 0,5 seconds)

MS Word uses time to load, e.g. templates, fonts etc. and if Word is not ready when Evatic Service tries to use it, the user will receive an error message.

Evatic Server

APP SERVER JOB ON

Should the Evatic server be used for generating recurring project where tasks are changed.

DEFAULT RESPONSE TIME

Example: DEFAULT RESPONSE TIME = 8
The number of hours to be set as the response time for tasks.

Used for recurring projects that is not connected to a contract type or where the contract type has no response time.
For normal service projects the setting Evatic Service/DEFAULT RESPONSE TIME is used.

EXECUTE SP 1 END TIME

Example: EXECUTE SP 1 END TIME = 16:00
The end time for the recurring task

EXECUTE SP 1 INTERVAL

Example: EXECUTE SP 1 INTERVAL = 2
How often should this procedure run. In minutes. If this setting is blank the procedure will run every minute.

EXECUTE SP 1 NAME

Example: EXECUTE SP 1 NAME = sp_update_RECURRENCY_ALL
The mane of the procedure can be entered here.

EXECUTE SP 1 START TIME

Example: EXECUTE SP 1 START TIME = 08:00
The start time for the recurring task

Evatic Server must be re-started whenever you do changes to the settings above.

EXECUTE SP 2 END TIME

Example: EXECUTE SP 2 END TIME = 16:00
The end time for the recurring task

EXECUTE SP 2 INTERVAL

Example: EXECUTE SP 2 INTERVAL = 2
How often should this procedure run. In minutes. If this setting is blank the procedure will run every minute.

EXECUTE SP 2 NAME

Example: EXECUTE SP 2 NAME = sp_update_RECURRENCY_ALL
The mane of the procedure can be entered here.

EXECUTE SP 2 START TIME

Example: EXECUTE SP 2 START TIME = 08:00
The start time for the recurring task

Evatic Server must be re-started whenever you do changes to the settings above.

EXECUTE SP 3 END TIME

Example: EXECUTE SP 3 END TIME = 16:00
The end time for the recurring task

EXECUTE SP 3 INTERVAL

Example: EXECUTE SP 3 INTERVAL = 2
How often should this procedure run. In minutes. If this setting is blank the procedure will run every minute.

EXECUTE SP 3 NAME

Example: EXECUTE SP 3 NAME = sp_update_RECURRENCY_ALL
The mane of the procedure can be entered here.

EXECUTE SP 3 START TIME

Example: EXECUTE SP 3 START TIME = 08:00
The start time for the recurring task

Evatic Server must be re-started whenever you do changes to the settings above.

EXECUTE SP 4 END TIME

Example: EXECUTE SP 4 END TIME = 16:00
The end time for the recurring task

EXECUTE SP 4 INTERVAL

Example: EXECUTE SP 4 INTERVAL = 2
How often should this procedure run. In minutes. If this setting is blank the procedure will run every minute.

EXECUTE SP 4 NAME

Example: EXECUTE SP 4 NAME = sp_update_RECURRENCY_ALL
The mane of the procedure can be entered here.

EXECUTE SP 4 START TIME

Example: EXECUTE SP 4 START TIME = 08:00
The start time for the recurring task

Evatic Server must be re-started whenever you do changes to the settings above.

EXECUTE SP 5 END TIME

Example: EXECUTE SP 5 END TIME = 16:00
The end time for the recurring task

EXECUTE SP 5 INTERVAL

Example: EXECUTE SP 5 INTERVAL = 2
How often should this procedure run. In minutes. If this setting is blank the procedure will run every minute.

EXECUTE SP 5 NAME

Example: EXECUTE SP 5 NAME = sp_update_RECURRENCY_ALL
The mane of the procedure can be entered here.

EXECUTE SP 5 START TIME

Example: EXECUTE SP 5 START TIME = 08:00
The start time for the recurring task

Evatic Server must be re-started whenever you do changes to the settings above.

SEND MAIL AUTO.

General function for mail sending. A new table is added: MAIL_AUTO_SERVER. This is used for store information about mails which are to be send out automatically. Evatic Server will check this table and continuously send out new emails added to the table. If an attachment is to be added to the email, this must be added to the table. DOCUMENT with SOURCE_OBJ_NO = OBJ_NO from MAIL_AUTO_SERVER.

Evatic Service

APP USER DEPT LIMITATION ON

Should there be a department limitation for the user when opening machines, customers, projects, contracts or not?
Autostart windows:
This is a function to open external programs and auto-open windows in Evatic. 1 = timer goes, 0 timer does not go.
Tabel: APP_AUTO_START_WINDOWS
There will be possibility to add link buttons (see below) under My Evatic (see Evatic Service). When the user presses a link button a pooling to a table will start to 'open all windows for a user. The following information muss be added:
USER_NAME
OPEN_IN
PARAMETERS
OBJ_DATE
STATUS

AUTOSTART WINDOWS REFRESH

Example: AUTOSTART WINDOWS REFRESH = 10
Should windows open despite if the user presses any external program buttons. The setting is to be set in minutes (Max = 60)

AUTOSTART WINDOWS SHELL REFRESH

Example: AUTOSTART WINDOWS SHELL REFRESH = 20
Should windows open only if the user presses any external program buttons. The setting is to be set in minutes (Max = 60)

AUTOSTART WINDOWS SHELL TIMEOUT

Example: AUTOSTART WINDOWS SHELL TIMEOUT = 10
When should the timer go to time out. The setting is to be set in minutes, 0 = no limit

DATE FORMAT

Example: DATE FORMAT = DD.MM.YYYY
Which date format should be used for the action text field (CTRL + N), when the jobs are reported back from Evatic Mobile? The following values are available:
DD.MM.YYYY
DD/MM/YYYY
DD/MM/YY
DD-MM-YYYY
YYYY-MM-DD

DEFAULT ORDER TYPE

Example: DEFAULT ORDER TYPE = MAN
The standard order type for all new orders if this is not entered in the Department dialog.

DEFAULT RESPONSE TIME

Example: DEFAULT RESPONSE TIME = 15
The number of hours to be set as the response time for tasks connected to a customer or machine , that are not covered by a contract.

DEFAULT SOLUTION TIME

Example: DEFAULT SOLUTION TIME = 8
The number of hours to be set as the solution time for tasks connected to a machine not covered by a contract.
Note! Used for recurring projects that is not connected to a contract type or where the contract type has no response time.

DELETE PRINTER SETTINGS ON LOGIN

If checked, the setup for printer is deleted for each time you login to Evatic. The default windows printer will be suggested.

This is a solution for e.g. users using Citrix
(see also GLOBAL_USER \ Evatic Service \ SESSION PREFIX)

DISABLE INPUT FIELDS

Should "important' fields within the dialogs for machine, customer, article, etc. be protected; user must press ALT+F5 to go to edit mode for the fields?

ENABLE GRID COLUMNS HIDE

Should it be possible to hide columns in different grids?
See the setting COMPANY_XXX -> GRID COLUMNS HIDE.

INCOMMING CALL SEC SAME PHONENO

Example: INCOMMING CALL SEC SAME PHONENO = 20
How many seconds should the system wait and ignore the same incoming telephone call? e.g. 20, 30, 60

LINK BUTTON 1 ACTION

Example: LINK BUTTON 1 ACTION = http://www.evatic.com/
Under My Evatic, what command should be run when clicking link button 1?
Enter the command as you would enter it in the Start --> Run window in Windows

The following parameters can be used:
<USERNAME>
<PASSWORD>
Or you can set up a program that is going to start as COMPANY XXX \ SUPPORT \ REMOTE PROGRAM.

LINK BUTTON 1 TEXT

Example: LINK BUTTON 1 TEXT = Evatic Homepage
Under My Evatic, what text should appear on link button 2?

LINK BUTTON 2 ACTION

Example: LINK BUTTON 1 ACTION = winword.exe
Under My Evatic, what command should be run when clicking link button 2?
Enter the command as you would enter it in the Start --> Run window in Windows

LINK BUTTON 2 TEXT

Example: LINK BUTTON 1 TEXT = Microsoft Word
Under My Evatic, what text should appear on link button 3?

LINK BUTTON 3 ACTION

Example: LINK BUTTON 1 ACTION = notepad.exe
Under My Evatic, what command should be run when clicking link button 3?
Enter the command as you would enter it in the Start --> Run window in Windows

LINK BUTTON 3 TEXT

Example: LINK BUTTON 1 TEXT = Notepad
Under My Evatic, what text should appear on link button 1?

MACHINE NEW CREATE TASK

If the stock admin module is enabled and a sales order for a machine is created, the machine will be generated in Evatic. It's also possible to automatically generate an installation project task in Evatic for this new machine. Set this to 1 to enable this.

MACHINE NEW SORTGROUP CODE

Example: MACHINE NEW SORTGROUP CODE = Fax
If the stock admin module is enabled and a sales order for a machine is created, the machine will be generated in Evatic. A special sortgroup code can be set on the machine by using this setting.

MACHINE NEW SORTGROUP NO

Example: MACHINE NEW SORTGROUP NO = 105
If the stock admin module is enabled and a sales order for a machine is created, the machine will be generated in Evatic. A special sort group code can be set on the machine and it's also possible to select the sort group number to be used. Set the sort group no here.

MACHINE NEW TEMP ON

Example: MACHINE NEW TEMP ON = 5
If the stock admin module is enabled and if the system should create temporary machine number for machines which do not require serial number.

PROPERTIES EXTENDED VALUES

If checked, then a new drop-down in the properties screen where the possible values can be entered (customer and machine).
This can be used if you need to have a lot of different values for each property and instead of adding this as a long semicolon separated string.

The values from the drop-down will also be possible to select when adding/editing properties in Evatic Mobile.

READ DIFF

Example: READ DIFF = 12
Contracts that use calculation methods 005 and 006 send out a new volume when the current volume has been used up. If READ DIFF is set to any other value than 0 the new volume can be sent out x % before the current volume has been used.

SHOW MACHINE

Should the Evatic user have access to screen dialogs regarding machine?
This setting can be overridden by the serial code.

SHOW METER

Should the Evatic user have access to screen dialogs regarding meters?
This setting can be overridden by the serial code.

TAPI SHOW INC CALL AS BUTTON

If checked, the incoming call window will display an orange button in the open windows line when you get an incoming call.
The user must push this button to open the window.

TIME ZONE

Example: Finland is one hour before, enter -1.
Different time zone for client-pc. Use this setting if the computer running Evatic is in another time zone than the server to get the timing right. Enter the amount of hours that differ from GMT.

USE LETTER ADDRESS

Should it be possible for the user to add addresses for meter reading letters?
Multilanguage
To be able to support multiple languages in Evatic, where the country-prefix of the phone number is used, ex:
31 - Netherlands
46 - Sweden
47 - Norway
49 - Germany
Those settings turn on functionality that is depending on the value set on the address for language to be used. 1 = on, 0 = off.
The language id is linked to a drop down on the address (see Evatic Service/customer) where all supported languages can be selected called 'Language'. By default, this drop-down is blank, and the country no on the address is controlling the language id. The drop-down is only used when the language should deviate from the country language on the address. It is set on customer level, because the customer is the owner of the address in Evatic, but it will also affect objects linked to an address:
- contract volume row
- contract fixed price row
- machine
- project (service call)
The drop-down is displayed when one of the following settings are set to 1 (USE MULTILANGUAGE EMAILS ON or USE MULTILANGUAGE PRINTOUTS ON)

USE MULTILANGUAGE EMAILS ON

All information sent from Evatic to customer/supplier is in the current solution based on the selected application language. This is set on the user-level. There should also be possibility to set the language based on the address-level for emails (only email in Evatic that is sent to customer/supplier, not technicians).
All mail-dependent settings in Evatic Admin will be pre-defined to the language id on the address. Settings that will be added is listed on the mail-type below.
When using this functionality, new language dependent settings will be created in Evatic Admin with the language id as the identifier for each language dependent setting for Subject and Body. The default language setting value will be used for basis when creating new language depended settings.
List of multilanguage email:

DataField	Description
Supplier order	Supplier-address Settings: COMPANY XXX -> MAIL SUPPLIER ORDER -> [LANGUAGE ID] SUBJECT [LANGUAGE ID] GREETING
Service project	Machine-address if machine-linked, else project-address Settings: COMPANY XXX -> MAIL PROJECT -> [LANGUAGE ID] SUBJECT [LANGUAGE ID] TECHNICIAN MESSAGE [LANGUAGE ID] MAIL FORMAT [1..10] NAME [LANGUAGE ID] MAIL FORMAT [1..10] TEXT
Meter reading letter	Letter-address on contract Settings: COMPANY XXX -> MAIL -> [LANGUAGE ID] LETTER ALT BODY [LANGUAGE ID] LETTER ALT MACHINE BODY [LANGUAGE ID] LETTER ALT METER BODY [LANGUAGE ID] LETTER ALT SUBJECT Remark: Because of the limitation of length for the setting, the settings are shorten from METER_LETTER_xxx to LETTER_xxx for language dependent settings.

USE MULTILANGUAGE PRINTOUTS ON

All information sent from Evatic to customer/supplier is in the current solution based on the selected print language. This is set on the user-level. There should also be possibility to set the language based on the address-level for printouts (only reports in Evatic that is sent to customers: order, packing slip, machine statistics, serviceorders, meterreading-letters, supplier orders, etc.)
When making previews of the printouts, the default language (user-level) is always used, but when printing the actual report, language will be set based on the address-level.
The 'Information language' drop-down on the address-level can also be used here to be able to select a different printlanguage than the address country id on the address, same as the multilanguage support on article.
The multilanguage support is only possible on reports intended to be sent to end-customers/suppliers.
List of multilanguage printouts:

DataField	Description
Order	Invoice-address on order
Delivery list / Packingslip	Invoice-address on order
Machine	Machine-address
Meter reading letter *	Letter-address on contract
Order confirmation	Invoice-address on order
Return order	Supplier-address
Service report	Machine-address if machine-linked, else project-address
Supplier order	Supplier-address

* if 'Meter reading letter'-report is used for multilanguage-support, none of the fixed fields on the layout (Heading, Letter text 1-3, Greeting) can be used, all text must be included in the layout in Evatic Admin.

USE POST ADDRESS

On the contact-windows there is a new drop down showing all the addresses that can be linked to the contact. It is only possible to select between addresses which are type 'Post'. Default is, not enabled.

VAT CODES

Example: VAT CODES = 11;24
Which different VAT codes should be available to choose from? Each code is separated by a semi colon.

Evatic Web

ACCESS SORTGROUP NO

Example: ACCESS SORTGROUP NO = 1
Add which customer sort group (1-5) to set as default symptom code 1 on a project..
The setting SYMPTOM CODE 1 CUSTOMER SG must be set to 1.

ADDRESS NUMBER

Example: ADDRESS NUMBER = 2
Enter how many address fields to be displayed in the order confirmation view.
Valid for both delivery address 1-3 and invoice address 1-3.

ALLOW CONTACT UPDATE

Should it be possible to update contact data in the Project Registration view?
If checked, the 'Update contact' button is visible and contact fields are enabled.

ALLOW EDIT MACHINE PROPERTY

If checked, and logged in as evatic user, it is possible to edit the machine properties.

ALLOW MACHINE ADDRESS EDIT

Should it be possible to create or edit the machine address.

ALLOW OTHER CONTACT ORDER

Should it be possible to choose another contact person for new orders in ECW?

If not checked the only option is the current contact (assuming that the logged in user is a contact (CONTACT EMAIL LOGIN checked)). In case a user is logged in based on the contract ( CONTRACT NO LOGIN checked) , then this setting has no effect.

ALLOW OTHER CONTACT PROJECT

Should it be possible to choose another contact person for new projects in ECW?

If not checked the only option is the current contact (assuming that the logged in user is a contact (CONTACT EMAIL LOGIN checked)). In case a user is logged in based on the contract ( CONTRACT NO LOGIN checked) , then this setting has no effect.

ALLOW OTHER CONTACT SUPPORT

Should it be possible to choose another contact person for new Helpdesk task in ECW?

If not checked the only option is the current contact (assuming that the logged in user is a contact (CONTACT EMAIL LOGIN checked)). In case a user is logged in based on the contract ( CONTRACT NO LOGIN checked) , then this setting has no effect.

CONTACT EMAIL LOGIN

If this setting is checked, then the user can login as a contact person.

CONTACT LIST TYPE ORDER

What type of contacts should be available?
1. all customer contacts
2. all contacts assigned to a machine (when a machine is selected)

• Machine is NOT selected - all contacts for all machines
• Machine is selected - only contacts linked to the selected machine

3. all contacts assigned to a contract (when there is a contract involved = CONTRACT NO LOGIN checked)
CONTACT EMAIL LOGIN checked (= logged in as a contact) and ALLOW OTHER CONTACT ORDER checked
1. all customer contacts
2. all contacts assigned to a machine

• Machine is NOT selected - all contacts linked to the customers machine
• Machine is selected - only contacts linked to the selected customer machine

3. all customer contacts

CONTACT LIST TYPE PROJECT

What type of contacts should be available?
1. all customer contacts
2. all contacts assigned to a machine
Machine is NOT selected - all contacts for all machines

• Machine is selected - only contacts linked to the selected machine

3. all contacts assigned to a contract (when there is a contract involved = CONTRACT NO LOGIN checked))
CONTACT EMAIL LOGIN checked (= logged in as a contact) and ALLOW OTHER CONTACT PROJECT checked
1. all customer contacts
2. all contacts assigned to a machine

• Machine is NOT selected - all contacts linked to the customers machine
• Machine is selected - only contacts linked to the selected customer machine

3. all customer contacts

CONTACT LIST TYPE SUPPORT

What type of contacts should be available?
1. all customer contacts
2. all contacts assigned to a machine (when a machine is selected)

• Machine is NOT selected - all contacts for all machines
• Machine is selected - only contacts linked to the selected machine

3. all contacts assigned to a contract (when there is a contract involved = CONTRACT NO LOGIN checked)
CONTACT EMAIL LOGIN checked (= logged in as a contact) and ALLOW OTHER CONTACT SUPPORT checked
1. all customer contacts
2. all contacts assigned to a machine

• Machine is NOT selected - all contacts linked to the customers machine
• Machine is selected - only contacts linked to the selected customer machine

3. all customer contacts

CONTRACT MACHINES

When logging in with contract no (CONTRACT NO LOGIN checked) should Evatic limit the machines to only show the machines on the contract from the login.

CONTRACT NO LOGIN

If this setting is checked, then the customers can login with customer number as username and contract no as password. The contract number used for password must belong to the customer and it must be active. It is the customer number on the contract header that is the customer number that must be used, it will not work with customer number linked to volume or fixed price contracts (invoice customer, meter letter customer etc.).

COPY SYMPTOM CODES TO TEXT

Should the text from the symptom codes be copied to the symptom text field?

DEFAULT CULTURE NAME

Set the default language used in ECW<br /><br />

DEFAULT LANGUAGE

Sets the default language for ECW.
Language codes:
44 = English (UK)
1= English (US)
31 = Dutch
33 = French
34 = Spanish
45 = Danish
46 = Swedish
47 = Norwegian
49 = German
81 = Japanese

DEFAULT PRIORITY CODE

Here you can set up which priority code all the tasks reported in via Evatic Web should be given in the project e.g. 'W'.

DEFAULT PRIORITY CODE SUPPORT

Example: DEFAULT PRIORITY CODE SUPPORT = Urgent
Sets the default priority code on HelpDesk tasks from ECW.

DEFAULT RESPONSE TIME SUPPORT

Example: DEFAULT RESPONSE TIME SUPPORT =8
Sets default number of hours (response time) for tasks from ECW.

DEFAULT RESPONSETIME

Example: DEFAULT RESPONSETIME =8
Sets default number of hours (response time) for Helpdesk tasks from ECW.

DEFAULT STOCK NO

Example: DDEFAULT STOCK NO =100
Default stock number to use when creating orders

DEFAULT TASK NODE DEFAULT TASK WEB NODE

Projects registered will be placed in the node defined in this setting. If this setting is empty, the project will be placed in the root node of the task tree (e.g. All).
Note!
If 'USE DEFAULT TASK NODE' is checked,
the system check the MachineNode, if 'MachineNode'= null, then use DEF TASK TREE NODE
If 'USE DEFAULT TASK NODE' isn't checked,
use DEFAULT TASK WEB NODE

DEFAULT TASK NODE SUPPORT

HelpDesk tasks registered will be placed in the node defined in this setting. If this setting is empty, the task will be placed in the root

DELIVERY ADDRESS 1

Example: DELIVERY ADDRESS 1=Address 1
Set label for delivery address 1 in the order confirmation view.
If empty, default label (Address 1) is used.

DELIVERY ADDRESS 1 EDIT

Should the delivery address 1 be editable?

DELIVERY ADDRESS 2

Example: DELIVERY ADDRESS 2=Address 2
Set label for delivery address 2 in the order confirmation view.
If empty, default label (Address 2) is used.

DELIVERY ADDRESS 2 EDIT

Should the delivery address 2 be editable?

DELIVERY ADDRESS 3

Example: DELIVERY ADDRESS 3=Address 3
Set label for delivery address 3 in the order confirmation view.
If empty, default label (Address 3) is used.

DELIVERY ADDRESS 3 EDIT

Should the delivery address 3 be editable?

DELIVERY ADDRESS NAME

Example: DELIVERY ADDRESS NAME=Delivery address
Set label for delivery address name in the order confirmation view.
If empty, default label (Delivery address) is used.

DELIVERY ADDRESS NAME EDIT

Should the delivery address name be editable?

DELIVERY POST INFO

Example: DELIVERY POST INFO=Postal code
Set label for delivery post info in the order confirmation view.
If empty, default label (Postal code) is used.

DELIVERY POSTAL EDIT

Should the delivery post info (both postal code and description) be editable?

ENABLE METER LOGIN

Should automatic login be possible for meter reporting?

FINISH ORDER IN WEB

Should orders entered via Evatic Web automatically be completed orders?

HIDE DROPDOWN DATABASE

Should it be possible to select different database in the login screen.

HIDE DROPDOWN LANGUAGE

Should it be possible to select different languages in the login screen.

HIDE ORGANIZATION NO

Display/hide organization no with the logged in customer info.

HIDE SYMPTOM CODE 1

Should Symptom Code 1 be hidden?
If checked, Symptom code 2 and 3 will also be hidden.

HIDE SYMPTOM CODE 2

Should Symptom Code 2 be hidden?
If checked, Symptom code 3 will also be hidden.

HIDE SYMPTOM CODE 3

Should Symptom Code 3 be hidden?

HIDE SYMPTOM CODE 4

Should Symptom Code 4 be hidden?

INVOICE ADDRESS 1

Example: INVOICE ADDRESS 1=Address 1
Set label for invoice address 1 in the order confirmation view.
If empty, default label (Address 1) is used.

INVOICE ADDRESS 1 EDIT

Should the invoice address 1 be editable?

INVOICE ADDRESS 2

Example: INVOICE ADDRESS 2=Address 2
Set label for invoice address 2 in the order confirmation view.
If empty, default label (Address 2) is used.

INVOICE ADDRESS 2 EDIT

Should the invoice address 2 be editable?

INVOICE ADDRESS 3

Example: INVOICE ADDRESS 3=Address 3
Set label for invoice address 3 in the order confirmation view.
If empty, default label (Address 3) is used.

INVOICE ADDRESS 3 EDIT

Should the invoice address 3 be editable?

INVOICE ADDRESS NAME

Example: INVOICE ADDRESS NAME=Invoice address
Set label for invoice address name in the order confirmation view.
If empty, default label (Invoice address) is used.

INVOICE ADDRESS NAME EDIT

Should the invoice address name be editable?

INVOICE POST INFO

Example: INVOICE POST INFO=Postal code
Set label for invoice post info in the order confirmation view.
If empty, default label (Postal code) is used.

INVOICE POSTAL EDIT

Should the invoice post info (both postal code and description) be editable?

LOGIN LINK ON

Should a link info me visible in the login window?

LOGIN LINK URL

Example: LOGIN LINK URL = www.evatic.com
Set a default url for link (see LOGIN LINK ON)

MACHINE ADDRESS AS DEFAULT

If checked, then the checkbox 'Use machine address as default' will be set.

MACHINE GRID COLUMNS

Example: MACHINE GRID COLUMNS= MACHINE NO,MODEL TYPE,MODEL DESCRIPTION,LOCATION,
Possible to define the columns to be displayed under the machine tab, and in which order.
E.g:
INSTALLATION_DATE,DEPT,POSTAL_CODE,DESCRIPTION,CUSTOMER_NO, CUSTOMER_NAME,ADDRESS_NAME,ADDRESS_1,ADDRESS_2,ADDRESS_3,COUNTRY,ID_NO

MACHINE GRID COLUMNS SUMMARY

Example: MACHINE GRID COLUMNS SUMMARY= MACHINE NO,MODEL TYPE,MODEL DESCRIPTION,LOCATION,
Possible to define the columns to be displayed under the machine tab, and in which order.

MACHINE PROPERTIES

Example: MACHINE PROPERTIES = CODE1,CODE2,CODE3
Which Machine properties should be displayed?
Enter the property codes you want to display. Use comma as separator.
If the setting is empty, all properties will be displayed.

MACHINE SHOW PROPERTIES

Should the machine properties be displayed in the Machine list?
See also MACHINE PROPERTIES to select which properties to be displayed.

MAIL FROM ADDRESS

Example: MAIL FROM ADDRESS= support@evatic.com
Displays as the, from address when sending e-mail from ECW

MAIL FROM NAME

Example: MAIL FROM NAME= Support department
Displays as the, from name when sending e-mail from ECW

MAIL RECEIPT METER READING

Should an email be send when adding new meters in ECW?
Email recipients
If CONTACT EMAIL LOGIN not checked,
It is possible to choose a recipient of the email based on available customer contacts or you can also enter an email manually.
If CONTACT EMAIL LOGIN checked - then the logged in customer contact will be the email recipient

• not possible to choose a diff. recipient
• not possible to enter the email manually
• contact's email is displayed in the input field, but the input field is disabled

MAIL RECEIPT METER READING BODY
Example: MAIL RECEIPT METER READING BODY = New meter reading for machine <MODEL TYPE> <MACHINE NO>.
Reading date: <INVOICE_DATE><COUNTERS>
The message contents when Evatic sends e-mail with meter reading confirmation. (Can be set up different for each language, see examples below)
Email example:

MAIL RECEIPT METER READING BODY

Example: MAIL RECEIPT METER READING_BODY= New meter reading for machine &lt;MODEL TYPE&gt; &lt;MACHINE NO&gt;. Reading date: &lt;INVOICE_DATE&gt;&nbsp;&lt;COUNTERS&gt;<br />The message contents when Evatic sends e-mail with meter reading information. <br /><br />

MAIL RECEIPT METER READING SUBJECT

Example: MAIL RECEIPT METER READING SUBJECT = Web meter reading receipt for machine <MODEL TYPE> <MACHINE NO>. Date: <INVOICE_DATE>'
The message subject/title when Evatic sends e-mail with meter reading confirmation

MAIL RECEIPT ORDER

Should an email be send when adding new orders in ECW?
If checked, an e-mail with information about the order will be sent to the e-mail address registered in the order.

MAIL RECEIPT ORDER BODY

Example: MAIL RECEIPT ORDER BODY= <CUSTOMER_NO><CUSTOMER_NAME><ORDER NO> etc
The message contents when Evatic sends e-mail with order information. (Can be set up different for each language)
The email body must have these bookmarks:
<CUSTOMER_NO>
<CUSTOMER_NAME>
<ORDER_LINE>
The order line must be built from the following fields:
ARTICLE NO, DESCRIPTION, QTY
<ORDER_LINE_MACHINE>
The order line, with machine info, must be built from the following fields:
ARTICLE NO, DESCRIPTION, MACHINE NO, MODEL TYPE, QTY
<YOUR REFERENCE>
<DELIVERY_ADDRESS>
The delivery address must contain the following fields (if they have a value):
DELIVERY_NAME
DELIVERY_ADDRESS1
DELIVERY_ADDRESS2
DELIVERY_ADDRESS3
DELIVERY_POSTALCODE
DELIVERY_POSTLOCATION
<INVOICE_ADDRESS>
The invoice address must contain the following fields (if they have a value):
INVOICE_NAME
INVOICE_ADDRESS1
INVOICE_ADDRESS2
INVOICE_ADDRESS2
INVOICE_POSTALCODE
INVOICE_POSTLOCATION
Example:
ORDER:27673
CUSTOMER:Holger Bilservice AS
ORDER_LINE:
Article no Description Qty
0101B Toner 5
Support for different languages:
ECW supports different languages based on language/resource files. The resource files have names/codes based on the language/country, for example, nb-NO=Norway, nl-NL=Netherlands, da-DK=Denmark and so on. (For a complete list of language/country codes, read the document 'Language Culture Name.docx')
If different languages are needed for the mail subject/body, the settings can be set up with the language/country code as post fix. If Danish is selected as the language, ECW will first look for the setting with
da-DK as the post fix:
MAIL RECEIPT ORDER SUBJECT da-DK
MAIL RECEIPT ORDER BODY da-DK
For US English:
MAIL RECEIPT ORDER_SUBJECT_en-US
MAIL RECEIPT ORDER_BODY en-US
If not found, use the default settings:
MAIL RECEIPT ORDER SUBJECT
MAIL RECEIPT ORDER BODY

MAIL RECEIPT ORDER SUBJECT

Example: MAIL RECEIPT ORDER SUBJECT= Web order receipt <ORDER NO>. Date: <INVOICE_DATE>
The message subject/title when Evatic sends e-mail with order information.

MAIL RECEIPT PROJECT

Should an email be send when adding new projects in ECW?
If checked, an e-mail with information about the new project will be sent to the e-mail address registered in the project.
The content of this e-mail is defined by the settings below.

MAIL RECEIPT PROJECT BODY

Example: MAIL RECEIPT PROJECT BODY= <CUSTOMER_NO><CUSTOMER_NAME><PROJECT NO> etc
The message contents when Evatic sends e-mail with project information.
The following bookmarks are available:
<PROJECT NO>
<TASK NO>
<CUSTOMER_NO>
<CUSTOMER_NAME>
<SYMPTOM_CODE_1>
<SYMPTOM_CODE_2>
<SYMPTOM_CODE_3>
<SYMPTOM_TEXT>
<MACHINE NO>
<MODEL TYPE>
<CONTACT>
<PHONE_NO>
Example:
Dear <CONTACT>
This is a confirmation for <PROJECT NO> and task no <TASK NO>
Project description: <SYMPTOM_TEXT>
We will respond to you as soon as possible.
Support for different languages:
ECW supports different languages based on language/resource files. The resource files have names/codes based on the language/country, for example, nb-NO=Norway, nl-NL=Netherlands, da-DK=Denmark and so on. (For a complete list of language/country codes, read the document 'Language Culture Name.docx')
If different languages are needed for the mail subject/body, the settings can be set up with the language/country code as post fix. If Danish is selected as the language, ECW will first look for the setting with
da-DK as the post fix:
MAIL RECEIPT PROJECT SUBJECT da-DK
MAIL RECEIPT PROJECT BODY da-DK
For US English:
MAIL RECEIPT PROJECT SUBJECT en-US
MAIL RECEIPT PROJECT BODY en-US
If not found, use the default settings:
MAIL RECEIPT PROJECT SUBJECT
MAIL RECEIPT PROJECT BODY

MAIL RECEIPT PROJECT SUBJECT

Example: MAIL RECEIPT PROJECT SUBJECT= Web receipt project: <PROJECT NO>
The message subject/title when Evatic sends e-mail with project information. (Can be set up different for each language)
The following bookmarks are available:
<PROJECT NO>
<TASK NO>
<RECEIVED_DATE>

MAIL RECEIPT SUPPORT

Example: MAIL RECEIPT SUPPORT= support@evatic.com
When sending an e-mail from HelpDesk task to a customer, you can set up this address to receive a copy of all Helpdesk task that are sent.

MAIL RECEIPT SUPPORT BODY

Example: MAIL RECEIPT SUPPORT BODY= Dear customer.....
Body text when sending an e-mail from HelpDesk task to a customer. Different bookmarks can be used.

MAIL RECEIPT SUPPORT SUBJECT

Example: MAIL RECEIPT SUPPORT SUBJECT= Regarding Helpdesk....
Subject when sending an e-mail from HelpDesk task to a customer.

MAIL TO CC

Example: MAIL TO CC = support@evatic.com
When sending an e-mail from web, you can set up this address to receive a copy.

MANAGE ACCESS CONTACT

Should the ECW user be able to control contact access to Contact functionalities?

MANAGE ACCESS HELPDESK

Should the ECW user control contact access to Helpdesk functionalities?

MANAGE ACCESS HELPDESK LOG

Should the ECW user be able to control contact access to Helpdesk Log functionalities?

MANAGE ACCESS MACHINE

Should the ECW user be able to control contact access to Machine functionalities?

MANAGE ACCESS METER REPORTING

Should the ECW user be able to control contact access to Meter Reporting functionalities?

MANAGE ACCESS ORDER

Should the ECW user be able to control contact access to Order functionalities?

MANAGE ACCESS ORDER LOG

Should the ECW user be able to control contact access to Order Log functionalities?

MANAGE ACCESS PROJECT

Should the ECW user be able to control contact access to Project functionalities?

MANAGE ACCESS PROJECT LOG

Should the ECW user be able to control contact access to Project Log functionalities?

MANDATORY ALL METERS

Should it be mandatory to enter all meters when reporting meters?

MANDATORY CONTACT EMAIL

Should it be mandatory to enter contact email in order to finish a project task?

MANDATORY CONTACT NAME

Should it be mandatory to enter contact name in order to finish a project task?

MANDATORY CONTACT PHONE NO

Should it be mandatory to enter contact phone number in order to finish a project task?

MANDATORY MACHINE

Should it be mandatory to select a machine in order to finish a project task?

MANDATORY MACHINE CONTACT

Should it be mandatory to enter contact in order to enter a new machine?

MANDATORY MACHINE LOCATION

Should it be mandatory to enter location in order to enter a new machine?

MANDATORY MACHINE SORTGROUP 1

Should it be mandatory to enter sort group 1 (..5) in order to enter a new machine?

MANDATORY MACHINE SORTGROUP 2

Should it be mandatory to enter sort group 1 (..5) in order to enter a new machine?

MANDATORY MACHINE SORTGROUP 3

Should it be mandatory to enter sort group 1 (..5) in order to enter a new machine?

MANDATORY MACHINE SORTGROUP 4

Should it be mandatory to enter sort group 1 (..5) in order to enter a new machine?

MANDATORY MACHINE SORTGROUP 5

Should it be mandatory to enter sort group 1 (..5) in order to enter a new machine?

MANDATORY ORDER EMAIL

Should it be mandatory to enter email in order to finish an order?

MANDATORY ORDER REFERENCE

Should it be mandatory to enter reference person in order to finish an order?

MANDATORY SC 1

Should it be mandatory to enter a symptom code 1 in order to finish a project task?

MANDATORY SC 2

Should it be mandatory to enter a symptom code 2 in order to finish a project task?

MANDATORY SC 3

Should it be mandatory to enter a symptom code 3 in order to finish a project task?

MANDATORY SC 4

Should it be mandatory to enter a symptom code 4 in order to finish a project task?

MANDATORY SYMPTOM TEXT

Should it be mandatory to enter a symptom text in order to finish a project task?

MANDATORY TASK TITLE

Should it be mandatory to enter a task title in order to finish a project task?
See also COMPANY_XXX \ PROJECT \ SHOW TASK TITLE and COMPANY XXX \ SUPPORT\ SHOW TASK TITLE

METER READING DATE READ ONLY

Should 'New date' in Meter reading be read-only?

METER READING DAYS BETWEEN

Example: METER READING DAYS BETWEEN= 10
If the value is 10, the user will be forced to report a new meter reading when there are10 days since the last meter reading reported for the machine. If you place a new order or a new project within the next 10 days, it will not be mandatory to enter a new meter reading.

This setting is only valid when METER REPORTING CHECK= 1 (or 2) or METER REPORTING PROJECT CHECK = 1 (or 2).

METER REPORTING CHECK

Example: METER REPORTING CHECK= 0
Should it be mandatory to enter a meter reading before creating a new order? 1 = yes, 0 = no.
Should it be mandatory to enter a meter reading only if there is an open meter reading for this machine? 2 = yes
If 1, the meters are added as service meters. If 2, the meters are added as contract meters
Note! The pop up window is also depending on the setting METER READING DAYS BETWEEN

METER REPORTING PROJECT CHECK

Example: METER REPORTING PROJECT CHECK= 0
Should it be mandatory to enter a meter reading before creating a new project? 1 = yes, 0 = no.
Should it be mandatory to enter a meter reading only if there is an open meter reading for this machine? 2 = yes
If 1, the meters are added as service meters. If 2, the meters are added as contract meters
Note! The pop up window is also depending on the setting METER READING DAYS BETWEEN

METER REPORTING USE LETTER DATE

Should current date be used when entering new meter readings. If checked system will use meter next letter date.

MODEL LIMITATION DAYS

Example: MODEL LIMITATION DAYS = 14
To be used with setting USE ORDER MODEL LIMITATION checked
This setting limits how many days must pass before the customer can order the same amount of articles again.

NEW PWD BCC

Example: NEW PWD BCC = admin@evatic.com
Enter the email address for blind copy (BBC) of the users new passwords

NEW PWD BODY

Example: NEW PWD BODY= <CUSTOMER NAME><CONTACT_NAME><PASSWORD>
The email text when receiving an email with a new password. (Can be set up different for each language)
Example:
Evatic AS Petter Smith vzogv8Ag7

NEW PWD CC

Example: NEW PWD CC = service@evatic.com
Enter the email address for copy (CC) of the users new passwords

NEW PWD FROM EMAIL

Example: NEW PWD FROM EMAIL= support@evatic.com
Displays as the, from address when sending e-mail with new password.

NEW PWD SUBJECT

Example: NEW PWD SUBJECT= New password for ECW
Displays as the, subject/title when sending e-mail with new password.(Can be set up different for each language)

ON CONTRACT ORDER

Create order window, if checked, display only machines on contract.

ON CONTRACT SERVICE

Create service/helpdesk, if checked, display only machines on contract.

ORDER MAX QTY INCL ONLY

If you set this setting to No, then the order max quantity will be set for all articles in a contract.
If you set this to Yes, then the order max quantity will be set for included articles in a contract.

ORDER MAXT QTY

Example: ORDER MAX QTY = 10
Setting to decide the max qty the user can order.

ORDER TYPE

Example: ORDER TYPE= Web
Setting to decide which order type should be used as default for orders coming from ECW.

OUR REFERENCE

Example: OUR REFERENCE= Admin
Default our reference on order header.

PASSWORD CRYPT STRING

Here you can enter a keyword that is to be used to generate the Evatic Web passwords. The passwords will be the same length as the keyword.

PERCENT INCREASE

Example: PERCENT INCREASE= 10
This is a check for the meter you enter in ECW. The Value should not be higher than expected % increase based on previous readings

PROJECT LOG DETAILS COLUMNS

Decide what fields are visible when opening a Project's detail view in ECW (Service > Log > double click on existing project). Fields are separated by commas. 
Example: PROJECT_NO,TASK_NO, CUSTOMER_NAME,CONTACT,MACHINE_NO, RECEIVED_DATE,TECHNICIAN,STATUS,TASK_TITLE, SYMPTOM_CODE_1,SYMPTOM_CODE_2,SYMPTOM_CODE_3,SYMPTOM_TEXT, ACTION_CODE_1,ACTION_CODE_2,ACTION_CODE_3,ACTION_TEXT

PROJECT LOG MIN DATES

Example: PROJECT LOG MIN DATE = 01.01.2014
Possible to define a minimum date for the service log.

PW LENGTH

Example: PW LENGTH= 5
What should be the length of the password when login into ECW.
If the length is less than the number of different required signs (casing and numbers) then auto generated passwords will have length equal to the number of different required signs.

PW USE LOWER CASE

If checked, new password should contain one lower case letter at least (e.g. a)

PW USE NUMBERS

If checked, new password should be containing one number at least.

PW USE UPPER CASE

If checked, new password should contain one upper case letter at least (e.g. A)

SERVICE AUTO EXPAND

Should the expandable sections be expanded by default in the New-tab under Service?

SERVICE DETAILS HISTORY

Example: SERVICE DETAILS HISTORY = PROJECT NO|Project number,TASK NO|Task number
Which columns to be displayed in project history, details?
These are the fields you can use:
PROJECT NO - Project number
TASK NO - Task number
RECEIVED_DATE - Recevied date
RECEIVED_BY- user who registered project
RESPONSE_DATE - Contract response date
SYMPTOM_CODE_1 - Symptom codes
SYMPTOM_CODE_2
SYMPTOM_CODE_3
SYMPTOM_TEXT - Symptom text
ACTION_CODE_1 Action codes
ACTION_CODE_2
ACTION_CODE_3
ACTION_TEXT - Action text
RESPONSE_TIME - Response time
MACHINE NO - Machine number
INSTALLATION_DATE - Installation date (machine)
INFORMATION - Information field from machine
LOCATION - Machine location
MODEL TYPE - Model type
MODEL_DESCRIPTION - Model description

SERVICE LOG HIDE RESP DATE

Should the response date be visible in the service log?

SERVICE UPDATE MACH ADDRESS

Should it be possible to update the machine address when entering a project task?

SHOW DISCOUNT

Should the field discount be displayed?

SHOW MACHINE FILTER

Should the filter fields and overview grid be displayed in the Machine-tab?

SHOW MACHINE INFORMATION

Should the field for Information be visible in the Machine details view?

SHOW MACHINE SORTGROUP 1

Should he field sortgroup 1 be displayed when entering a new machine?

SHOW MACHINE SORTGROUP 2

Should he field sortgroup 2 be displayed when entering a new machine?

SHOW MACHINE SORTGROUP 3

Should he field sortgroup 3 be displayed when entering a new machine?

SHOW MACHINE SORTGROUP 4

Should he field sortgroup 4 be displayed when entering a new machine?

SHOW MACHINE SORTGROUP 5

Should he field sortgroup 5 be displayed when entering a new machine?

SHOW MENU DOCUMENT

Should the users have access to the option documents in the menu?

SHOW MENU PROJECT

Should the users have access to the option Service in the menu?

SHOW MENU SUPPORT

Should the users have access to the option Helpdesk in the menu?

SHOW ORDER INFO

Should the fields order info be displayed?

SHOW PROJECT LOG

Should the users have access to the log-tab under Service?

SHOW PROPERTIES

Should the fields customer and machine properties be displayed (see Project)?

SHOW SALES PRICE

Should the fields sales price be displayed?

SHOW SALES VAT

Should the fields VAT be displayed?

SHOW SUPPORT LOG

Should the users have access to the log-tab under Helpdesk?

SUPPORT AUTO EXPAND

Should the expandable sections be expanded by default in the New-tab under Helpdesk?

SUPPORT DETAILS HISTORY

Which columns to be displayed in HelpDesk history, details.

SUPPORT LOG COLUMNS

Which columns to be displayed in HelpDesk log, details. E.g:. END WORKED DATE,RECEIVED DATE,OBJ DATE|Last update,PROJECT NO,TASK NO,CUSTOMER NAME,MACHINE NO,MODEL TYPE,SYMPTOM CODE 2,SYMPTOM CODE 3,SYMPTOM CODE 4,SYMPTOM TEXT,ACTION CODE 1, ACTION CODE 2,ACTION CODE 3,ACTION TEXT,STATUS, END WORKED DATE

SUPPORT LOG DETAILS COLUMNS

Example:SUPPORT LOG DETAILS COLUMNS=RECEIVED_DATE,CUSTOMER_NAME
Columns that should be displayed when using the HelpDesk log.
The following bookmarks can be used:
RECEIVED_DATE,
PROJECT NO,
TASK NO,
CUSTOMER_NAME,
MACHINE NO,
MODEL TYPE,
SYMPTOM_CODE_1,
SYMPTOM_CODE_2,
SYMPTOM_CODE_3,
SYMPTOM_TEXT,
ACTION_CODE_1,
ACTION_CODE_2,
ACTION_CODE_3,
ACTION_TEXT,
STATUS,
ID_NO
DATE_RESPONSE,
END_WORKED_DATE

SUPPORT LOG MIN DATES

Example: SUPPORT LOG MIN DATE = 01.01.2014
Possible to define a minimum date for the Helpdesk log.

SYMTOM CODE 1 CUSTOMER SG

Should it be possible to set a customer sort group as default symptom code 1 on a project?
To define which sort group to use, see ACCESS SORTGROUP NO

TASK TITLE CAPTION

Example: TASK TITLE CAPTION = Task title service:
What should be the name on the task title field. (Can be set up different for each language)

TONER ORDER CODES

Example: TONER ORDER CODES= SC1,SC2
Add symptom codes to indicate that a project is created to place a toner order. When a symptom code is added here, a message will be displayed in the New Project view to remind the user to describe the color and quantity of ordered toners.

UPLOAD MAX SIZE

Example: UPLOAD MAX SIZE = 1024
Limits the maximum file size of the file that will be uploaded in Kb.

USE DEFAULT TASK NODE

Here you can select if the standard task folder is to be used for incoming tasks from Evatic Web.

USE FROM SYMPTOM1

Select which symptoms the users of Evatic Web can enter as an error description. If you want to enter several symptoms, they should be separated using ';' semi colon. E.g. A;B;D, in this case 3 symptoms (A, B and D). Here it is the code for symptom from Evatic Service that is to be entered.

USE FROM SYMPTOM2

Example: USE FROM SYMPTOM2= BC;PS;PM
Which symptom codes 2 should be used in ECW for Projects.
If not checked, the field for symptom codes 2 will be hidden

USE FROM SYMPTOM3

Example: USE FROM SYMPTOM3 = BC;PS;PM
Which symptom codes 3 should be used in ECW for Projects.
If not checked, the field for symptom codes 3 will be hidden

USE FROM SYMPTOMH1

Example: USE FROM SYMPTOMH1 = Remote, Phone,Email
Which symptom codes 1..3 should be used in ECW for HelpDesk.
If checked, the field for symptom codes 1..3 will be hidden

USE FROM SYMPTOMH2

Example: USE FROM SYMPTOMH2 = Remote, Phone,Email
Which symptom codes 1..3 should be used in ECW for HelpDesk.
If checked, the field for symptom codes 1..3 will be hidden

USE FROM SYMPTOMH3

Example: USE FROM SYMPTOMH3 = Remote, Phone,Email
Which symptom codes 1..3 should be used in ECW for HelpDesk.
If checked, the field for symptom codes 1..3 will be hidden

USE LINKED CUSTOMER ORDER

Should it be possible to select linked customer from a drop-down list when adding new orders.

These are customer marked as 'Main office customer 'in Evatic Service.

USE LINKED CUSTOMER PROJECT

Should it be possible to select linked customer from a drop-down list when adding new projects.

These are customer marked as 'Main office customer 'in Evatic Service.

USE MACHINE

Should it be possible to select machine when adding new projects.

USE MACHINE ADDRESS AS DELIVERY

If checked, then use the machine address as default delivery address on order header.

USE ORDER MODEL LIMITATION

Setting to enable/disable check for qty. The customer can order only as many consumables as there are models of the same type on the contract for a limited number of days.

Example: A contract has 10 machines, 5 of them of model OKI 123, and 5 of OKI 555. The customer wants to order Black toner for Serial SN123 which has model
OKI123.He can only order up to 5 toners for this machine, because there are 5 of the same model on the contract, but after X number of days, he can order 5
more. (See setting MODEL LIMITATION DAYS)

This setting is only valid when CONTRACT NO LOGIN is checked and CONTRACT MACHINES is checked

USE PASSWORD ENCRYPT

Setting to decide if the password should be encrypt when loging on.

EXTERNAL

NEW MACHINE CUSTOMER NO

Example: NEW MACHINE CUSTOMER NO = 1234
The customer no to add new machines to for some special connections to accounting systems.

NEW MACHINE NODE

Example: NEW MACHINE NODE = 1 All 2 New Machine
If your accounting system automatically adds a project in Evatic when a new machine is created, this setting tells which node in the task tree the new project should be added to.

SYSTEM

Example: SYSTEM = ABC
The name of the accounting system that Evatic is integrated to. Only used for some special connections.

USE IN SALES CALC

Can only be used if EXTERNAL \ SYSTEM = XML
Should prices be updated from external system when the user choose article or change qty on order lines in sales calc.

XML

To enable the external web service interface

XML ARTICLE INFO HTTP

The url to the web service

XML DEF STOCK NO

Can be used in the URL to set a default stock

XML ITEM COST PRICE

The xml tag for the article costprice

XML ITEM DEL DATE

The xml tag for the delivery date

XML ITEM NODE

The xml tag for the article number

XML ITEM PRICE

The xml tag for the article price

XML ITEM QTY

The xml tag for the stock qty

XML PASSWORD

Example: XML PASSWORD = 1234
The Password for web service access

XML QTY PERIOD AS DECIMAL SEP

If checked the quantity in the url will be changed to use period decimal seperator if comma is the local decimal seperator.

XML STATUS NODE

The xml tag for the return status from web service

XML STATUS OK

The return value for success

XML USERNAME

Example: XML USERNAME = evatic
The Username for web service access
Examples:
XML STATUS NODE=MSG
XML STATUS OK=ok
XML ITEM NODE=ITEM
XML ITEM PRICE=PRICE CURRENCY
XML ITEM QTY=QTY
XML ITEM DEL DATE=DELDATE
Here the columns name can be added, and they will then be hidden, if setting: COMPANY XXX -> Evatic Service -> ENABLE GRID COLUMNS HIDE is set to 1.
Note! This setting GRID COLUMNS HIDE is first activated when you open Evatic Service and opens the different windows (customer, machine, projects etc). The setting ENABLE GRID COLUMNS HIDE must first be set to 1.
E.g. if the columns 'resource' and 'color' (English language) in the project summary should be hidden, go to the setting -> COMPANY XXX -> GRID COLUMNS HIDE ->PROJECT SUMMARY SUMMARY TASK and enter Resource#Color
Note! this is ONLY for layouts that have been saved.

INCLUDED ARTICLES

INFO AS ORDER LINE

On the packing slip it's possible to print information about included articles from the contract. Check this to print text lines with article information from the included articles.

INVOICE INTEREST

ARTICLE NAME

These settings remember the previous selection in Evatic->Customer->Account

ARTICLE NO

These settings remember the previous selection in Evatic->Customer->Account

ARTICLE OBJ NO

These settings remember the previous selection in Evatic->Customer->Account

DUE DATE

These settings remember the previous selection in Evatic->Customer->Account

INTEREST RATE

These settings remember the previous selection in Evatic->Customer->Account

MIN AMOUNT

These settings remember the previous selection in Evatic->Customer->Account

MIN NUM OF DAYS

These settings remember the previous selection in Evatic->Customer->Account

ORDER TYPE

These settings remember the previous selection in Evatic->Customer->Account

INVOICE MAIL

BODY

Example: BODY = Dear customer, attached you will see a new invoice from..........
Setting for invoices send by mail. When a default body text in the emails is desired, it can be entered here. Note! No bookmarks are available.

FILE NAME

Example: FILE NAME = Invoice
Name on the file followed automatically be the invoice number. E.g. Invoice_2562

FROM ADDRESS

Example: FROM ADDRESS = invoice@evatic.com
Displays as the, from address when sending e-mail from the order screen

FROM NAME

Example: FROM MANE = Administrasjon
Displayed as the sender name when sending e-mail to a customer

RECEIPT ADDRESS

Example: RECEIPT ADDRESS = invoice@evatic.com
When sending an invoice to a customer via e-mail from Evatic, you can set up this address to receive a copy of all invoices that are sent.

SUBJECT

Example: SUBJECT = Invoice
Displays as the subject when sending e-mail from Evatic to a customer. This text will be followed by a invoice number.

INVOICE REMINDER

DUE DATE

These settings remember the previous selection in Evatic->Customer->Account

MAX REMINDERS

These settings remember the previous selection in Evatic->Customer->Account

REMINDER FEE

These settings remember the previous selection in Evatic->Customer->Account

REMINDER TEXT 0

These settings remember the previous selection in Evatic->Customer->Account

REMINDER TEXT 1

These settings remember the previous selection in Evatic->Customer->Account

REMINDER TEXT 2

These settings remember the previous selection in Evatic->Customer->Account

REMINDER TEXT 3

These settings remember the previous selection in Evatic->Customer->Account

MACHINE

ADR CHANGE ON

Should it be possible to change address directly from the machine dialog screen?

ADR NEW ON NEW MACHINE ON

Should it be possible to add a new address directly from the machine dialog screen when entering a new machine?

AUTO ADD NAME DATE IN INFO FIELD

Should Evatic automatically add (name, date and time) in the machine info field when entering information.

The same as CTRL + N.

AUTO ID NUMBER NEXT

Example: AUTO ID NUMBER NEXT = 12
The next machine id number if AUTO ID NUMBER ON is checked.

AUTO ID NUMBER ON

Should Evatic automatically generate machine id numbers?

AUTO NUMBER NEXT

Example: AUTO NUMBER NEXT = 12345
The next machine number if AUTO NUMBER ON is checked.

AUTO NUMBER ON

Should Evatic automatically generate machine numbers?

AUTO NUMBER PREFIX

Example: AUTO NUMBER PREFIX = NL
You can enter a fixed prefix which will be added in front of the machine number.

DEF INSTALLATION TREE LEVELS

Example: DEF INSTALLATION TREE LEVELS = 2
Here you can define the level you want to use as default when opening the installation tree. 0 = all levels, 1 = first level, 2 = second level etc.

DEFAULT CUSTOMER WARRANTY YEARS

Example: DEFAULT CUSTOMER WARRANTY YEARS = 2
Standard customer warranty date when creating a new machine. This value will be automatically added when creating a new machine.
E.g. when entering 2 (years), the date will be 2 years after the installation date.
Installation date = 01.01.2008, customer warranty date = 01.01.2010.

ID NUMBER ON

Should machine ID numbers be used?

INSTALLATION ICON TYPE

Example: INSTALLATION ICON TYPE= 2
You can have different icons in the installation tree. There are 3 different types:
0 = Default
1 = IT
2 = Building/Construction

INSTALLATION LAST LEVEL TYPE ON

You can set up that the last level in the installation tree should have a extra level including the model type.

INSTALLATION NODE FORMAT

Example: INSTALLATION NODE FORMAT= '<MACHINE NO> ( <MODEL TYPE> )'
You can have different format (name and order) on the levels in the tree structure.
The following bookmarks can be used:
<MACHINE NO>
<MODEL TYPE>
<LOCATION>
E.g.: Model: <MODEL TYPE>, Location: <LOCATION>, SN:: <MACHINE NO> = 'Model: Mod550, Location: 1. Floor, SN: 1234'.
Deafult: <MACHINE NO> (<MODEL TYPE>) = '1234 (Mod550)'

INSTALLATION SHOW ACC

Should machine accessories be shown in the installation tree or not?

MACHINE INSTALLATION FOLDERS ON

If not checked, then the following will happen:
- not possible to create installation folder on the customer card.
- Checkbox 'Hide installation folders' on the customer card/Installation tab will not be visible.
- Not possible to link a machine to an installation from the machine card, only customer card

MACHINE RELATION TOP LEVEL ON

Should the check box "Top level machine' (see Machine and Customer/ Advanced/Installation tab) be visible or not?

MACHINE RELATIONS ON

Should it be possible to add machine relations in Evatic or not?
If checked: Machines can be added as top level machines under Machine. Under Customer/Advanced/Installation tab customer machines can be linked to the top level machines.
Note! This setting has no effect in Evatic Mobile, the Installation buttons are always visible.

RESOURCE AREA LIMITATION DEF ON

Should it automatically be area limitation for responsible technicians or not?

SEARCH NAME ADDRESS2 ON

Should this field be shown or not? Is to be found in the drop-down lists for customer address (see External machine, sales calc. and contract template).

SEARCH NAME POSTLOCATION ON

Should this field be shown or not? Is to be found in the drop-down lists for customer address (see External machine, sales calc. and contract template).

SHOW ACCESSORIES

Should the <Accessories> tab be displayed within the Machine dialog in Evatic?

SHOW BUSINESS HOURS

Should the <Business hours> tab be displayed within the Machine dialog in Evatic?

SHOW CONTRACTS

Should the <Contracts> tab be displayed within the Machine dialog in Evatic?

SHOW DEL ADR LINK

Should the delivery address button be displayed within the Machine dialog in Evatic?

SHOW DOCUMENTS

Should the <Documents> tab be displayed within the Machine dialog in Evatic?

SHOW FINANCIAL

Should financial tab be displayed within the Machine dialog in Evatic?

SHOW FOLLOW UP

Should the <Follow up> tab be displayed within the Machine dialog in Evatic?

SHOW INSTALLATIONS

Should the <Installations> tab be displayed within the Machine dialog in Evatic?

SHOW INV ADR LINK

Should customer invoice address button be shown on the machine card?
On the machine a new button will be added called 'Invoice address'. Here you can choose from existing customer invoice addresses.

SHOW INVOICES

Should the <Invoices> tab be displayed within the Machine dialog in Evatic?

MAIL

CHANGE MAIL ADDRESS

Example: CHANGE MAIL ADDRESS = 1
Should it be possible to change the from address in the email window in Evatic.
0 = not allowed
1 = Allow to change between the default setting and the users email address (default valuen. See Evatic Service/My Evatic/User settings) - When the setting is 1 the user will have a new button behind the from address to switch between the two addresses.
2 = Open (mail address can be changed manually)

This setting is valid from all places where the Evatic email window is opened

ESERV MAIL SETTINGS

If checked, then the Evatic Server settings for email must be defined in the following settings:
COMPANY->MAIL->SERVER_ESERV
COMPANY->MAIL->SMTP LOGIN_ESERV
COMPANY->MAIL->SMTP PASSWORD_ESERV
COMPANY->MAIL->MAIL CHARSET_ESERV
COMPANY->MAIL->SERVER PORT_ESERV
COMPANY->MAIL->SMTP USE SSL_ESERV

FROM ADDRESS

Example: FROM ADDRESS = support@evatic.com
Displays as the, from address when sending e-mail from: meter reading letters if the setting LETTER_FROM_ADDRESS not is used, Activity reminder, Email button in the toolbar from the project window

See also LOCAL TASK MAIL INTEGRATION (For activity reminder)

GREETING

Example: GREETING = Evatic AS
Greeting on general mails to customers from the customer window in Evatic.

MAIL CHARSET

Example: MAIL CHARSET = (blank)
Possibility to use this setting (Character set) on mails from Evatic. This should only be used when the mail send from Evatic is not interpreted correctly. The mail component detect which language is installed on the Client and uses this charset if this setting is blank.

READING LETTER ALT BODY

Setting for meter reading letters send by mail. When the default body text in the emails is not desired, it can be replaced by the following settings. NB! The machine body text is an own setting, and needs to be used as a replacement-code in this setting.

Code	Description
<MACHINE_BODY>	The machine and meter information
<MACHINE LOCATION>	Machine location
<MACHINE_FAX>	Machine fax number
<HEADING>	Heading information, from Settings
<TEXT1>	Text1 information, from Settings
<TEXT2>	Text2 information, from Settings
<TEXT3>	Text3 information, from Settings
<ADDITIONAL>	Additional text information, from Settings
<GREETING>	Greeting information, from Settings
<CONTACT>	Contact name (see volume row)
<CONTRACT_NO>	Contract number
<CUSTOMER_NAME>	Customer name
<CUSTOMER_NO>	Customer number
<CUSTOMER_FAX>	Customer fax
<CUSTOMER_ID>	ID on generated meter reading letters (see Contract/ Meter reporting) Note! This ID will be saved when you send the letter/email. It appears first on the email when you send the letter as a reminder (again).
<OUR REFERENCE>	Our reference
<EMAIL_ADDRESS>	Email address used
<SENT_BY>	Send by info
<POSTAL_CODE>	Postal code
<POST_DESC>	Post description
<INVOICE_CUSTOMER_NAME>	Customer name for the invoice address
<INVOICE_CONTACT>	Contact name for the invoice address
<INVOICE ADDRESS 1>	Address 1 for the invoice address
<INVOICE ADDRESS 2>	Address 2 for the invoice address
<INVOICE_POSTAL_CODE>	Postal code for the invoice address
<INVOICE_POST_DESC>	Post description for the invoice address
<INVOICE_FAX>	Fax number for the invoice address
<ECW_TOKEN>	Key to add after your Evatic Customer Web Url, letting the user directly report the meter reading letter

READING LETTER ALT MACHINE BODY

This setting decides what information is used on the machine part of the mail.

Code	Description
<MACHINE NO>	Machine number
<LOCATION>	Machine location
<MODEL TYPE>	Model type
<MODEL_DESC>	Model Description
<MACHINE_CUSTOMER_NO>	Customer number
<MACHINE_CUSTOMER_NAME>	Customer name
<MACHINE_CUSTOMER_NAME_2>	Customer name 2
<MACHINE_CUSTOMER_NAME_3>	Customer name 3
<MACHINE_CUSTOMER_NAME_4>	Customer name 4
<MACHINE_ADDRESS_1>	Machine address 1
<MACHINE_ADDRESS_2>	Machine address 2
<MACHINE_ADDRESS_3>	Machine address 3
<MACHINE_POSTAL_CODE>	Machine postal code
<MACHINE_POST_LOCATION>	Machine postal description
<MACHINE_FAX_NO>	Machine fax number

READING LETTER ALT METER BODY

This setting decides what information is used on the meter part of the mail. The meter information is always placed at the end of machine body.

Code	Description
<METER_TYPE>	Meter type
<LAST_READING_DATE>	Last reading date
<LAST_READING>	Last reading
<METER_DESC>	Meter description
<METER_INVOICED_TO>	Meter invoiced to
< METER_VOLUME>	Meter volume

Example:

Setting	Text
READING LETTER ALT BODY	This is a meter reading letter. ------------------------------------------------------ Contract no: <CONTRACT_NO> <MACHINE_BODY> Dear <CUSTOMER_NAME>, please send meter information back to us by mail or fax.
READING LETTER ALT MACHINE BODY	Machine no: <MACHINE NO> Location: <LOCATION> Model: <MODEL_DESC> -------------------------------------
READING LETTER ALT METER BODY	<METER_TYPE> <LAST_READING_DATE> <LAST_READING>

For an email with 2 machines, this would be the body text: This is a meter reading letter. -------------------------------------------------------------- Contract no: XXX-XX Machine no: 1 Location: 1.floor Model: MODEL X -------------------------------------------------------------- Meter Date Last reading Current reading -------------------------------------------------------------- AX3 T 23.07.2003 40005 Machine no: 2 Location: 2.floor Model: MODEL Y -------------------------------------------------------------- Meter Date Last reading Current reading -------------------------------------------------------------- AX3 T 23.07.2003 40005 SH 23.07.2003 60080 Dear CUSTOMER INC., please send meter information back to us by mail or fax.

NOTE! The settings READING LETTER ALT MACHINE BODY and
READING LETTER ALT METER BODY must be added to the setting READING LETTER ALT BODY otherwise the text will not show.
The from name on emails send as meter readings, e.g. Evatic AS (support@evatic.com) is taken from the company name.

READING LETTER ALT SUBJECT

Setting for meter reading letters send by mail. When the default subject in the emails is not desired, it can be replaced by the following 3 replacement codes:

Code	Description
<DATE_LONG_FORMAT>	Long format of the date where the letter was created
<DATE_SHORT_FORMAT>	Short format of the date where the letter was created
<CONTRACT_NO>	Contract number for the letter

READING LETTER ATTACHED

Do you want to add the meter reading letter as a file attached to the email on meter reading letters? (see also COMPANY XXX \ MAIL SPECIAL ADDRESS METER READING SPECIAL ADDRESS). Set this setting to 1 to be able to attach the meter reading letter as a file.

READING LETTER ATTACHED FILENAME

Filename on meter reading letters attached as a file on meter reading letters. Example:
Meter reading letter #CUSTOMER_NAME# #YYYY-MM-DD
Available bookmarks:
#CUSTOMER_NAME#
#CUSTOMER_NO#
#CONTRACT_NO#
#DD# (bookmarks that include DD will be replaced with the date in the local dateformat)

READING LETTER ATTACHED FILETYPE

File type on meter reading letters attached as a file on meter reading letters. Normally this should be set to PDF.

RECEIPT ADDRESS

Example: RECEIPT ADDRESS = support@evatic.com
When sending a project to a resource from the toolbar/customer and meter reading letter to a customer via e-mail, you can set up this address to receive a copy of all projects that are sent.

SAVE MAIL OUT

Should Evatic save mail send from the project module, and customer module for the one not using outlook.
The mail is stored under the Project module/Events tab and Customer module/Events tab.

SERVER

Example: SERVER = smtp@xx.com
The Mail server that Evatic uses to send e-mail.

SERVER PORT

Example: SERVER PORT = 25
If the SMTP-server requires a SMTP port, use this setting. Default value is 25.

SMTP LOGIN

If the SMTP-server requires authentication, use this setting. If not, leave it blank.

SMTP PASSWORD

If the SMTP-server requires authentication, use this setting. If not, leave it blank.

SMTP USE SSL

Example: SMTP USE SSL = 0
If setting is 0 then no SSL/TLS
If setting is 1 then 'implicit' SSL/TLS usually SERVER PORT = 465
If setting is 2 then 'explicit' SSL/TLS usually SERVER PORT = 587

SUBJECT

Example: SUBJECT = Message:
Subject on general mails to customers from the customer window in Evatic.

SYSTEM

Example: SYSTEM = SMTP
The Mail system that Evatic uses, Evatic only has support for SMTP.

USE MAILSETTINGS FOR EACH DEPT

Should the mail settings for each department be used or not.

If checked, then the setting / COMPANY XXX / MAIL / XXX (Department code)_READING LETTER ALT BODY should include the bookmarks <MACHINE_BODY>, and the bookmarks for machine should be included in the setting MAIL / XXX (Department code)_READING_LETTER_ALT_MA_BODY.
If the setting COMPANY XXX / Evatic Service / USE MULTILANGUAGE EMAILS ON checked, then the setting / COMPANY XXX / MAIL / XX (country code)_LETTER_ALT_BODY include the bookmark <MACHINE_BODY>, and the bookmarks for machine should be included in the setting / COMPANY XXX / MAIL / XX (country code)_LETTER_ALT_MACHINE_BODY.
If USE MAILSETTINGS FOR EACH DEPT checked
The following settings are first controlled:
COMPANY XXX \ MAIL \ YYY_LETTER_FROM ADDRESS
COMPANY XXX \ MAIL \ YYY_LETTER_RECEIPT ADDRESS
If those settings are blank, the following settings are used:
COMPANY XXX \ MAIL \ YYY_FROM ADDRESS
COMPANY XXX \ MAIL \ YYY_RECEIPT ADDRESS
(If those also are blank, the following settings are used):
COMPANY XXX \ MAIL \ FROM ADDRESS
COMPANY XXX \ MAIL \ RECEIPT ADDRESS)
If USE MAILSETTINGS FOR EACH DEPT checked
The following settings are first controlled:
COMPANY XXX \ MAIL \ LETTER_FROM ADDRESS
COMPANY XXX \ MAIL \ LETTER_RECEIPT ADDRESS
If those settings are blank, the following settings are used:
COMPANY XXX \ MAIL \ FROM ADDRESS
COMPANY XXX \ MAIL \ RECEIPT ADDRESS

MAIL AUTO REMINDER

MAIL METER TYPE

Settings used with ECMM (Evatic Consumable and Meter Management ) connections to, for example Sharp machines. As and when the meter readings arrive via e-mail, you can set up the code to the meter in Evatic. Each setting under this heading should be linked against the code to a meter in Evatic. Such that the readings arriving via mail can be automatically entered as readings against the correct meter. Se the examples for different languages below: See also:
MAIL PROJECT RECEIVER and MAIL LANGUAGE
Antall kopier
Example: Antall kopier = SH
Antall utskrifter
Example: Antall utskrifter= P
Total tellerstand
Example: Total tellerstand = TOT
Copy count
Example: Number of copies = C
Print count
Example: Number of printouts = P
Total count
Example: Total meter level = T

RESOURCE 1 EXPIRE MIN

Example: RESOURCE 1 EXPIRE MIN = 10
Setting when an email/SMS should automatically be send to a responsible resource, before the responstime runs out. E.g. 10 = 10 Minutes , 30= 30 Minutes, or 60= 60 Minutes before the responstime runs out.
Those emails will only be send out if no working hours have been registered on the task (the system will control the orderlines on service tasks and support tasks (start/stop time).

RESOURCE 1 EXPIRE MIN SOLUTION

Example: RESOURCE 1 EXPIRE MIN SOLUTION = 2
Number of minutes (1 to 32000)
If this setting has a another value then blank or 0 the system will:
Automatically send email/SMS to a responsible resource, before the solution time runs out. E.g. 10 = 10 Minutes , 30= 30 Minutes, or 60= 60 Minutes before the solution time runs out

RESOURCE 1 MAIL BC

Example: RESOURCE 1 MAIL BC = support@evatic.com
When sending a escalation email from Evatic, you can set up this address to receive a blind copy of all that will be sent.

RESOURCE 1 MAIL BODY

Example: RESOURCE 1 MAIL BODY =
--------------------------------------------------
Job Reported By: <RECEIVED_BY>
Customer : <CUSTOMER_NAME>
Date Reported : <RECEIVED_DATE>
--------------------------------------------------
The message contents when Evatic sends escalation e-mail with project/support information to a technician. Info from the project/support task can be inserted automatically by using bookmarks.

RESOURCE 1 MAIL CC

Example: RESOURCE 1 MAIL CC = support@evatic.com
When sending a escalation email from Evatic, you can set up this address to receive a copy of all that will be sent.

RESOURCE 1 MAIL SUBJECT

Example: RESOURCE ASSIGNED 1 MAIL SUBJECT = Reminder
Displays as the subject when sending escalation e-mail from Evatic. This text will be followed by a project and a task number.

RESOURCE 1 P TYPE

Example: RESOURCE 1 P TYPE = 1
When should you receive a escalation email? Only for service tasks, support tasks or both?
1 = for service projects
2 = for support projects
3 = for both.

RESOURCE 1 REMINDER TYPE

Example: RESOURCE 1 REMINDER TYPE = 3
Set the type of reminders when using escalation function.
(Default 1; Email reminder)
Possible values:
1 = Email
2 = SMS
3 = Email and SMS

RESOURCE 1 SG VALUE

Example: RESOURCE 1 SG VALUE = AB (Sortgroups 1-5 from the technician dialog screen).
If you have set up sort groups, you can here decide which sort groups needs to be entered in order for the system to send out an reminder email. E.g. 1_AB#3_GH# (Note! the code must be ended by using the #.). The system needs only to have 1 equal sortgroup in order to send out reminder emails to the technicians with the same sort group and same department..

RESOURCE 1 SMS TEXT

Example: RESOURCE 1 SMS TEXT =
--------------------------------------------------
Job Reported By: <RECEIVED_BY>
Customer : <CUSTOMER_NAME>
--------------------------------------------------
The message contents when Evatic sends escalation SMS with project/support information to a technician. Info from the project/support task can be inserted automatically by using bookmarks.

RESOURCE 2 EXPIRE MIN

Example: RESOURCE 2 EXPIRE MIN = 10
Setting when an email/SMS should automatically be send to a responsible resource, before the responstime runs out. E.g. 10 = 10 Minutes , 30= 30 Minutes, or 60= 60 Minutes before the responstime runs out.
Those emails will only be send out if no working hours have been registered on the task (the system will control the orderlines on service tasks and support tasks (start/stop time).

RESOURCE 2 EXPIRE MIN SOLUTION

Example: RESOURCE 2 EXPIRE MIN SOLUTION = 2
Number of minutes (1 to 32000)
If this setting has a another value then blank or 0 the system will:
Automatically send email/SMS to a responsible resource, before the solution time runs out. E.g. 10 = 10 Minutes , 30= 30 Minutes, or 60= 60 Minutes before the solution time runs out

RESOURCE 2 MAIL BC

Example: RESOURCE 2 MAIL BC = support@evatic.com
When sending a escalation email from Evatic, you can set up this address to receive a blind copy of all that will be sent.

RESOURCE 2 MAIL BODY

Example: RESOURCE 2 MAIL BODY =
--------------------------------------------------
Job Reported By: <RECEIVED_BY>
Customer : <CUSTOMER_NAME>
Date Reported : <RECEIVED_DATE>
--------------------------------------------------
The message contents when Evatic sends escalation e-mail with project/support information to a technician. Info from the project/support task can be inserted automatically by using bookmarks.

RESOURCE 2 MAIL CC

Example: RESOURCE 2 MAIL CC = support@evatic.com
When sending a escalation email from Evatic, you can set up this address to receive a copy of all that will be sent.

RESOURCE 2 MAIL SUBJECT

Example: RESOURCE ASSIGNED 2 MAIL SUBJECT = Reminder
Displays as the subject when sending escalation e-mail from Evatic. This text will be followed by a project and a task number.

RESOURCE 2 P TYPE

Example: RESOURCE 2 P TYPE = 1
When should you receive a escalation email? Only for service tasks, support tasks or both?
1 = for service projects
2 = for support projects
3 = for both.

RESOURCE 2 REMINDER TYPE

Example: RESOURCE 2 REMINDER TYPE = 3
Set the type of reminders when using escalation function.
(Default 1; Email reminder)
Possible values:
1 = Email
2 = SMS
3 = Email and SMS

RESOURCE 2 SG VALUE

Example: RESOURCE 2 SG VALUE = AB (Sortgroups 1-5 from the technician dialog screen).
If you have set up sort groups, you can here decide which sort groups needs to be entered in order for the system to send out an reminder email. E.g. 1_AB#3_GH# (Note! the code must be ended by using the #.). The system needs only to have 1 equal sortgroup in order to send out reminder emails to the technicians with the same sort group and same department..

RESOURCE 2 SMS TEXT

Example: RESOURCE 2 SMS TEXT =
--------------------------------------------------
Job Reported By: <RECEIVED_BY>
Customer : <CUSTOMER_NAME>
--------------------------------------------------
The message contents when Evatic sends escalation SMS with project/support information to a technician. Info from the project/support task can be inserted automatically by using bookmarks.

RESOURCE 3 EXPIRE MIN

Example: RESOURCE 3 EXPIRE MIN = 10
Setting when an email/SMS should automatically be send to a responsible resource, before the responstime runs out. E.g. 10 = 10 Minutes , 30= 30 Minutes, or 60= 60 Minutes before the responstime runs out.
Those emails will only be send out if no working hours have been registered on the task (the system will control the orderlines on service tasks and support tasks (start/stop time).

RESOURCE 3 EXPIRE MIN SOLUTION

Example: RESOURCE 3 EXPIRE MIN SOLUTION = 2 
Number of minutes (1 to 32000)
If this setting has a another value then blank or 0 the system will:
Automatically send email/SMS to a responsible resource, before the solution time runs out. E.g. 10 = 10 Minutes , 30= 30 Minutes, or 60= 60 Minutes before the solution time runs out

RESOURCE 3 MAIL BC

Example: RESOURCE 3 MAIL BC = support@evatic.com
When sending a escalation email from Evatic, you can set up this address to receive a blind copy of all that will be sent.

RESOURCE 3 MAIL BODY

Example: RESOURCE 3 MAIL BODY =
--------------------------------------------------
Job Reported By: <RECEIVED_BY>
Customer : <CUSTOMER_NAME>
Date Reported : <RECEIVED_DATE>
--------------------------------------------------
The message contents when Evatic sends escalation e-mail with project/support information to a technician. Info from the project/support task can be inserted automatically by using bookmarks.

RESOURCE 3 MAIL CC

Example: RESOURCE 3 MAIL CC = support@evatic.com
When sending a escalation email from Evatic, you can set up this address to receive a copy of all that will be sent.

RESOURCE 3 MAIL SUBJECT

Example: RESOURCE ASSIGNED 3 MAIL SUBJECT = Reminder
Displays as the subject when sending escalation e-mail from Evatic. This text will be followed by a project and a task number.

RESOURCE 3 P TYPE

Example: RESOURCE 3 P TYPE = 1
When should you receive a escalation email? Only for service tasks, support tasks or both?
1 = for service projects
2 = for support projects
3 = for both.

RESOURCE 3 REMINDER TYPE

Example: RESOURCE 3 REMINDER TYPE = 3
Set the type of reminders when using escalation function.
(Default 1; Email reminder)
Possible values:
1 = Email
2 = SMS
3 = Email and SMS

RESOURCE 3 SG VALUE

Example: RESOURCE 3 SG VALUE = AB (Sortgroups 1-5 from the technician dialog screen).
If you have set up sort groups, you can here decide which sort groups needs to be entered in order for the system to send out an reminder email. E.g. 1_AB#3_GH# (Note! the code must be ended by using the #.). The system needs only to have 1 equal sortgroup in order to send out reminder emails to the technicians with the same sort group and same department..

RESOURCE 3 SMS TEXT

Example: RESOURCE 3 SMS TEXT =
--------------------------------------------------
Job Reported By: <RECEIVED_BY>
Customer : <CUSTOMER_NAME>
--------------------------------------------------
The message contents when Evatic sends escalation SMS with project/support information to a technician. Info from the project/support task can be inserted automatically by using bookmarks.

RESOURCE 4 EXPIRE MIN

Example: RESOURCE 4 EXPIRE MIN = 10
Setting when an email/SMS should automatically be send to a responsible resource, before the responstime runs out. E.g. 10 = 10 Minutes , 30= 30 Minutes, or 60= 60 Minutes before the responstime runs out.
Those emails will only be send out if no working hours have been registered on the task (the system will control the orderlines on service tasks and support tasks (start/stop time).

RESOURCE 4 EXPIRE MIN SOLUTION

Example: RESOURCE 4 EXPIRE MIN SOLUTION = 2
Number of minutes (1 to 32000)
If this setting has a another value then blank or 0 the system will:
Automatically send email/SMS to a responsible resource, before the solution time runs out. E.g. 10 = 10 Minutes , 30= 30 Minutes, or 60= 60 Minutes before the solution time runs out

RESOURCE 4 MAIL BC

Example: RESOURCE 4 MAIL BC = support@evatic.com
When sending a escalation email from Evatic, you can set up this address to receive a blind copy of all that will be sent.

RESOURCE 4 MAIL BODY

Example: RESOURCE 4 MAIL BODY =
--------------------------------------------------
Job Reported By: <RECEIVED_BY>
Customer : <CUSTOMER_NAME>
Date Reported : <RECEIVED_DATE>
--------------------------------------------------
The message contents when Evatic sends escalation e-mail with project/support information to a technician. Info from the project/support task can be inserted automatically by using bookmarks.

RESOURCE 4 MAIL CC

Example: RESOURCE 4 MAIL CC = support@evatic.com
When sending a escalation email from Evatic, you can set up this address to receive a copy of all that will be sent.

RESOURCE 4 MAIL SUBJECT

Example: RESOURCE ASSIGNED 4 MAIL SUBJECT = Reminder
Displays as the subject when sending escalation e-mail from Evatic. This text will be followed by a project and a task number.

RESOURCE 4 P TYPE

Example: RESOURCE 4 P TYPE = 1
When should you receive a escalation email? Only for service tasks, support tasks or both?
1 = for service projects
2 = for support projects
3 = for both.

RESOURCE 4 REMINDER TYPE

Example: RESOURCE 4 REMINDER TYPE = 3
Set the type of reminders when using escalation function.
(Default 1; Email reminder)
Possible values:
1 = Email
2 = SMS
3 = Email and SMS

RESOURCE 4 SG VALUE

Example: RESOURCE 4 SG VALUE = AB (Sortgroups 1-5 from the technician dialog screen).
If you have set up sort groups, you can here decide which sort groups needs to be entered in order for the system to send out an reminder email. E.g. 1_AB#3_GH# (Note! the code must be ended by using the #.). The system needs only to have 1 equal sortgroup in order to send out reminder emails to the technicians with the same sort group and same department..

RESOURCE 4 SMS TEXT

Example: RESOURCE 4 SMS TEXT =
--------------------------------------------------
Job Reported By: <RECEIVED_BY>
Customer : <CUSTOMER_NAME>
--------------------------------------------------
The message contents when Evatic sends escalation SMS with project/support information to a technician. Info from the project/support task can be inserted automatically by using bookmarks.

RESOURCE 5 EXPIRE MIN

Example: RESOURCE 5 EXPIRE MIN = 10
Setting when an email/SMS should automatically be send to a responsible resource, before the responstime runs out. E.g. 10 = 10 Minutes , 30= 30 Minutes, or 60= 60 Minutes before the responstime runs out.
Those emails will only be send out if no working hours have been registered on the task (the system will control the orderlines on service tasks and support tasks (start/stop time).

RESOURCE 5 EXPIRE MIN SOLUTION

Example: RESOURCE 5 EXPIRE MIN SOLUTION = 2
Number of minutes (1 to 32000)
If this setting has a another value then blank or 0 the system will:
Automatically send email/SMS to a responsible resource, before the solution time runs out. E.g. 10 = 10 Minutes , 30= 30 Minutes, or 60= 60 Minutes before the solution time runs out

RESOURCE 5 MAIL BC

Example: RESOURCE 5 MAIL BC = support@evatic.com
When sending a escalation email from Evatic, you can set up this address to receive a blind copy of all that will be sent.

RESOURCE 5 MAIL BODY

Example: RESOURCE 5 MAIL BODY =
--------------------------------------------------
Job Reported By: <RECEIVED_BY>
Customer : <CUSTOMER_NAME>
Date Reported : <RECEIVED_DATE>
--------------------------------------------------
The message contents when Evatic sends escalation e-mail with project/support information to a technician. Info from the project/support task can be inserted automatically by using bookmarks.

RESOURCE 5 MAIL CC

Example: RESOURCE 5 MAIL CC = support@evatic.com
When sending a escalation email from Evatic, you can set up this address to receive a copy of all that will be sent.

RESOURCE 5 MAIL SUBJECT

Example: RESOURCE ASSIGNED 5 MAIL SUBJECT = Reminder
Displays as the subject when sending escalation e-mail from Evatic. This text will be followed by a project and a task number.

RESOURCE 5 P TYPE

Example: RESOURCE 5 P TYPE = 1
When should you receive a escalation email? Only for service tasks, support tasks or both?
1 = for service projects
2 = for support projects
3 = for both.

RESOURCE 5 REMINDER TYPE

Example: RESOURCE 5 REMINDER TYPE = 3
Set the type of reminders when using escalation function.
(Default 1; Email reminder)
Possible values:
1 = Email
2 = SMS
3 = Email and SMS

RESOURCE 5 SG VALUE

Example: RESOURCE 5 SG VALUE = AB (Sortgroups 1-5 from the technician dialog screen).
If you have set up sort groups, you can here decide which sort groups needs to be entered in order for the system to send out an reminder email. E.g. 1_AB#3_GH# (Note! the code must be ended by using the #.). The system needs only to have 1 equal sortgroup in order to send out reminder emails to the technicians with the same sort group and same department..

RESOURCE 5 SMS TEXT

Example: RESOURCE 5 SMS TEXT =
--------------------------------------------------
Job Reported By: <RECEIVED_BY>
Customer : <CUSTOMER_NAME>
--------------------------------------------------
The message contents when Evatic sends escalation SMS with project/support information to a technician. Info from the project/support task can be inserted automatically by using bookmarks.

RESOURCE ASSIGNED 1 EXPIRE MIN

Example: RESOURCE ASSIGNED 1 EXPIRE MIN = 10
Setting when an email/SMS should automatically be send to a responsible resource, before the responstime runs out. E.g. 10 = 10 Minutes , 30= 30 Minutes, or 60= 60 Minutes before the responstime runs out.

RESOURCE ASSIGNED 1 EXPIRE MIN SOLUTION

Example: RESOURCE ASSIGNED 1 EXPIRE MIN SOLUTION = 10
Setting when an email/SMSshould automatically be send to a assign resource, before the solution time runs out. E.g. 10 = 10 Minutes , 30= 30 Minutes, or 60= 60 Minutes before the solution time runs out.

RESOURCE ASSIGNED 1 MAIL BC

Example: RESOURCE ASSIGNED 1 MAIL BC = support@evatic.com
When sending a escalation email from Evatic, you can set up this address to receive a blind copy of all that will be sent.

RESOURCE ASSIGNED 1 MAIL BODY

Example: RESOURCE ASSIGNED 1 MAIL BODY =
--------------------------------------------------
Job Reported By: <RECEIVED_BY>
Customer : <CUSTOMER_NAME>
Date Reported : <RECEIVED_DATE>
--------------------------------------------------
The message contents when Evatic sends escalation e-mail with project/support information to a technician. Info from the project/support task can be inserted automatically by using bookmarks.

RESOURCE ASSIGNED 1 MAIL CC

Example: RESOURCE ASSIGNED 1 MAIL CC = support@evatic.com
When sending a escalation email from Evatic, you can set up this address to receive a copy of all that will be sent.

RESOURCE ASSIGNED 1 MAIL SUBJECT

Example: RESOURCE ASSIGNED 1 MAIL SUBJECT = Reminder
Displays as the subject when sending escalation e-mail from Evatic. This text will be followed by a project and a task number.

RESOURCE ASSIGNED 1 P TYPE

Example: RESOURCE ASSIGNED 1 P TYPE = 1
When should you receive a escalation email? Only for service tasks, support tasks or both?
1 = for service projects
2 = for support projects
3 = for both.

RESOURCE ASSIGNED 1 REMINDER TYPE

Example: RESOURCE ASSIGNED 1 REMINDER TYPE = 3
Set the type of reminders when using escalation function.
(Default 1; Email reminder)
Possible values:
1 = Email
2 = SMS
3 = Email and SMS

RESOURCE ASSIGNED 1 SG VALUE

Example: RESOURCE ASSIGNED 1 SG VALUE = AB (Sortgroups 1-5 from the technician dialog screen).
When the technician sort groups are left blank, an reminder email will be send out to all the assigned technicians. If you have set up sort groups, you can here decide which sort groups needs to be entered in order for the system to send out an reminder email. E.g. 1_AB#3_GH# (Note! the code must be ended by using the #.). The system needs only to have 1 equal sortgroup in order to send out reminder emails to all the technicians with the same sort group.

RESOURCE ASSIGNED 1 SMS TEXT

Example: RESOURCE ASSIGNED 1 SMS TEXT =
--------------------------------------------------
Job Reported By: <RECEIVED_BY>
Customer : <CUSTOMER_NAME>
--------------------------------------------------
The message contents when Evatic sends escalation SMS with project/support information to a technician. Info from the project/support task can be inserted automatically by using bookmarks.

RESOURCE ASSIGNED 2 EXPIRE MIN

Example: RESOURCE ASSIGNED 2 EXPIRE MIN = 10
Setting when an email/SMS should automatically be send to a responsible resource, before the responstime runs out. E.g. 10 = 10 Minutes , 30= 30 Minutes, or 60= 60 Minutes before the responstime runs out.

RESOURCE ASSIGNED 2 EXPIRE MIN SOLUTION

Example: RESOURCE ASSIGNED 2 EXPIRE MIN SOLUTION = 10
Setting when an email/SMSshould automatically be send to a assign resource, before the solution time runs out. E.g. 10 = 10 Minutes , 30= 30 Minutes, or 60= 60 Minutes before the solution time runs out.

RESOURCE ASSIGNED 2 MAIL BC

Example: RESOURCE ASSIGNED 2 MAIL BC = support@evatic.com
When sending a escalation email from Evatic, you can set up this address to receive a blind copy of all that will be sent.

RESOURCE ASSIGNED 2 MAIL BODY

Example: RESOURCE ASSIGNED 2 MAIL BODY =
--------------------------------------------------
Job Reported By: <RECEIVED_BY>
Customer : <CUSTOMER_NAME>
Date Reported : <RECEIVED_DATE>
--------------------------------------------------
The message contents when Evatic sends escalation e-mail with project/support information to a technician. Info from the project/support task can be inserted automatically by using bookmarks.

RESOURCE ASSIGNED 2 MAIL CC

Example: RESOURCE ASSIGNED 2 MAIL CC = support@evatic.com
When sending a escalation email from Evatic, you can set up this address to receive a copy of all that will be sent.

RESOURCE ASSIGNED 2 MAIL SUBJECT

Example: RESOURCE ASSIGNED 2 MAIL SUBJECT = Reminder
Displays as the subject when sending escalation e-mail from Evatic. This text will be followed by a project and a task number.

RESOURCE ASSIGNED 2 P TYPE

Example: RESOURCE ASSIGNED 2 P TYPE = 1
When should you receive a escalation email? Only for service tasks, support tasks or both?
1 = for service projects
2 = for support projects
3 = for both.

RESOURCE ASSIGNED 2 REMINDER TYPE

Example: RESOURCE ASSIGNED 2 REMINDER TYPE = 3
Set the type of reminders when using escalation function.
(Default 1; Email reminder)
Possible values:
1 = Email
2 = SMS
3 = Email and SMS

RESOURCE ASSIGNED 2 SG VALUE

Example: RESOURCE ASSIGNED 2 SG VALUE = AB (Sortgroups 1-5 from the technician dialog screen).
When the technician sort groups are left blank, an reminder email will be send out to all the assigned technicians. If you have set up sort groups, you can here decide which sort groups needs to be entered in order for the system to send out an reminder email. E.g. 1_AB#3_GH# (Note! the code must be ended by using the #.). The system needs only to have 1 equal sortgroup in order to send out reminder emails to all the technicians with the same sort group.

RESOURCE ASSIGNED 2 SMS TEXT

Example: RESOURCE ASSIGNED 2 SMS TEXT =
--------------------------------------------------
Job Reported By: <RECEIVED_BY>
Customer : <CUSTOMER_NAME>
--------------------------------------------------
The message contents when Evatic sends escalation SMS with project/support information to a technician. Info from the project/support task can be inserted automatically by using bookmarks.

RESOURCE ASSIGNED 3 EXPIRE MIN

Example: RESOURCE ASSIGNED 3 EXPIRE MIN = 10
Setting when an email/SMS should automatically be send to a responsible resource, before the responstime runs out. E.g. 10 = 10 Minutes , 30= 30 Minutes, or 60= 60 Minutes before the responstime runs out.

RESOURCE ASSIGNED 3 EXPIRE MIN SOLUTION

Example: RESOURCE ASSIGNED 3 EXPIRE MIN SOLUTION = 10
Setting when an email/SMSshould automatically be send to a assign resource, before the solution time runs out. E.g. 10 = 10 Minutes , 30= 30 Minutes, or 60= 60 Minutes before the solution time runs out.

RESOURCE ASSIGNED 3 MAIL BC

Example: RESOURCE ASSIGNED 3 MAIL BC = support@evatic.com
When sending a escalation email from Evatic, you can set up this address to receive a blind copy of all that will be sent.

RESOURCE ASSIGNED 3 MAIL BODY

Example: RESOURCE ASSIGNED 3 MAIL BODY =
--------------------------------------------------
Job Reported By: <RECEIVED_BY>
Customer : <CUSTOMER_NAME>
Date Reported : <RECEIVED_DATE>
--------------------------------------------------
The message contents when Evatic sends escalation e-mail with project/support information to a technician. Info from the project/support task can be inserted automatically by using bookmarks.

RESOURCE ASSIGNED 3 MAIL CC

Example: RESOURCE ASSIGNED 3 MAIL CC = support@evatic.com
When sending a escalation email from Evatic, you can set up this address to receive a copy of all that will be sent.

RESOURCE ASSIGNED 3 MAIL SUBJECT

Example: RESOURCE ASSIGNED 3 MAIL SUBJECT = Reminder
Displays as the subject when sending escalation e-mail from Evatic. This text will be followed by a project and a task number.

RESOURCE ASSIGNED 3 P TYPE

Example: RESOURCE ASSIGNED 3 P TYPE = 1
When should you receive a escalation email? Only for service tasks, support tasks or both?
1 = for service projects
2 = for support projects
3 = for both.

RESOURCE ASSIGNED 3 REMINDER TYPE

Example: RESOURCE ASSIGNED 3 REMINDER TYPE = 3
Set the type of reminders when using escalation function.
(Default 1; Email reminder)
Possible values:
1 = Email
2 = SMS
3 = Email and SMS

RESOURCE ASSIGNED 3 SG VALUE

Example: RESOURCE ASSIGNED 3 SG VALUE = AB (Sortgroups 1-5 from the technician dialog screen).
When the technician sort groups are left blank, an reminder email will be send out to all the assigned technicians. If you have set up sort groups, you can here decide which sort groups needs to be entered in order for the system to send out an reminder email. E.g. 1_AB#3_GH# (Note! the code must be ended by using the #.). The system needs only to have 1 equal sortgroup in order to send out reminder emails to all the technicians with the same sort group.

RESOURCE ASSIGNED 3 SMS TEXT

Example: RESOURCE ASSIGNED 3 SMS TEXT =
--------------------------------------------------
Job Reported By: <RECEIVED_BY>
Customer : <CUSTOMER_NAME>
--------------------------------------------------
The message contents when Evatic sends escalation SMS with project/support information to a technician. Info from the project/support task can be inserted automatically by using bookmarks.

RESOURCE ASSIGNED 4 EXPIRE MIN

Example: RESOURCE ASSIGNED 4 EXPIRE MIN = 10
Setting when an email/SMS should automatically be send to a responsible resource, before the responstime runs out. E.g. 10 = 10 Minutes , 30= 30 Minutes, or 60= 60 Minutes before the responstime runs out.

RESOURCE ASSIGNED 4 EXPIRE MIN SOLUTION

Example: RESOURCE ASSIGNED 4 EXPIRE MIN SOLUTION = 10
Setting when an email/SMSshould automatically be send to a assign resource, before the solution time runs out. E.g. 10 = 10 Minutes , 30= 30 Minutes, or 60= 60 Minutes before the solution time runs out.

RESOURCE ASSIGNED 4 MAIL BC

Example: RESOURCE ASSIGNED 4 MAIL BC = support@evatic.com
When sending a escalation email from Evatic, you can set up this address to receive a blind copy of all that will be sent.

RESOURCE ASSIGNED 4 MAIL BODY

Example: RESOURCE ASSIGNED 4 MAIL BODY =
--------------------------------------------------
Job Reported By: <RECEIVED_BY>
Customer : <CUSTOMER_NAME>
Date Reported : <RECEIVED_DATE>
--------------------------------------------------
The message contents when Evatic sends escalation e-mail with project/support information to a technician. Info from the project/support task can be inserted automatically by using bookmarks.

RESOURCE ASSIGNED 4 MAIL CC

Example: RESOURCE ASSIGNED 4 MAIL CC = support@evatic.com
When sending a escalation email from Evatic, you can set up this address to receive a copy of all that will be sent.

RESOURCE ASSIGNED 4 MAIL SUBJECT

Example: RESOURCE ASSIGNED 4 MAIL SUBJECT = Reminder
Displays as the subject when sending escalation e-mail from Evatic. This text will be followed by a project and a task number.

RESOURCE ASSIGNED 4 P TYPE

Example: RESOURCE ASSIGNED 4 P TYPE = 1
When should you receive a escalation email? Only for service tasks, support tasks or both?
1 = for service projects
2 = for support projects
3 = for both.

RESOURCE ASSIGNED 4 REMINDER TYPE

Example: RESOURCE ASSIGNED 4 REMINDER TYPE = 3
Set the type of reminders when using escalation function.
(Default 1; Email reminder)
Possible values:
1 = Email
2 = SMS
3 = Email and SMS

RESOURCE ASSIGNED 4 SG VALUE

Example: RESOURCE ASSIGNED 4 SG VALUE = AB (Sortgroups 1-5 from the technician dialog screen).
When the technician sort groups are left blank, an reminder email will be send out to all the assigned technicians. If you have set up sort groups, you can here decide which sort groups needs to be entered in order for the system to send out an reminder email. E.g. 1_AB#3_GH# (Note! the code must be ended by using the #.). The system needs only to have 1 equal sortgroup in order to send out reminder emails to all the technicians with the same sort group.

RESOURCE ASSIGNED 4 SMS TEXT

Example: RESOURCE ASSIGNED 4 SMS TEXT =
--------------------------------------------------
Job Reported By: <RECEIVED_BY>
Customer : <CUSTOMER_NAME>
--------------------------------------------------
The message contents when Evatic sends escalation SMS with project/support information to a technician. Info from the project/support task can be inserted automatically by using bookmarks.

RESOURCE ASSIGNED 5 EXPIRE MIN

Example: RESOURCE ASSIGNED 5 EXPIRE MIN = 10
Setting when an email/SMS should automatically be send to a responsible resource, before the responstime runs out. E.g. 10 = 10 Minutes , 30= 30 Minutes, or 60= 60 Minutes before the responstime runs out.

RESOURCE ASSIGNED 5 EXPIRE MIN SOLUTION

Example: RESOURCE ASSIGNED 5 EXPIRE MIN SOLUTION = 10
Setting when an email/SMSshould automatically be send to a assign resource, before the solution time runs out. E.g. 10 = 10 Minutes , 30= 30 Minutes, or 60= 60 Minutes before the solution time runs out.

RESOURCE ASSIGNED 5 MAIL BC

Example: RESOURCE ASSIGNED 5 MAIL BC = support@evatic.com
When sending a escalation email from Evatic, you can set up this address to receive a blind copy of all that will be sent.

RESOURCE ASSIGNED 5 MAIL BODY

Example: RESOURCE ASSIGNED 5 MAIL BODY =
--------------------------------------------------
Job Reported By: <RECEIVED_BY>
Customer : <CUSTOMER_NAME>
Date Reported : <RECEIVED_DATE>
--------------------------------------------------
The message contents when Evatic sends escalation e-mail with project/support information to a technician. Info from the project/support task can be inserted automatically by using bookmarks.

RESOURCE ASSIGNED 5 MAIL CC

Example: RESOURCE ASSIGNED 5 MAIL CC = support@evatic.com
When sending a escalation email from Evatic, you can set up this address to receive a copy of all that will be sent.

RESOURCE ASSIGNED 5 MAIL SUBJECT

Example: RESOURCE ASSIGNED 5 MAIL SUBJECT = Reminder
Displays as the subject when sending escalation e-mail from Evatic. This text will be followed by a project and a task number.

RESOURCE ASSIGNED 5 P TYPE

Example: RESOURCE ASSIGNED 1 P TYPE = 1
When should you receive a escalation email? Only for service tasks, support tasks or both?
1 = for service projects
2 = for support projects
3 = for both.

RESOURCE ASSIGNED 5 REMINDER TYPE

Example: RESOURCE ASSIGNED 5 REMINDER TYPE = 3
Set the type of reminders when using escalation function.
(Default 1; Email reminder)
Possible values:
1 = Email
2 = SMS
3 = Email and SMS

RESOURCE ASSIGNED 5 SG VALUE

Example: RESOURCE ASSIGNED 5 SG VALUE = AB (Sortgroups 1-5 from the technician dialog screen).
When the technician sort groups are left blank, an reminder email will be send out to all the assigned technicians. If you have set up sort groups, you can here decide which sort groups needs to be entered in order for the system to send out an reminder email. E.g. 1_AB#3_GH# (Note! the code must be ended by using the #.). The system needs only to have 1 equal sortgroup in order to send out reminder emails to all the technicians with the same sort group.

RESOURCE ASSIGNED 5 SMS TEXT

Example: RESOURCE ASSIGNED 5 SMS TEXT =
--------------------------------------------------
Job Reported By: <RECEIVED_BY>
Customer : <CUSTOMER_NAME>
--------------------------------------------------
The message contents when Evatic sends escalation SMS with project/support information to a technician. Info from the project/support task can be inserted automatically by using bookmarks.

MAIL LANGUAGE

ALERT

Example: ALERT = #Alert message#Warnmeldung#Advarselsmelding#
What is written in the mail indicating an error message? Each language is separated by a #.

DEVICE DETECTED

Example: DEVICE DETECTED = #Device has detected:#Gerat hat festgestellt:#Enheten har regisrert:#
What is written in the mail before the description of the error? Each language is separated by a #.

DEVICE INFO

Example: DEVICE INFO = #Current device counter information:#Aktuelle Geratezahler-Information:#Gjeldende enhetsInformation:#
What is written in the mail denoting Information about meters? Each language is separated by a #.

LOCATION

Example: LOCATION = #LOCATION: #
What is written in the mail denoting Information about the location of the machine? Each language is separated by a #.

MODEL

Example: MODEL = #DEVICE MODEL: #GERaTEMODELL: #ENHETSMODELL: #
What is written in the mail denoting Information about the machine model type? Each language is separated by a #.

SERIAL NO

Example: SERIAL NO = #SERIAL NUMBER: #SERIENNUMMER: #SERIENUMMER: #
What is written in the mail denoting Information about the serial number of the machine? Each language is separated by a #.

STATUS MSG

Example: STATUS MSG = #Status Message#Statusmeldung#Statusmelding#
What is written in the mail that indicates if the mail is a meter reading? Each language is separated by a #.

XML MSG ORDER

Example: XML MSG ORDER = Toner low#
Using XML connection, what kind of message should result in a toner order? Each language is separated by a #.

XML MSG PROJECT

Example: XML MSG PROJECT = SERVICE REQUIRED#
Using XML connection, what kind of message should result in a project? Each language is separated by a #.

MAIL PROJECT

GREETING

Example: GREETING = Best regards from the service department
Not in use! Greetings must be entered under TECHNICIAN MESSAGE.

MAIL CHARSET

Example: MAIL CHARSET = (blank)
Possibility to use this setting (Character set) on mails from Evatic. This should only be used when the mail send from Evatic is not interpreted correctly. The mail component detect which language is installed on the Client and uses this charset if this setting is blank.

MAIL FORMAT 1 NAME

Example: MAIL FORMAT 1 NAME =Format 1
Name of the settings in the drop down 'Format' on mail from Project

MAIL FORMAT 1 TEXT

Example: MAIL FORMAT 1 TEXT =
--------------------------------------------------
Job Reported By: <RECEIVED_BY>
Customer : <CUSTOMER_NAME>
Date Reported : <RECEIVED_DATE>
--------------------------------------------------
The content of the message on the mail if this format is selected. (see TECHNICIAN MESSAGE).

MAIL FORMAT 10 NAME

Example: MAIL FORMAT 10 NAME =Format 1
Name of the settings in the drop down 'Format' on mail from Project

MAIL FORMAT 10 TEXT

Example: MAIL FORMAT 10 TEXT =
--------------------------------------------------
Job Reported By: <RECEIVED_BY>
Customer : <CUSTOMER_NAME>
Date Reported : <RECEIVED_DATE>
--------------------------------------------------
The content of the message on the mail if this format is selected. (see TECHNICIAN MESSAGE).

MAIL FORMAT 2 NAME

Example: MAIL FORMAT 2 NAME =Format 1
Name of the settings in the drop down 'Format' on mail from Project

MAIL FORMAT 2 TEXT

Example: MAIL FORMAT 2 TEXT =
--------------------------------------------------
Job Reported By: <RECEIVED_BY>
Customer : <CUSTOMER_NAME>
Date Reported : <RECEIVED_DATE>
--------------------------------------------------
The content of the message on the mail if this format is selected. (see TECHNICIAN MESSAGE).

MAIL FORMAT 3 NAME

Example: MAIL FORMAT 3 NAME =Format 1
Name of the settings in the drop down 'Format' on mail from Project

MAIL FORMAT 3 TEXT

Example: MAIL FORMAT 3 TEXT =
--------------------------------------------------
Job Reported By: <RECEIVED_BY>
Customer : <CUSTOMER_NAME>
Date Reported : <RECEIVED_DATE>
--------------------------------------------------
The content of the message on the mail if this format is selected. (see TECHNICIAN MESSAGE).

MAIL FORMAT 4 NAME

Example: MAIL FORMAT 4 NAME =Format 1
Name of the settings in the drop down 'Format' on mail from Project

MAIL FORMAT 4 TEXT

Example: MAIL FORMAT 4 TEXT =
--------------------------------------------------
Job Reported By: <RECEIVED_BY>
Customer : <CUSTOMER_NAME>
Date Reported : <RECEIVED_DATE>
--------------------------------------------------
The content of the message on the mail if this format is selected. (see TECHNICIAN MESSAGE).

MAIL FORMAT 5 NAME

Example: MAIL FORMAT 5 NAME =Format 1
Name of the settings in the drop down 'Format' on mail from Project

MAIL FORMAT 5 TEXT

Example: MAIL FORMAT 5 TEXT =
--------------------------------------------------
Job Reported By: <RECEIVED_BY>
Customer : <CUSTOMER_NAME>
Date Reported : <RECEIVED_DATE>
--------------------------------------------------
The content of the message on the mail if this format is selected. (see TECHNICIAN MESSAGE).

MAIL FORMAT 6 NAME

Example: MAIL FORMAT 6 NAME =Format 1
Name of the settings in the drop down 'Format' on mail from Project

MAIL FORMAT 6 TEXT

Example: MAIL FORMAT 6 TEXT =
--------------------------------------------------
Job Reported By: <RECEIVED_BY>
Customer : <CUSTOMER_NAME>
Date Reported : <RECEIVED_DATE>
--------------------------------------------------
The content of the message on the mail if this format is selected. (see TECHNICIAN MESSAGE).

MAIL FORMAT 7 NAME

Example: MAIL FORMAT 7 NAME =Format 1
Name of the settings in the drop down 'Format' on mail from Project

MAIL FORMAT 7 TEXT

Example: MAIL FORMAT 7 TEXT =
--------------------------------------------------
Job Reported By: <RECEIVED_BY>
Customer : <CUSTOMER_NAME>
Date Reported : <RECEIVED_DATE>
--------------------------------------------------
The content of the message on the mail if this format is selected. (see TECHNICIAN MESSAGE).

MAIL FORMAT 8 NAME

Example: MAIL FORMAT 8 NAME =Format 1
Name of the settings in the drop down 'Format' on mail from Project

MAIL FORMAT 8 TEXT

Example: MAIL FORMAT 8 TEXT =
--------------------------------------------------
Job Reported By: <RECEIVED_BY>
Customer : <CUSTOMER_NAME>
Date Reported : <RECEIVED_DATE>
--------------------------------------------------
The content of the message on the mail if this format is selected. (see TECHNICIAN MESSAGE).

MAIL FORMAT 9 NAME

Example: MAIL FORMAT 9 NAME =Format 1
Name of the settings in the drop down 'Format' on mail from Project

MAIL FORMAT 9 TEXT

Example: MAIL FORMAT 9 TEXT =
--------------------------------------------------
Job Reported By: <RECEIVED_BY>
Customer : <CUSTOMER_NAME>
Date Reported : <RECEIVED_DATE>
--------------------------------------------------
The content of the message on the mail if this format is selected. (see TECHNICIAN MESSAGE).

MOBILE MAIL FORMAT

Example: MOBILE MAIL FORMAT =
-------------------------------------------------
Job Reported By: <RECEIVED_BY>
Customer : <CUSTOMER_NAME>
Date Reported : <RECEIVED_DATE>
--------------------------------------------------
Format on emails used for emails sent to customers from mobile devices.
In this setting you add the text with bookmarks for the email you want to send.
The bookmarks available are the same as for the setting TECHNICIAN MESSAGE
If this setting is not used then the setting TECHNICIAN MESSAGE is used as mail format.

(COMPANY_YYY \ MAIL_PROJECT \ YY_MOBILE MAIL FORMAT must be used, if multi language email is turned on)

RECEIPT ADDRESS

Example: RECEIPT ADDRESS = support@evatic.com
When sending a project to a customer or technician via e-mail from Evatic, you can set up this address to receive a copy of all projects that are sent.

REPLY ADDRESS

Example: REPLY ADDRESS = support@evatic.com
Displays from address when sending e-mail with project information from Evatic to a customer or technician.

REPLY ADDRESS FOR EACH DEPT

Should the reply address be different from each department?
The system will check the default department for the user and use the linked from address when sending e-mail
The different from addresses are set up using the following settings:
COMPANY XXX \ MAIL PROJECT \ REPLY ADDRESS XXX
COMPANY XXX \ MAIL PROJECT \ REPLY NAME XXX

REPLY NAME

Example: REPLY NAME = Service department
Displays from name when sending e-mail with project information from Evatic to a customer or technician.

SERVER

Example: SERVER = SMTP.TELENOR.NO
The Mail server that Evatic uses to send e-mail with project information to a customer.

SUBJECT

Example: SUBJECT = Project confirmation:
Displays as the subject when sending e-mail from Evatic to a customer or technician. This text will be followed by a project and a task number.

SUBJECT ADD BOOKMARKS

When you send email from project\helpdesk should the system add bookmarks from the project subject
Example: COMPANY YYY \ MAIL PROJECT \ SUBJECT ADD BOOKMARKS = <TASK TITLE>
Subject: [MAIL PROJECT \ SUBJECT + project number] 'The task title from the project task'

SUBJECT ADD BRACKETS

When you send email from project\helpdesk should the system add square brackets on the around the information about project number
Subject: [MAIL PROJECT \ SUBJECT + project number]

SYSTEM

Example: SYSTEM = SMTP
The mail system that Evatic uses to send e-mail with project information to a customer.

TASK TYPE

Example: TASK TYPE = 1
No longer in use. Is moved to COMPANY XXX \ \MAIL PROJECT TASK \ TYPE

TECHNICIAN MESSAGE

Example: TECHNICIAN MESSAGE =
--------------------------------------------------
Job Reported By: <RECEIVED_BY>
Customer : <CUSTOMER_NAME>
Date Reported : <RECEIVED_DATE>
--------------------------------------------------
The message contents when Evatic sends e-mail with project information to a customer or technician.Info from the project can be inserted automatically by using the codes in the setting, f.ex.
**********************
Action:
<ACTION_TEXT>
Symptom:
<SYMPTOM_TEXT>
Regards,
Evatic AS
**********************
This message would be created to:
**********************
Action:
This is the text from the action-field.
Symptom:
This is the text from the symptom-field.
Regards,
Evatic AS
**********************
Available codes:
Code

<SYMPTOM_TEXT>
<ACTION_TEXT>
<CUSTOMER_NO>
<CUSTOMER_NAME>
<MODEL TYPE>
<MACHINE NO>
<PROJECT NO>
<TASK NO>
<DEPT>
<DEPARTMENT_NAME>
<INFORMATION>
<MACHINE NODE>
<INSTALLATION_DATE>
<ADDRESS_NAME>
<ADDRESS_1>
<ADDRESS_2>
<ADDRESS_3>
<LOCATION>
<POSTAL_CODE>
<POST_LOCATION>
<CONTACT>
<PHONE_NO>
<FAX_NO>
<MOBILE_NO>
<ADDRESS_PHONE_NO>
<RECEIVED_BY>
<RECEIVED_DATE>
<RESPONSE_TIME>
<RESPONSE_DATE>
<RESPONSE_DATE_SHORT>
<SYMPTOM_CODE_1>
<SYMPTOM_CODE_2>
<SYMPTOM_CODE_3>
<PRIORITY_CODE>
<TASK NODE>
<STATUS>
<ACTION_CODE_1>
<ACTION_CODE_2>
<ACTION_CODE_3>
<AREA_CODE>
<DATE_RESPONSE>
<TIME_ESTIMATE>
<DESCRIPTION AREA_TEXT>
<PRIORITY_TEXT>
<CONTACT_EMAIL>
<MODEL_DESCRIPTION>
<INSTALLATION_NODE>
<PROJECT_TASK_STATUS>
<SYMPTOM_TAG>
<PROJECT DESCRIPTION>
<CONTRACT_CODE>
<CONTRACT_DESCRIPTION>
<TECHNICIAN_NAME>
<PROJECT_MACHINES>
<CUSTOMER_REFERENCE>
<OBJ_NO>
<Language>
<COMPANY>
<SYMPTOM_CODE_1_DESC>
<SYMPTOM_CODE_2_DESC>
<SYMPTOM_CODE_3_DESC>
<ACTION_CODE_1_DESC>
<ACTION_CODE_2_DESC>
<ACTION_CODE_3_DESC>
<CUSTOMER_OBJ_NO>
<INFO 01>
<INFO 02>
<INFO 03>
<INFO 04>
<INFO 05>
<INFO 06>
<COMMENT_INTERNAL>
<MAX_WORK_TIME>
<CURRENT_TIME>
<ID_NO>
<TASK TITLE>
<PT_INFO 01>
<PT_INFO 02>
<PT_INFO 03>
<PT_INFO 04>
<PT_INFO 05>
<PT_INFO 06>

USE TECHNICIAN MAILADR ON REPLY

Setting to determine if the technician mail address should be used as reply-address when the project is assigned.
If the project is assigned, and the assigned technician has a valid email-address, this is used as the reply-address when sending the mail.
If not the default email address is used.

MAIL PROJECT RECEIVER

CHECK MACHINE NO OR PROP

Setting where the administrator can choose if the KYOcount solution should search for machine number or a property to find the correct machine. If this setting is checked the function will search for machine number, if the setting is not checked it will search for a property.

CHECK PROP CODE

Example: CHECK PROP CODE = SN
The code of the property to search for (see setting CHECK MACHINE NO OR PROP).

DUPLICATE MR USE CURRENT DATE

Check if the meter reading date imported from XML is the same as the last registered reading (if type L (Letter)).
If it is the same date and the setting is checked, then change the date to the current date and insert and report the meter as a normal meter reading (letter).

FORMAT

Example: FORMAT = XML
Type of M2M connection you want to use. (Examples: XML or STANDARD or STANDARD XML) (read more here)
Example:
XML
EFMS XML (contains several machines for each XML format)

MACHINE NO FORMAT

If not checked, check is for the whole machine number
If the value is checked
If the machine number in the email has the lenght of 10, only the 8 last numbers is used when the system search for a machine in Evatic service
If the machine number in the email has the lenght of 6, the search for machine is done on the last 6 numbers in Evatic Service.

MACHINE NO UNIQUE

Should only serial number or serial number and model be used when information from email is imported. If the setting is checked, the system will only look for the serial number, if the setting is 0, the system will look for serial number and model mention in the email.
Note! This setting will be possible to use both with CHECK MACHINE NO OR PROP = 1 or 0.

MAX NUMBER OF MAILS TO READ

Example: MAX NUMBER OF MAILS TO READ = 100
How many emails should be collected together when Evatic Server reads emails? (0 = no limitations).
Note! This setting must be modified if there are memory problems on the server running Evatic Server because the amount of mails in the mailbox is high.

NODE

Example: NODE = 1_All_2_Incoming_3_From e-mail
The standard node in the project tree for tasks automatically set up via e-mail. Only valid if GLOBAL USER->TREE->FOR EACH DEPARTMENT = 0. If set to 1 the correct setting is found at COMPANY XXX->DEPARTMENT XXX->MAIL PROJECT RECEIVER NODE

ON

Should Evatic read a certain mailbox and import information from this mail that will be automatically set up as projects?

PASSWORD

Example: PASSWORD = 123548
The password for the post-box to be used.

SERVER

Example: SERVER = POP.TELENOR.NO
Server for the e-mail address.
COMPANY XXX \ MAIL PROJECT RECEIVER(+ 2 --> 4) \ PORT (Port for email by POP3)
COMPANY XXX \ MAIL PROJECT RECEIVER (+ _2 --> 4) \ USE SSL
Controls whether TLS/SSL is used when reading email from a POP3 server.
Note: Check first to determine if your POP3 server can accept TLS/SSL connections. Also, be sure to set the setting 'PORT' property to the TLS/SSL POP3 port number, which is typically 995.
Set to 1 for SSL, 0 for unencrypted TCP/IP connection.

SERVER TYPE

How should we connect to the server?

• POP (Basic auth.) (0)
  Connect to a POP server using username and password
• POP Office365(oAuth2) (0)
  Connect to Office365 POP server using oAuth2. 
  For this type of connection you can leave the password field blank.
  For more information on how to set up Evatic to read emails from Office365 using oAuth2, please read article about this topic on https://evatic.asolvi.com/
  Short list of what you must do: (more detailed description is available in the customer portal)
  - You must create a App registrations in Azure
  - This app registration must have certain permissions
  - From Azure copy your client id and client secret
  - After you change this setting in Evatic Admin Web, you must afterwards restart Evatic Server in normal mode (not as a service) - (This is something you must do only once to be able to login to Microsoft and consent for the user to get access to read emails, after this process is done you can stop Evatic Server and start it again as a process)
  - There you will be asked to put in id's and keys for your App registration from Azure
  - Then Evatic Server will show re-direct you to Microsoft where you must login with the user (email address) that the application should be allowed to read.

SYMPTOM FROM DHD

When importing email from default format, (format using the setting MAIL LANGUAGE \ DEVICE DETECTED) should Evatic import all text from ''Device has detected' as symptom text?

TOSHIBA NO CHECK ON MODEL

Setting for automatic import of meter reading letters. Should Evatic Server check for model or not. If setting is not checked, checks model.

UNKNOWN DELETE

Whenever the email address is unknown, the email can automatically be deleted from Evatic Server.

UNKNOWN FORWARD TO

Example: UNKNOWN FORWARD TO = support@evatic.com
Whenever the email address is unknown, the email can automatically be forwarded to the email address entered here.

USER

Example: USER = support
The user name for the post-box to be used.
-------------------------------------------------
In order for sending email from a machine, please follow this steps:
1. The machine is set up to send email to a pop3-account.
2. This Pop3-account is set up for receiving emails in Evatic Server
In Evatic Admin select the setting SETTINGS/COMPANY XXX/ MAIL PROJECT RECEIVER
-ON = 1 (1 = On, = 0 off)
-PASSWORD = Password for the pop3-account
-SERVER = Pop3-server (e.g. pop3.sharp.com)
-USER = User name for pop3-account (e.g.. sharpservice@sharpcenter.no)
3. The model (e.g. MX-2700N ) need to exist in Evatic Service
4. The machine with model MX-2700N need to exist in Evatic Service (with the right serial number)
5. Meter readings have been registered in Evatic Service.
6. The first time the meter reading mail is send from the machine, folders will be added under Evatic Admin-->Settings-->Company XXX-->MAIL METER TYPE , equivalent the names of the meters. It is necessary to combine the real name of the meters in Evatic with the leading text coming from the physical machine. This connection is done in Evatic Admin under the established folders. E.g. if a physical machine has the meter Print Count (representing the meter SH in Evatic Service, open Evatic Admin and press the folder <Print Count >. Type SH.
7. If all the requirements above have been full filled, a machine in Evatic will get its counters automatically from the physical machine.
Note! In the log file in Evatic Server, the received mails can be seen. In order to open the file, use e.g. notepad. If you receive the following information: [12.09.2007 11:01:16 dbo E Unknown machine: 7503952300 (MX-2300N)] = email from model MX-2300N is registered, but no machine with the serial number 7503952300 exist in Evatic Service.
The log file is nice to use for finding information about the emails send to Evatic.
-If everything is OK and the meters have been registered in Evatic, the log file will show the message 'mail deleted'.
-If the machine is not showing in the log file at all, this mean that email from the machine has not been (please check the pop3-acoount) or the meters have already been registered (please check the meters in Evatic Service).

MAIL PROJECT TASK

MAX NUMBER OF MAILS TO READ

Example: MAX NUMBER OF MAILS TO READ = 100
How many emails should be collected together when Evatic Server reads emails? (0 = no limitations).

This setting must be modified if there are memory problems on the server running Evatic Server because the amount of mails in the mailbox is high.

REMOVE WORDS

Example: REMOVE WORDS = v:* {behavior:url(#default#VML);}##;##gg7shsj##;##
List of words that the system should remove from the email. Each word is separated by ##;##
Example:
v:* {behavior:url(#default#VML);}##;##gg7shsj##;##
In this example the words:
v:* {behavior:url(#default#VML);}
and
gg7shsj
will be removed from the text in the email before the project is inserted.
In-coming emails ca automatically be added as a project or support task. 10 different mail accounts can be set up. How to set this up, see MAIL PROJECT TASK.
In-coming emails ca automatically be added as a project or support task. 10 different mail accounts can be set up. How to set this up, see MAIL PROJECT TASK.
In-coming emails ca automatically be added as a project or support task. 10 different mail accounts can be set up. How to set this up, see MAIL PROJECT TASK.
In-coming emails ca automatically be added as a project or support task. 10 different mail accounts can be set up. How to set this up, see MAIL PROJECT TASK.
In-coming emails ca automatically be added as a project or support task. 10 different mail accounts can be set up. How to set this up, see MAIL PROJECT TASK.
In-coming emails ca automatically be added as a project or support task. 10 different mail accounts can be set up. How to set this up, see MAIL PROJECT TASK.
In-coming emails ca automatically be added as a project or support task. 10 different mail accounts can be set up. How to set this up, see MAIL PROJECT TASK.
In-coming emails ca automatically be added as a project or support task. 10 different mail accounts can be set up. How to set this up, see MAIL PROJECT TASK.
In-coming emails ca automatically be added as a project or support task. 10 different mail accounts can be set up. How to set this up, see MAIL PROJECT TASK.
In-coming emails ca automatically be added as a project or support task. 10 different mail accounts can be set up. How to set this up, see MAIL PROJECT TASK.
If you reply on a project or support task, where the subject (MAIL PROJECT/SUBJECT) is known (e.g. Project number 2105), the email will be added as task number 2 etc on the project or support screen window.
First in-coming email
When MAIL PROJECT TASK \ ON = 1 and the first email has been registered in Evatic Service as a project or support task, new settings will be activated.
COMPANY XXX \ MAIL PROJECT REPLY \ ON (0 or 1)
COMPANY XXX \ MAIL PROJECT REPLY \ COMPANY XXX \ SUBJECT RECEIPT STD (e.g. Autorespond support, Evatic AS)
COMPANY YYY \ MAIL PROJECT REPLY \ SUBJECT RECEIPT ADD BRACKETS
When Evatic automatically send a reply on received email should the system add square brackets on the around the information about project number ( yes = 1)
COMPANY YYY \ MAIL PROJECT REPLY \ SUBJECT RECEIPT ADD IN SUBJECT
When Evatic automatically send a reply on received email should the system add the subject from the incoming email after the MAIL PROJECT REPLY SUBJECT RECEIPT STD + project number (yes = 1)
COMPANY XXX \ MAIL PROJECT_REPLY \ COMPANY XXX \ MESSAGE RECEIPT STD (e.g. Due to internal training, our mail support service are limited Wednesday and Thursday this week.....)
Bookmark possible for the SUBJECT: #PROJECT NO# and #TASK NO# (those can also be used in the mail text/MESSAGE)
See also the following settings for reply-mail:
COMPANY XXX \ MAIL PROJECT \ RECEIPT ADDRESS
COMPANY XXX \ MAIL PROJECT \ REPLY NAME
COMPANY XXX \ MAIL PROJECT \ REPLY ADDRESS
COMPANY XXX \ MAIL PROJECT \ MAIL CHARSET
Bookmarks for 'Subject' and 'Message':
SUBJECT_RECEIPT_[country no]
MESSAGE_RECEIPT_[country no]
DATE FORMAT_[country no]
(Default: YYYY-MM-DD)
Note! The Bookmark are the same as for:
TECH CALENDAR RECUR TASK TEXT

SAVE MAIL IN

Should Evatic save in-coming mail under the events tab (see Project).
This must be set up for incoming mails:
1. Set up a default incoming folder (e.g. 1_All_2_Incoming_3_From e-mail) (COMPANY XXX \ DEPARTMENT XXX \ MAIL PROJECT TASK NODE or COMPANY XXX MAIL PROJECT TASK\ NODE or NODE SUPPORT (used for the HelpDesk module.)
2. Mail settings which need to be added:
COMPANY XXX \ MAIL PROJECT TASK \ BODY TEXT NO PROJECT (if the mailtext (not subject) contains the text entered here, it will not appear in Evatic Service as a project or support task. E.g. chosen as the deadlock victim#Not a recognizable invoicetype: 3#. To add different text, use #.)(Normally this setting is blank.)
COMPANY XXX \ MAIL PROJECT TASK\ ON (0 or 1)
COMPANY XXX \ MAIL PROJECT TASK\ SERVER (e.g. SMTP.TELENOR.NO)
COMPANY XXX \ MAIL PROJECT TASK\USER (support_kopi@evatic.com)
COMPANY XXX \ MAIL PROJECT TASK \ PASSWORD (If the SMTP-server requires authentication, use this setting. If not, leave it blank.)
COMPANY XXX \ MAIL PROJECT TASK\ TYPE (1 = Project/ 2 = Support)
COMPANY XXX \ MAIL PROJECT TASK(+ _2 --> _10) \ PORT (Port for email by POP3)
COMPANY XXX \ MAIL PROJECT TASK(+ _2 --> _10) \ USE_SSL
Controls whether TLS/SSL is used when reading email from a POP3 server.
Note: Check first to determine if your POP3 server can accept TLS/SSL connections. Also, be sure to set the setting 'PORT' property to the TLS/SSL POP3 port number, which is typically 995.
Set to 1 for SSL, 0 for unencrypted TCP/IP connection.
COMPANY XXX \ MAIL PROJECT TASK\ DEPT FROM MACHINE CONTACT (0 or 1) If 1 the system will check if the contact person is linked to a machine. If this is the case, the system will use the department linked to this machine.
3. Evatic Server must be restarted
Note! All the task will be linked to the right customer in Evatic Service if the email address is known.
4. Enter a contact person and email address (e.g. on a internal customer number) in Evatic Service, so that all the tasks will be addressed here if the email address is unknown. Set also the following setting in Evatic Admin: COMPANY XXX \ MAIL PROJECT TASK \ DEFAULT CUSTOMER MAILADR.
5. Type in the e-mail address for the dummy customer you want to use for in-coming emails when the email address exists more then once. If the email address on the mail exists more than once then a dummy customer is set on the project to inform the Evatic user about the problem (DEFAULT CUST MAILADR MULTI HITS). Note! The user will then have to manually change to the correct customer on this task.
Note! If you reply on a project or support task, where the subject (MAIL PROJECT/SUBJECT) is known (e.g. Project number 2105), the email will be added as task number 2 etc on the project or support screen window.
Note! If the email has a html format, the format is automatically removed and plain text is added instead.
(see COMPANY XXX \ MAIL PROJECT TASK (_2 -> _10) \ REMOVE HTML TAGS = 0)
Extra settings:
COMPANY XXX \ MAIL PROJECT TASK \ ADD ON LAST TASK (unchecked = 0 or checked = 1)
If this setting is 1 the information in the email will be added on the symptom text on the existing task instead of creating a new task when an email is received.
The text in the email before the already existing text will be added first in the symptom text on the last existing task on the project.
Note! If someone is working on the task (Helpdesk - someone has clicked start)(Project - someone has the project open in the project window or the task is checked out to a technician), then a new task will be created
COMPANY XXX \ MAIL PROJECT TASK\ ADD ON LOG INFO CHANGED TASK
(Default value: Task changed - new email)
This setting is used when ADD ON LAST TASK = 1
The setting will add a log when a task is changed because a new email arrived
If this setting has a value and the task is a HelpDesk task then a line in the start/stop list will be added with the information from the setting (and also the date/time this happened)
If this setting has a value and the task is a Project task then a line database log will be added with the information from the setting (and also the date/time this happened)
COMPANY XXX \ MAIL PROJECT TASK \ ADD ON LOG INFO NEW TASK
(Default value: New task added from new email caused by existing task not available)
This setting is used when ADD ON LAST TASK = 1
The setting will add a log when a new task is added because a new email arrived. This will happen if someone is working on the project (Helpdesk - someone has clicked start and not stop)(Project - someone has the project open in the project window or the task is checked out to a technician), then a new task will be created and this log will be added connected to the OLD task.
If this setting has a value and the task is a HelpDesk task then a line in the start/stop list will be added with the information from the setting (and also the date/time this happened)
If this setting has a value and the task is a Project task then a line database log will be added with the information from the setting (and also the date/time this happened)
COMPANY XXX \ MAIL PROJECT TASK \ ADD ON PRIORITY PROJECT ( e.g. Urgent)
This setting is used when ADD ON LAST TASK = 1 and the task belongs to the Project module
If the setting ADD ON PRIORITY PROJECT has a value and the task belongs to the Project module, the field priority will be set to the value from this setting. If the setting is blank the task will be updated with symptom text but still have the same priority as before.
COMPANY XXX \ MAIL PROJECT TASK \ ADD ON PRIORITY SUPPORT( e.g. Urgent)
This setting is used when ADD ON LAST TASK = 1 and the task belongs to the HelpDesk module
If the setting ADD ON PRIORITY SUPPORT has a value and the task belongs to the HelpDesk module, the field priority will be set to the value from this setting. If the setting is blank the task will be updated with symptom text but still have the same priority as before.
COMPANY XXX \ MAIL PROJECT TASK \ ADD ON PROJECT TASK STATUS (e.g. On hold)
This setting is used when ADD ON LAST TASK = 1 and the task belongs to the Project module
If the setting ADD ON_PROJECT TASK STATUS has a value and the task belongs to the Project module, the field Task status will be set to the value from this setting. If the setting is blank the task will be updated with symptom text but still have the same task status as before (this is not the same as open/closed).
COMPANY XXX \ MOVE TO FOLDER IF ON HOLD
This setting is used when ADD ON LAST TASK = 1 and the task is on hold.(HelpDesk module)
If the setting MOVE TO FOLDER IF ON HOLD has a value and the task is set on hold it will be removed from on hold. If the setting is blank the task will be updated with symptom text but still be on hold.
If the value of the setting is only 1 it will be moved back to the original folder (before it was set on hold)
Any other value the system will see the value as the new folder it should be moved to.
COMPANY XXX \ MOVE TO FOLDER IF PAUSED (e.g. 1_All_2_Support Team_3_Paused)
This setting is used when ADD ON LAST TASK = 1 and the task is paused. (HelpDesk module)
If the setting MOVE TO FOLDER IF PAUSED has a value and the task is in the paused folder it will be moved to the folder in this setting. If the setting is blank the task will be updated with symptom text but still be in the paused folder.
COMPANY XXX \ MOVE TO FOLDER PROJECT (e.g. 1_All_2_Incoming)
This setting is used when ADD ON LAST TASK = 1 and the task belongs to the Project module
If the setting MOVE TO FOLDER PROJECT has a value and the task belongs to the Project module it will be moved to the folder in this setting. If the setting is blank the task will be updated with symptom text but still be in the same folder as before.
If the setting
GLOBAL USER \ TREE \ FOR EACH DEPARTMENT = 1 then use the settings:
MAIL PROJECT TASK (-10) \ MOVE TO FOLDER PROJECT YYY etc, where YYY is the department number
COMPANY XXX \ MOVE TO FOLDER SUPPORT (e.g. 1_All_2_Support Team)
This setting is used when ADD ON LAST TASK = 1 and the task is a normal HelpDesk task (not on hold and not paused).
If the setting MOVE TO FOLDER SUPPORT has a value and the task is a HelpDesk task it will be moved to the folder in this setting. If the setting is blank the task will be updated with symptom text but still be in the same folder as before.

SERVER TYPE

How should we connect to the server?

• POP (Basic auth.) (0)
  Connect to a POP server using username and password
  
• POP Office365(oAuth2) (0)
  Connect to Office365 POP server using oAuth2.
  For this type of connection you can leave the password field blank.
  For more information on how to set up Evatic to read emails from Office365 using oAuth2, please read article about this topic on https://evatic.asolvi.com/
  Short list of what you must do: (more detailed description is available in the customer portal)
  - You must create a App registrations in Azure
  - This app registration must have certain permissions
  - From Azure copy your client id and client secret
  - After you change this setting in Evatic Admin Web, you must afterwards restart Evatic Server in normal mode (not as a service) - (This is something you must do only once to be able to login to Microsoft and consent for the user to get access to read emails, after this process is done you can stop Evatic Server and start it again as a process)
  - There you will be asked to put in id's and keys for your App registration from Azure
  - Then Evatic Server will show re-direct you to Microsoft where you must login with the user (email address) that the application should be allowed to read.
  

MAIL SPECIAL ADDRESS

METER READING SPECIAL ADDRESS

Example: METER READING SPECIAL ADDRESS = support@evatic.com
Do you want to have a different text etc on some email addresses?
If you set this setting to for instance @test.com then all email addresses that ends with @test.com will be treated differently.

READING LETTER ALT BODY

Body on meter reading letters with special addresses. (see also COMPANY XXX \ MAIL SPECIAL ADDRESS \ METER READING SPECIAL ADDRESS)
In this setting you can use the same bookmarks as in the setting: COMPANY XXX \ MAIL \ READING LETTER ALT BODY. If you do not want any body text you insert a space (' ') in this setting.

READING LETTER ALT MACHINE BODY

Machine body on meter reading letters with special addresses. (see also COMPANY XXX \ MAIL SPECIAL ADDRESS \ METER READING SPECIAL ADDRESS)
In this setting you can use the same bookmarks as in the setting: COMPANY XXX \ MAIL \ READING LETTER ALT MACHINE BODY. If you do not want any body text you insert a space (' ') in this setting.

READING LETTER ALT METER BODY

Meter body on meter reading letters with special addresses. (see also COMPANY XXX \ MAIL SPECIAL ADDRESS \ METER READING SPECIAL ADDRESS)
In this setting you can use the same bookmarks as in the setting: COMPANY XXX \ MAIL \ READING LETTER ALT METER BODY. If you do not want any body text you insert a space (' ') in this setting.

READING LETTER ALT SUBJECT

Subject on meter reading letters with special addresses (see also COMPANY XXX \ MAIL SPECIAL ADDRESS \ METER READING SPECIAL ADDRESS).

In this setting you can use the same bookmarks as in the setting: COMPANY XXX \ MAIL \ READING LETTER ALT SUBJECT.

READING LETTER ATTACHED

Do you want to add the meter reading letter as a file attached to the email on meter reading letters with special addresses? (see also COMPANY XXX \ MAIL SPECIAL ADDRESS \ METER READING SPECIAL ADDRESS). Check this setting to be able to attach the meter reading letter as a file.

READING LETTER ATTACHED FILENAME

Filename on meter reading letters attached as a file on meter reading letters with special addresses. Example:
Meter reading letter #CUSTOMER_NAME# #YYYY-MM-DD
Available bookmarks:
#CUSTOMER_NAME#
#CUSTOMER_NO#
#CONTRACT_NO#
#DD# (bookmarks that include DD will be replaced with the date in the local dateformat)

READING LETTER ATTACHED FILETYPE

File type on meter reading letters attached as a file on meter reading letters with special addresses. Normally this should be set to PDF.

MAIL SUPPLIER ORDER

BODY

Example: BODY =
Your order <ORDER NO> <ORDER TYPE_TEXT>
Dated: <DELIVERY_DATE>
We need the following extra goods.......
In this setting you can set your own format on emails to suppliers.
If the setting COMPANY YYY \ Evatic Service \ USE MULTILANGUAGE EMAILS ON is set to 1 you can also set settings like:
COMPANY YYY \ MAIL SUPPLIER ORDER \ XX BODY - where XX is the country code
Datafields that can be used for this setting.
<SUPPLIER_NO>
<SUPPLIER_NAME>
<OWN_CUSTOMER_NO> - suppliers customer number
<CONTACT>
<ORDER_INFORMATION>
<ORDER TYPE>
<ORDER TYPE_TEXT> (RETURN ORDER, DIRECT DELIVERY etc)
<ORDER NO>
<DEPT>
<DEPARTMENT_NAME>
<MEANS_OF_DELIVERY>
<MEANS_OF_DELIVERY_DESC>
<DELIVERY_DATE>
<TOTAL_SUM>
Supplier address information:
<FAX_NO>
<PHONE_NO>
<ADDRESS_NAME>
<ADDRESS_1>
<ADDRESS_2>
<ADDRESS_3>
<STATE>
<COUNTRY>
<POSTAL_CODE>
<POST_LOCATION>
<EMAIL>
<ROW_DETAILS> - bookmark used where you want to insert data from the setting BODY DETAIL

BODY DETAIL

Example: BODY DETAIL =
Article no Own Article no Description Stock Qty Cost price
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<ARTICLE NO> <OWN_ARTICLE NO> <ARTICLE_DESCRIPTION> <ON_STOCK> <TO_ORDER> <COST PRICE>
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Total sum: <LINE_SUM>

In this setting you can set your own format on emails to suppliers.
If the setting COMPANY YYY \ Evatic Service \ USE MULTILANGUAGE EMAILS ON is set to 1 you can also set settings like:
COMPANY YYY \ MAIL SUPPLIER ORDER \ XX BODY DETAIL - where XX is the country code
The information from this setting will be show information for each row in the supplier order. The information will be put into the body of the email where the bookmark <ROW_DETAILS> is used.
Datafields that can be used for this setting.
<ARTICLE NO>
<ARTICLE_DESCRIPTION>
<OWN_ARTICLE NO>
<ON_STOCK> - Amount on stock
<TO_ORDER> - qty to order from supplier
<STOCK_NO>
<DESCRIPTION> - Stock description
<LOCATION> - location on stock
<COST PRICE>
<DISCOUNT_COST PRICE>
<DISCOUNT_COST PRICE2>
<COST PRICE_DISC> - cost price with disc
<LINE_SUM> - Sum line
<UNIT_PURCHASE>
<UNIT>

BODY DIRECT DELIVERY

Example: BODY DIRECT DELIVERY =
Order: <ORDER NO>
Ordertype:<ORDER TYPE_TEXT>
Dated: <DELIVERY_DATE>
We would like to order the following to <DEL_CUSTOMER_NAME>.
In this setting you can set your own format on emails to suppliers.
If the setting COMPANY YYY \ Evatic Service \ USE MULTILANGUAGE EMAILS ON is set to 1 you can also set settings like:
COMPANY YYY \ MAIL SUPPLIER ORDER \ XX BODY DIRECT DELIVERY - where XX is the country code
Datafields that can be used for this setting.
<DEL_CUSTOMER_NO>
<DEL_CUSTOMER_NAME>
<DEL_ADDRESS_1>
<DEL_ADDRESS_2>
<DEL_ADDRESS_3>
<DEL_STATE>
<DEL_POSTAL_CODE>
<DEL_POSTAL_DESCRIPTION>
<DEL_PHONE_NO>
<DEL_FAX_NO>
<DEL_COUNTRY_NO>
<DEL_COUNTRY_NAME>
+ See settings for BODY

BODY DIRECT DELIVERY DETAILS

Example: BODY DIRECT DELIVERY DETAILS=
Article no Own Article no Description Stock Qty Cost price
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<ARTICLE NO> <OWN_ARTICLE NO> <ARTICLE_DESCRIPTION> <ON_STOCK> <TO_ORDER> <COST PRICE>
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
In this setting you can set your own format on emails to suppliers.
If the setting COMPANY YYY \ Evatic Service \ USE MULTILANGUAGE EMAILS ON is set to 1 you can also set settings like:
COMPANY YYY \ MAIL SUPPLIER ORDER \ XX BODY DIRECT DELIVERY_DETAIL - where XX is the country code
The information from this setting will be show information for each row in the supplier order. The information will be put into the body of the email where the bookmark <ROW_DETAILS> is used.
Datafields that can be used for this setting. See setting for BODY DETAIL

BODY RETURN

Example: BODY RETURN =
Order: <ORDER NO>
Ordertype:<ORDER TYPE_TEXT>
Dated: <DELIVERY_DATE>
The articles need to be returned due to.......
In this setting you can set your own format on emails to suppliers.
If the setting COMPANY YYY \ Evatic Service \ USE MULTILANGUAGE EMAILS ON is set to 1 you can also set settings like:
COMPANY YYY \ MAIL SUPPLIER ORDER \ XX BODY RETURN - where XX is the country code
Datafields that can be used for this setting, see setting for BODY

BODY RETURN DETAIL

Example: BODY RETURN DETAIL =
Article no Description Stock Qty Type
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<ARTICLE NO> <ARTICLE_DESCRIPTION> <ON_STOCK> <TO_ORDER> <RETURN_TYPE>
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
In this setting you can set your own format on emails to suppliers.
If the setting COMPANY YYY \ Evatic Service \ USE MULTILANGUAGE EMAILS ON is set to 1 you can also set settings like:
COMPANY YYY \ MAIL SUPPLIER ORDER \ XX BODY RETURN DETAIL - where XX is the country code
The information from this setting will be show information for each row in the supplier order. The information will be put into the body of the email where the bookmark <ROW_DETAILS> is used.
Datafields that can be used for this setting.
<RETURN_REFERENCE>
<RETURN_TYPE> (N - New, W - Warranty)
<RETURNED_SERIAL NO>
+ See setting for BODY DETAIL

GREETING

Example: GREETING = Best regards from the service department
The greeting that is placed at the bottom of the mail to be sent to the supplier when ordering articles.

REPLY ADDRESS

Example: REPLY ADDRESS = support@evatic.com
Indicates the, from address when sending e-mail from Evatic to a supplier.

SUBJECT

Example: SUBJECT = Purchase order:
Displayed as the subject of the mail sent from Evatic to the supplier. This text is followed by the supplier name and today's date.
Note! The layout can not be changed for this email, but a PDF can be added as attachment to the email.
COMPANY XXX \ STOCK ADMIN \ SUPPLIER ORDER MAIL ATTACH ON
COMPANY XXX \ STOCK ADMIN \ SUPPLIER ORDER MAIL F NAME
COMPANY XXX \ STOCK ADMIN \ SUPPLIER ORDER MAIL RET F NAME

MAIL TECHNICIAN

GREETING

Example: GREETING = Best regards from the service department
The greeting placed at the bottom of the mail to be sent from Project to a technician.

RECEIPT ADDRESS

Example: RECEIPT ADDRESS = support@evatic.com
When sending a project via mail to a technician from Evatic, you can set up this address to receive a copy of all the projects sent via mail.

REPLY ADDRESS

Example: REPLY ADDRESS = support@evatic.com
Displayed as the sender address when sending e-mail to a technician from Evatic.

REPLY NAME

Example: REPLY NAME = Service department
Displayed as the sender name when sending e-mail to a technician from Evatic

SUBJECT

Example: SUBJECT = Project confirmation:
Displayed as the subject when sending e-mail to a technician from Evatic

MANDATORY FIELDS

ARTICLE

Set additional text-field or combo-box to be mandatory in the Article module. 
Syntax: <Field_name1>=<your_label1>;<Field_name2>=<your_label2> 
If the user does not fill out all the mandatory fields, a pop-up will display: "Mandatory field missing:<your_label1>,<your_label2>". 
Example: cmbAccountNo=Account no

CONTRACT

Set additional text-field or combo-box to be mandatory in the Contract module. 
Syntax: <Field_name1>=<your_label1>;<Field_name2>=<your_label2> 
If the user does not fill out all the mandatory fields, a pop-up will display: "Mandatory field missing:<your_label1>,<your_label2>".
Example: txtInvoiceInfo=General text on invoice

CONTRACT FP

Set additional text-field or combo-box to be mandatory in the Contract module (Fixed Price tab). 
Syntax: <Field_name1>=<your_label1>;<Field_name2>=<your_label2> 
If the user does not fill out all the mandatory fields, a pop-up will display: "Mandatory field missing:<your_label1>,<your_label2>".
Example: txtCostPrice=Cost Price

CUSTOMERTOTAL

Set additional text-field or combo-box to be mandatory in the Customer module. 
Syntax: <Field_name1>=<your_label1>;<Field_name2>=<your_label2> 
If the user does not fill out all the mandatory fields, a pop-up will display: "Mandatory field missing:<your_label1>,<your_label2>".
Example: adrAddress.Address1=Adress 1

MACHINE

Set additional text-field or combo-box to be mandatory in the Machine module. 
Syntax: <Field_name1>=<your_label1>;<Field_name2>=<your_label2> 
If the user does not fill out all the mandatory fields, a pop-up will display: "Mandatory field missing:<your_label1>,<your_label2>".
Example: txtLocation=Location

ORDER

Set additional text-field or combo-box to be mandatory in the Order module. 
Syntax: <Field_name1>=<your_label1>;<Field_name2>=<your_label2> 
If the user does not fill out all the mandatory fields, a pop-up will display: "Mandatory field missing:<your_label1>,<your_label2>".
Example: cmbOurReference=Contact person
(from Order heading)

PERIODVOLUME

Set additional text-field or combo-box to be mandatory in the Contract module (volume row). 
Syntax: [Field_name1]=[Field1 label];[Field_name2]=[Field2 label] 
If the user does not fill out all the mandatory fields, a pop-up will display: "Mandatory field missing:[Field1 label],[Field2 label]".
Example: txtContractPeriod=Contract lenght

PROJECTDETAILS

Set additional text-field or combo-box to be mandatory in the Project module (Details tab). 
Syntax: <Field_name1>=<your_label1>;<Field_name2>=<your_label2> 
If the user does not fill out all the mandatory fields, a pop-up will display: "Mandatory field missing:<your_label1>,<your_label2>".
Example: cmbContact=Contact person

PROJECTDETAILS SOLUTION

Set additional text-field or combo-box to be mandatory in the Project module (Details tab). 
Syntax: <Field_name1>=<your_label1>;<Field_name2>=<your_label2> 
If the user does not fill out all the mandatory fields, a pop-up will display: "Mandatory field missing:<your_label1>,<your_label2>".
Example: cmbSymptomCode(3)=Symptom code 3

PROJECTDETAILS TASK

Set additional text-field or combo-box to be mandatory in the Project module (Task tab). 
Syntax: <Field_name1>=<your_label1>;<Field_name2>=<your_label2> 
If the user does not fill out all the mandatory fields, a pop-up will display: "Mandatory field missing:<your_label1>,<your_label2>".
Example: cmbSymptomCode(3)=Symptom code 3

SALEPROJECT

Set additional text-field or combo-box to be mandatory in the Salesman Tools module (Sales project). 
Syntax: <Field_name1>=<your_label1>;<Field_name2>=<your_label2> 
If the user does not fill out all the mandatory fields, a pop-up will display: "Mandatory field missing:<your_label1>,<your_label2>". 
Example: cmbCustomerReference=Contact;txtCustomerReference=Reference;

MAP INTEGRATION

ADDRESS SEARCH METHOD

Example: ADDRESS SEARCH METHOD = 0
This setting is used to remember last choice in the user interface. There are two check boxes:
- Search by country, adress1 and post location (= 0).
- Search by country, adress1 and post code (= 1).

GPS COORD MINUTES VALID

From 1 -> X (number of minutes)
If the GPS position is older than <GPS COORD MINUTES VALID> minutes then the
system will use the position of the last task as the position of the technician.
If the setting COMPANY XXX\ MAP INTEGRATION \ GPS COORD ON = 1 there will
be a new column in the 'Assign' list (Technician list) in project summary.
The new column is called 'Last position' and will show the time (hour:minute) of the last position.
If there is no position from today it will be blank (with red background color)
If the position is older than <GPS COORD MINUTES VALID> the column will have red
background color

GPS COORD ON

Turn on/off the function to send GPS coordinates from Evatic Map

SHOW STREET NO BEFORE ADDRESS

When the map solution shows result from address search should street number be presented before the street name?

START FILE

Example: START FILE = CX=10.73946&CY=59.91241&SC=8
The first map to be opened when the program starts.

TASK RESOURCE LIMIT 1

Example: TASK RESOURCE LIMIT 1 = 5
Number of assigned jobs, shown as a color on technician in the window (green, yellow, red)

TASK RESOURCE LIMIT 2

Example: TASK RESOURCE LIMIT 2 = 10
Number of assigned jobs, shown as a color on technician in the window (green, yellow, red)

UTF8 DECODE

Should the system decode the address text from UTF8?

MODEL

SHOW COMPETENCE GROUP

Should the <Competence group> tab be displayed in the model dialog in Evatic?

SHOW CONTRACT TEMPLATE

Should the <Contract template> tab be displayed in the model dialog in Evatic?

SHOW DOCUMENTS

Should the <Documents> tab be displayed in the model dialog in Evatic?

SHOW SYMPTOM HELP TEXT

Should the <Symptom help text> tab be displayed in the model dialog in Evatic?

SHOW WARRENTY

Should the <Warranty> tab be displayed in the model dialog in Evatic?

ORDER

ADD TEXT SPLIT BETWEEN WORDS

Should the order text (symptom/action text) be split between words. If the max value is reached, the system will look for the nearest space or line break.

ADD TEXT SPLIT LENGTH

Example: ADD TEXT SPLIT LENGTH = 50
It is possible to have a limited number of characters (symptom/action text) for each order line. Minimum 1 and maximum 250 characters.
Splitting of order text lines from mobile units.
When the automatic added textlines is inserted on the order from mobile units, these text lines are now also splitted with the same rules as for Evatic Service.

ADD TEXT SPLIT LINEFEED

If checked the text will then be splitted where you have a line break in the symptom/action text, even if the max value is not reached.
Splitting of order text lines from mobile units.
When the automatic added textlines is inserted on the order from mobile units, these text lines are now also splitted with the same rules as for Evatic Service.

ADD TEXT SPLIT MAX ROWS

Example: ADD TEXT SPLIT MAX ROWS = 5
It is possible to have a limited number of order lines which include symptom/action text . Minimum 1 and maximum 16 lines.
Splitting of order text lines from mobile units.
When the automatic added textlines is inserted on the order from mobile units, these text lines are now also splitted with the same rules as for Evatic Service.

ALLOW CHANGE COST PRICE AG LINES

Should it be possible to change the cost price on aggregated articles.

ALLOW CHANGE QTY AG DOWN

Should it be possible to change the quantity down on aggregated articles.

ALLOW CHANGE QTY AG UP

Should it be possible to change the quantity up on aggregated articles.

ALLOW DELETE AG LINES

Should it be possible to delete aggregated article lines.

When the setting is not checked only the main virtual article can be deleted.

ALLOW OPEN INVOICED ORDERS

If this is set to 0, it is not possible to use the key combination ALT + F5 to open orders with status F or FP where an invoice already has been created. If setting is checked, users are allowed to re-open already invoiced orders by using ALT + F5.

Allowing re-opening of invoiced orders can cause inconsistency in the invoice number series if this function isn't used properly. Re-opening an invoiced order might conflict with legal terms, and Evatic cannot be liable for any consequences caused by using this function.

AMALGAMATE ORDERS

Should it be possible to amalgamate orders in Evatic Service?

ARTICLE DEFAULT INVOICEABLE

When creating an order and the customer is not connected to a contract, you can choose to have the order line set invoice able or not, as default.

ARTICLE STATUS ON

If checked, you will have a status column on each order line that shows color with the stock status of the articles not delivered.
(Only in use if stock admin is turned on).

CHANGE OF INVOICE RECEIVER

Should it be possible to change invoice receiver?

CONTRACT TYPE ENABLE

Should it be possible to change the contract type on an order?

If the user can change the contract type, this will affect the new entered orderlines but not the existing orderlines.

CONTRACT TYPE ENABLE PROJECT

Should it be possible to change the contract type on an order coming from the project module (service order)?

CONTRACT TYPE ONLY VALID

Should only contract types linked to the customer/machine (see contract) be visible in the drop down list.

If checked, the setting CONTRACT TYPE ENABLE must also be checked.

CUSTOMER NO CASH CUSTOMER

Example: CUSTOMER NO CASH CUSTOMER = 1040
When creating an order with this customer number, you are able to change the invoice address (e.g. type a new address). The invoice address is only saved in the order dialog screen for this order and not added to the addresses in the customer dialog screen.

By using # between each customer number, you can add several customer numbers here (e.g. 1040#1041#1055)

DISCOUNT QTY CHANGE WARNING

Show a pop up warning when changing the quantity for order lines with discount?

DUE DATE CHECK WEEKDAY

This setting relates to the orders due date. If the due date is on a Saturday or a Sunday, and setting is checked, Evatic sets the due date to the Monday after.

EXTERNAL SOLD ITEMS MA PROPERTY

Example: EXTERNAL SOLD ITEMS MA PROPERTY= Warranty type
To copy the field 'Warranty text' from External sold items to the Machine property, add the Machine property description here.

EXTERNAL USE INV CUST NO

When prices, stock amount etc are coming from a external system, and the setting is not checked, the customer number on the General tab is used. If the customer number on the invoicing tab should be used, this setting must be checked.

FINISH LINKED PROJECTS ON

Should Evatic ask if tasks linked to the order should be finished at the same time as you complete the order. (If it is only one task linked to the project, the project will also be finished.).

FIXED PRICE ARTICLE NO

Example: FIXED PRICE ARTICLE NO = RT4523
When creating an order with a fixed amount value, Evatic automatically add an order line with this article number and amount. Add the setting for article number to use for this order line.

FIXED PRICE SET NOT INV

When creating a fixed price order line automatically from the project module (or Evatic Mobile), should the service order line be set not invoicable or invoicable? Invoiceable if not checked.

FORM CAPTION EXTRA

Example: FORM CAPTION EXTRA = (default blank)
Setting to decide witch information should be added to the order blue title line. Bookmark that can be used:
<CUSTOMER_NO>
<CUSTOMER_NAME>
<INFO_[01..10]>

FROM TO TEXT

Example: FROM TO TEXT = -->
If customers need to change the text used to separate intervals on order lines. The default values is ' --> '.

HEADING ORDER CONFIRMATION

Example: HEADING ORDER CONFIRMATION = Order confirmation
What the heading should be for printing order confirmations.

INCLUDED ARTICLES AUTOSPLIT

If number of included articles on a contract is exceeded, Evatic will tell you about this when an order is finished. This function can automatically split the order line in two lines. One line for the number of articles still a part of the included article period and one line with the articles that are invoice able. Checking this setting, turns the function on. You can read more about included articles in Evatic help (Chapter: Contract->Articles included).

INVOICE HEADING CREDIT

Example: INVOICE HEADING CREDIT = Credit
What the heading should be for printing credit invoices.

INVOICE HEADING INVOICE

Example: INVOICE HEADING INVOICE = Invoice
What the heading should be for printing invoices.

INVOICE HEADING PREVIEW

Example: INVOICE HEADING PREVIEW = Preview
What the heading should be for order printing from preview.

INVOICE NO

Example: INVOICE NO = 156232
Next invoice number.

INVOICE NO EACH DEPT

Invoice number for different departments. NB! Under department the different invoice numbers can be added ( = The next invoice number for invoices created in Evatic Service)

KID NO SETTING

Example: KID NO SETTING = 5CCCCIIII
Setting to set a special format for the kid number on invoices. This setting can have the following values:

• C = replaces the customer number (1 value for each number)
• I = replaces the invoice number (1 value for each number)

The other values will be as they are entered. Note! If the customer/invoice number are shorter, they will be replaced with 0.
Data field for the report designer = KIDNoSettingMOD10

MACHINE ACC ONLY SERIAL NO

When the system creates machines from a order (normal order) the lines after the machine will be added as accessories.
Should only articles with serial number be added as accessories?
The function only inserts accessories for order lines after the machine until a text line or a new machine is reached

MAX LENGTH CUST REF

Example: MAX LENGTH CUST REF = 10
Max length on customer reference

MAX LENGTH CUST REF INFO

Example: MAX LENGTH CUST REF INFO = 10
Max length on customer reference info

MAX LENGTH OUR REF

Example: MAX LENGTH OUR REF = 10
Max length on our reference

ON ACCOUNT ARTICLE NO

Example: ON ACCOUNT ARTICLE NO = 1500
When creating a on account invoice, Evatic automatically creates the on account invoice with this article number. Add the article number to use.

ON ACCOUNT COLOR

Example: ON ACCOUNT COLOR = (select color from the screen)
When creating on account invoices, which color should the order lines be set to (see main order).

ON ACCOUNT INFO 01

Example: ON ACCOUNT INFO 01 = PO-NR 
Within the customer account dialog it is possible to add extra 6 fields which can be used freely. The text entered here will be the field name for the field. Only the settings with a value will be displayed. 
For ON ACCOUNT INFO 05 and ON ACCOUNT INFO 06 they are drop down list that can be used to enter pre-defines values (see ON ACCOUNT INFO 05..06 VALUES)

ON ACCOUNT INFO 02

Example: ON ACCOUNT INFO 02 = PO-NR 
Within the customer account dialog it is possible to add extra 6 fields which can be used freely. The text entered here will be the field name for the field. Only the settings with a value will be displayed. 
For ON ACCOUNT INFO 05 and ON ACCOUNT INFO 06 they are drop down list that can be used to enter pre-defines values (see ON ACCOUNT INFO 05..06 VALUES)

ON ACCOUNT INFO 03

Example: ON ACCOUNT INFO 03 = PO-NR 
Within the customer account dialog it is possible to add extra 6 fields which can be used freely. The text entered here will be the field name for the field. Only the settings with a value will be displayed. 
For ON ACCOUNT INFO 05 and ON ACCOUNT INFO 06 they are drop down list that can be used to enter pre-defines values (see ON ACCOUNT INFO 05..06 VALUES)

ON ACCOUNT INFO 04

Example: ON ACCOUNT INFO 04 = PO-NR 
Within the customer account dialog it is possible to add extra 6 fields which can be used freely. The text entered here will be the field name for the field. Only the settings with a value will be displayed. 
For ON ACCOUNT INFO 05 and ON ACCOUNT INFO 06 they are drop down list that can be used to enter pre-defines values (see ON ACCOUNT INFO 05..06 VALUES)

ON ACCOUNT INFO 05

Example: ON ACCOUNT INFO 05 = PO-NR 
Within the customer account dialog it is possible to add extra 6 fields which can be used freely. The text entered here will be the field name for the field. Only the settings with a value will be displayed. 
For ON ACCOUNT INFO 05 and ON ACCOUNT INFO 06 they are drop down list that can be used to enter pre-defines values (see ON ACCOUNT INFO 05..06 VALUES)

ON ACCOUNT INFO 05 VALUES

Example: ON ACCOUNT INFO 05 VALUES = Bank;Post;Manual
Pre-defines values for the settings ON ACCOUNT INFO 05 and ON ACCOUNT INFO 06 (see customer account dialog)

ON ACCOUNT INFO 06

Example: ON ACCOUNT INFO 06 = PO-NR 
Within the customer account dialog it is possible to add extra 6 fields which can be used freely. The text entered here will be the field name for the field. Only the settings with a value will be displayed. 
For ON ACCOUNT INFO 05 and ON ACCOUNT INFO 06 they are drop down list that can be used to enter pre-defines values (see ON ACCOUNT INFO 05..06 VALUES)

ON ACCOUNT INFO 06 VALUES

Example: ON ACCOUNT INFO 06 VALUES = Bank;Post;Manual
Pre-defines values for the settings ON ACCOUNT INFO 05 and ON ACCOUNT INFO 06 (see customer account dialog)

ON ACCOUNT OL TEXT

Example: ON ACCOUNT OL TEXT = On account invoice <ORDER NO> (= 'On account invoice [1234])
When creating on account invoices which order text lines should automatically be displayed on the invoice. A free text or a combination of free text and bookmarks can be set up here.
Following bookmarks can be used:
<DEPT>
<ORDER NO>
<CUSTOMER_NO>
<CUSTOMER_NAME>
<ORDER TYPE>
<DELIVERY_NAME>
<DELIVERY_ADDRESS1>
<DELIVERY_ADDRESS2>
<DELIVERY_ADDRESS3>
<DELIVERY_POSTALCODE>
<DELIVERY_POSTLOCATION>
<CUSTOMER_REFERENCE>
<OUR REFERENCE>
<INVOICE_NAME>
<INVOICE_ADDRESS1>
<INVOICE_ADDRESS2>
<INVOICE_ADDRESS3>
<INVOICE_POSTALCODE>
<POST_LOCATION>
<INFO 01>
<INFO 02>
<INFO 03>
<INFO 04>
<INFO 05>
<INFO 06>
<INFO 07>
<INFO 08>
<INFO 09>
<INFO 10>
<INFORMATION>
<CUSTOMER_ORDER_INFO>
<OBJ_DATE>

ORDER CONF AS EMAIL FILE NAME

Example: ORDER CONF AS EMAIL FILE NAME = Order confirmation
Setting for the file name on the PDF attachment send by email (the file name will also include order number and .PDF)
Example: Order confirmation_2353.PDF

ORDER CONF AS EMAIL SUBJECT

Example: ORDER CONF AS EMAIL SUBJECT = Order confirmation for
Displays as the subject when sending e-mail from Evatic to a customer. This text will be followed by order number.

ORDER LINE SHOW DATE

Should it be possible to see date and time on each order line.

ORDER LINE SHOW TECHNICIAN

Should it be possible to see technician (column with technician number and name) on each order line.

ORDER LINE SUPPLIER ON

Should it be possible to select supplier on the orderlines?

ORDER NO

Example: ORDER NO = 156232
Next order number.

ORDER SUPPORT MATERIEL ARTICLE NO

Example: ORDER SUPPORT MATERIEL ARTICLE NO = Art123
This is the article number to be used on article lines that are produced by the automatic calculation of support material. See also Support Materiel.

ORDER SUPPORT MATERIEL ON

Should Evatic automatically calculate support material? See also Support Materiel.

ORDERS FOR PRINT SHOW ADDRESSES

Show the invoice address and the delivery address for each 'order row' in the complete & print window

ORDERS FOR PRINT SHOW CONTRACT

Show the contract number for each 'order row' in the complete & print window
When checked the contract number (if the order is connected to a contract) will be visible. Also a right click function to open the contract window is added

Only show for orders created from the contract module.

ORDERS FOR PRINT SHOW PROJECT

Should the following 3 columns be displayed under Order/Complete and print (Evatic Service)? Project number/task
Project address name
Project folder

PACKING SLIP NO

Example: PACKING SLIP NO = 180
Next packing slip number.

PART INVOICE ON

Should it be possible to part invoice or not.

PREPAID UNIT AUTOSPLIT

Order row auto split function for orders where prepaid unit account is exceeded.
When checked, then hours that exceeds the current account is split onto the next valid one.

PRINT ECO TEXT

Example: PRINT ECO TEXT = Eco contribution
Enter the text you want to use for the description of ECO Tax

PRINT MULTIPLE SERIAL NUMBER SEP

Example: PRINT MULTIPLE SERIAL NUMBER SEP = 0
N = new line, = , + space, other characters will also work in the same way: character + space.

PRINT SERIAL NO ONE ROW

When printing invoices. Should equal article numbers be added as one row and the serial numbers be added as text lines underneath or not. E.g. 10 articles line will be as one row with qty = 10.

PRINT SERIAL NO ONE ROW P S

When printing packing slip. Should equal article numbers be added as one row and the serial numbers be added as text lines underneath or not. E.g. 10 articles line will be as one row with qty = 10.

PRINT SHOW DIALOG

Should the print dialog window open when printing invoices.

PRINT TYPE MULTIPLE

Should one by one order/invoice be printed, when printing from the complete and print screen dialog or all orders (invoices) at the same time?

SAVE ONLY CHANGES

Should it be possible to save only changes on the orderlines.

SEARCH PACKING SLIP INFO

Should it be possible to limit on packing slip number and tracking number, as well as see those two fields in the order search (F9).

SEARCH SALE PROJECT NO

Should it be possible to search for sale project number in the order search?

SHOW EXTERNAL SOLD ITEMS

A dedicated table for showing and importing machines and accessories sold in an external system. If this table is updated from an external ERP system, machines with accessories can be created with a click in Evatic.

SHOW PROJECT DOCUMENTS

Should the documents stored under the Events/Documents tab (see Project module) also be shown under the Document tab in the order module?

SHOW PROPERTIES

Should the order properties field be displayed within the Order dialog in Evatic?

SHOW SUM SERVICES BUTTON

Should it be possible to summarize service article lines within the Order dialog in Evatic?

SHOW SUPPLIER ORDER STATUS

Show a tab with connected supplier orders on the order window?

SUPPORT MATERIAL

This is the dialog to assist you in setting up support material as a percentage of the total order value. If ORDER SUPPORT MATERIEL ON = 1 and an article number exists in ORDER SUPPORT MATERIEL ARTICLE Evatic will automatically add a new article line into the order upon completion of the order. This article line will use the article number set up and the order value will be; order value * % /100 where % is the percentage that agrees with the above list.
Example:
1. If you have a list as the one above, an order value of 420 will give you a new article line with (42020/100) 84 as the sales price.
2. If you have a list as the one above, an order value of 800 will give you a new article line with (80010/100) 80 as the sales price.
3. If you have a list as the one above, an order value of 12000 will give you a new article line with (12000*2.5/100) 300 as the sales price.

USE COST PRICE FOR SUPPLIER BY DEFAULT

Setting that decide if the default value for "Use cost price for supplier" should be true or false. The value in the setting is used when the user add a new order line in the order window in Evatic 8.

USE CUSTOMER DEPT ON

If checked, the system uses the department from customer, if not checked it uses the department from user.

USE CUSTOMER REFERENCE

Should the field 'customer reference' automatically be field in with the first contact person in the list when selecting customer?

USE DEL ADDR FROM PROJECT

Should the delivery address be set automatically whenever order is created from the project module. The system will use the same delivery address as chosen on the project task (regardless if the customer has several delivery addresses). If not checked the address must be selected manually.

USE SALESMAN FROM CONTRACT

Should the salesman linked to the contract be used on the orders? If checked, this salesman will be shown on sales orders, service orders, orders from mobile and orders from web.
Note! A machine must be linked to the order. If not, the salesman from the customer card is used.

USE SALESMAN FROM USER

Should the salesman linked to the user be used on the orders or the salesman linked to the customer. If checked, salesman linked to the user, otherwise salesman linked to the customer.

USE SWISS FIELDS

If checked, the following fields will be available for print of invoice (not preview):

• Swiss_TotalSum_full
• Swiss_TotalSum_odd
• Swiss_ReferenceNo
• Swiss_ESR

WARNING CUSTOMER WARRANTY

Should a pop up warning appear when completing an order, to inform that the machine is covered by customer warranty (less or equal to the invoice date)?

WARNING NO ARTICLE ORDER LINES

Should a pop up warning appear to ask the user: 'Are you sure parts are used on this order?', when he press F12 (= save/complete). If the user press No, the order window is activated and he can add the parts. If he press Yes, he will come back to the F12 (save/complete window).

WORK HOUR LIST ON

Should a work list (with the new columns calendar hour, status, last changed date, last changed name, last changed comment) be visible in the order module or not.

WORK HOUR QTY CHK ON DELETE

Should it be possible to delete service articles lines.
If checked, the system will check if there are any work hours (> 0) on the orderline and the user is not allowed to delete the line.

WORK HOUR STATUS CHK ON DELETE

Example: WORK HOUR STATUS CHK ON DELETE = #E#
Should the system check the status on the order lines in order for the user to delete or not. If blank, the order can be deleted, if statuses are entered, the user will not be able to delete.
E.g. Statuses: #E#P#R# (E = exported, P = project leader has approved the working hours, R= the resource/technician has approved the working hours)

XML EXPORT 0 ORDERS

If you have selected that all orders should be exported with XML (on the Advanced-tab on the Customer), this setting decides if only invoices/credits should be exported.
If checked, all orders (also 0 orders) are exported.
If not checked, only invoice/credit are exported.

ORDER COPY

H COPY INFO 01

Within the order dialog it is possible to add extra 10 fields (see ORDER INFO) which can be used freely. When copying an order (SHIFT + F8), you can here decide if info field 01 should be copied.

H COPY INFO 02

Within the order dialog it is possible to add extra 10 fields (see ORDER INFO) which can be used freely. When copying an order (SHIFT + F8), you can here decide if info field 02 should be copied.

H COPY INFO 03

Within the order dialog it is possible to add extra 10 fields (see ORDER INFO) which can be used freely. When copying an order (SHIFT + F8), you can here decide if info field 03 should be copied.

H COPY INFO 04

Within the order dialog it is possible to add extra 10 fields (see ORDER INFO) which can be used freely. When copying an order (SHIFT + F8), you can here decide if info field 04 should be copied.

H COPY INFO 05

Within the order dialog it is possible to add extra 10 fields (see ORDER INFO) which can be used freely. When copying an order (SHIFT + F8), you can here decide if info field 05 should be copied.

H COPY INFO 06

Within the order dialog it is possible to add extra 10 fields (see ORDER INFO) which can be used freely. When copying an order (SHIFT + F8), you can here decide if info field 06 should be copied.

H COPY INFO 07

Within the order dialog it is possible to add extra 10 fields (see ORDER INFO) which can be used freely. When copying a order (SHIFT + F8) , you can here decide if info field 07 should be copied.

H COPY INFO 08

Within the order dialog it is possible to add extra 10 fields (see ORDER INFO) which can be used freely. When copying a order (SHIFT + F8) , you can here decide if info field 08 should be copied.

H COPY INFO 09

Within the order dialog it is possible to add extra 10 fields (see ORDER INFO) which can be used freely. When copying a order (SHIFT + F8) , you can here decide if info field 09 should be copied.

H COPY INFO 10

Within the order dialog it is possible to add extra 10 fields (see ORDER INFO) which can be used freely. When copying a order (SHIFT + F8) , you can here decide if info field 10 should be copied.

ORDER CREDIT

H COPY INFO 01

Within the order dialog it is possible to add extra 10 fields (see ORDER INFO) which can be used freely. When crediting an order , you can here decide if info field 01 should be copied.

H COPY INFO 02

Within the order dialog it is possible to add extra 10 fields (see ORDER INFO) which can be used freely. When crediting an order , you can here decide if info field 02 should be copied.

H COPY INFO 03

Within the order dialog it is possible to add extra 10 fields (see ORDER INFO) which can be used freely. When crediting an order , you can here decide if info field 03 should be copied.

H COPY INFO 04

Within the order dialog it is possible to add extra 10 fields (see ORDER INFO) which can be used freely. When crediting an order, you can here decide if info field 04 should be copied.

H COPY INFO 05

Within the order dialog it is possible to add extra 10 fields (see ORDER INFO) which can be used freely. When crediting an order, you can here decide if info field 05 should be copied.

H COPY INFO 06

Within the order dialog it is possible to add extra 10 fields (see ORDER INFO) which can be used freely. When crediting an order, you can here decide if info field 06 should be copied.

H COPY INFO 07

Within the order dialog it is possible to add extra 10 fields (see ORDER INFO) which can be used freely. When crediting an order, you can here decide if info field 07 should be copied.

H COPY INFO 08

Within the order dialog it is possible to add extra 10 fields (see ORDER INFO) which can be used freely. When crediting an order, you can here decide if info field 08 should be copied.

H COPY INFO 09

Within the order dialog it is possible to add extra 10 fields (see ORDER INFO) which can be used freely. When crediting an order, you can here decide if info field 09 should be copied.

H COPY INFO 10

Within the order dialog it is possible to add extra 10 fields (see ORDER INFO) which can be used freely. When crediting an order, you can here decide if info field 10 should be copied.

ORDER INFO

INFO 01

Example: INFO 01 = Information
Within the order dialog it is possible to add extra 10 fields which can be used freely. The text entered here will be the field name for the first field. Only the settings with a value will be displayed.

INFO 02

Example: INFO 02 = Information
Within the order dialog it is possible to add extra 10 fields which can be used freely. The text entered here will be the field name for the second field. Only the settings with a value will be displayed.

INFO 03

Example: INFO 03 = Information
Within the order dialog it is possible to add extra 10 fields which can be used freely. The text entered here will be the field name for the third field. Only the settings with a value will be displayed.

INFO 04

Example: INFO 04 = Information
Within the order dialog it is possible to add extra 10 fields which can be used freely. The text entered here will be the field name for the fourth field. Only the settings with a value will be displayed.

INFO 05

Example: INFO 05 = Information
Within the order dialog it is possible to add extra 10 fields which can be used freely. The text entered here will be the field name for the second fifth. Only the settings with a value will be displayed.

INFO 06

Example: INFO 06 = Information
Within the order dialog it is possible to add extra 10 fields which can be used freely. The text entered here will be the field name for the sixth field. Only the settings with a value will be displayed.

INFO 07

Example: INFO 07 = Information
Within the order dialog it is possible to add extra 10 fields which can be used freely. The text entered here will be the field name for the seventh field. Only the settings with a value will be displayed.

INFO 08

Example: INFO 08 = Information
Within the order dialog it is possible to add extra 10 fields which can be used freely. The text entered here will be the field name for the eighth field. Only the settings with a value will be displayed.

INFO 09

Example: INFO 09 = Information
Within the order dialog it is possible to add extra 10 fields which can be used freely. The text entered here will be the field name for the ninth field. Only the settings with a value will be displayed.

INFO 10

Example: INFO 10 = Information
Within the order dialog it is possible to add extra 10 fields which can be used freely. The text entered here will be the field name for the tenth field. Only the settings with a value will be displayed.

INFO LINE 01

Example: INFO LINE 01 = Info
Within the order dialog it is possible to add extra column to the order lines which can be used freely. The text entered here will be the heading of the column. Only the settings with a value will be displayed. (See also ORDER LINE INFO 01 VALUES). This info field can also be set up for service articles and articles in the mobile solution.

INFO LINE 02

Example: INFO LINE 02 = Info
Within the order dialog it is possible to add extra column to the order lines which can be used freely. The text entered here will be the heading of the column. Only the settings with a value will be displayed. (See also ORDER LINE INFO 02 VALUES). This info field can also be set up for service articles and articles in the mobile solution.

INFO LINE 03

Example: INFO LINE 03 = Info
Within the order dialog it is possible to add extra column to the order lines which can be used freely (Note! used also for selecting project activities-see PROJECT/PROJECT ACTIVITIES ON) The text entered here will be the heading of the column. Only the settings with a value will be displayed. This info field can also be set up for service articles and articles in the mobile solution.

INFO LINE 04

Example: INFO LINE 04 = Info
Within the order dialog it is possible to add extra column to the order lines which can be used freely (The text entered here will be the heading of the column. Only the settings with a value will be displayed. (See also ORDER_LINE_INFO 02_VALUES). This info field can also be set up for service articles and articles in the mobile solution.

ORDER LINE INFO 01 VALUES

Example: ORDER LINE INFO 01 VALUES = New;Old
Each of these can contain a ; separated list of values. If the setting has a value, the corresponding INFO LINE 01 field is displayed in EMS as a drop-down instead of a text box.

ORDER LINE INFO 02 VALUES

Example: ORDER LINE INFO 02 VALUES = New;Old
Each of these can contain a ; separated list of values. If the setting has a value, the corresponding INFO LINE 02 field is displayed in EMS as a drop-down instead of a text box.

ORDER LINE INFO 03 VALUES

Example: ORDER_LINE_INFO 03_VALUES = New;Old
Each of these can contain a ; separated list of values. If the setting has a value, the corresponding INFO LINE 03 field is displayed in EMS as a drop-down instead of a text box.

ORDER LINE INFO 04 VALUES

Example: ORDER LINE INFO 04 VALUES = New;Old
Each of these can contain a ; separated list of values. If the setting has a value, the corresponding INFO LINE 04 field is displayed in EMS as a drop-down instead of a text box.

ORDER PART CREDIT

TEXT INVOICE

Example: TEXT INVOICE= Change of invoice
For text on part credit invoices. The text added here is followed by the invoice number that was the original invoice number before the crediting.

TEXT ORDER

Example: TEXT ORDER= Change of order
For text on part credit invoices. The text added here is followed by the order number that was the original order number before the crediting. Note! (if the previous change was a order number (0 orders from meter reporting)

ORDER PRINT

ARTICLE STATUS ON

Should the article status be added to the order->complete and print window.
New columns with the article status (different colors) and a tree structure (order status) for limitations.

ORDER TAG

ON

Order tag is the possibility to add a special tag on orders upon completion. If checked, you will also have the possibility to set up values to select from. See Evatic Service/Settings/Order.

TEXT

Example: TEXT = Order tag
This is the main text for the tag if you have set ORDER TAG->ON = 1. This text will be displayed before the drop down list box upon completion of an order and in Settings/Order (Evatic Service).

ORDER TEXT

AUTO ADD

Evatic Service can automatically add text lines to the order you make when finishing a project. The different texts that can be added are described later in this chapter. If checked, will all settings that has a text entered in this chapter and corresponding values on the task be automatically added as order lines on the order.

The function keys CTRL+SPACE or CTRL+ALT+SPACE (see below) are used if this setting is not checked. Then the user him selves can decide which orders should contain text or not.

AUTO ADD ON EXISTING

If project consumable are to be added to an existing order, you can decide if the order texts should be automatically added to this order or not.

If COMPANY XXX/ORDER_TEXT/AUTO ADD ON EXISTING = 0 and COMPANY XXX/Evatic Mobile/AUTO ADD TEXT LINES = 1, text will be added.

CREDIT TEXT

When crediting an invoice, this text will be placed before the Order lines of the credit invoice. The text will be followed by the number of the invoice for which the credit note is being created. 
Example: 
Original invoice to be credited: "123" 
CREDIT_TEXT = "Credit for invoice no. "
Result shown in the credit invoice: "Credit for invoice no. 123". 

CUSTOMER VISIT NAME

Example: CUSTOMER VISIT NAME = Smith Group
By right mouse clicking, CTRL+SPACE or CTRL+ALT+SPACE you can automatically enter text of your choice in the order dialog. This is the main text for the Customer name (If the order is linked to a project, the visit name of the customer (see General tab) is used, or the visit name of the machine (see Machine tab), if a machine is linked to the project task).
If nothing is entered here no line will appear when pressing CTRL+ALT+SPACE

JOB DONE

Example: JOB DONE = Completion date:
By right mouse clicking, CTRL+SPACE or CTRL+ALT+SPACE you can automatically enter text of your choice in the order dialog. This is the main text for the Completion date.
If nothing is entered here no line will appear when pressing CTRL+ALT+SPACE.

JOB DONE FIRST DATE

Example: JOB DONE FIRST DATE = Start date:
By right mouse clicking, CTRL+SPACE or CTRL+ALT+SPACE you can automatically enter text of your choice in the order dialog. This is the main text for the Start date (= the first entered date)
If nothing is entered here no line will appear when pressing CTRL+ALT+SPACE.

JOB DONE LAST DATE

Example: JOB DONE LAST DATE = End date:
By right mouse clicking, CTRL+SPACE or CTRL+ALT+SPACE you can automatically enter text of your choice in the order dialog. This is the main text for the End date (= the last entered date)
If nothing is entered here no line will appear when pressing CTRL+ALT+SPACE.

MACHINE

Example: MACHINE = Machine:
By right mouse clicking, CTRL+SPACE or CTRL+ALT+SPACE you can automatically enter text of your choice in the order dialog. This is the main text for the Machine number.
If nothing is entered here no line will appear when pressing CTRL+ALT+SPACE.

MACHINE ID NO

Example: MACHINE ID NO = ID number:
By right mouse clicking, CTRL+SPACE or CTRL+ALT+SPACE you can automatically enter text of your choice in the order dialog. This is the main text for the Machine id number.
If nothing is entered here no line will appear when pressing CTRL+ALT+SPACE.

MACHINE LOCATION

Example: MACHINE LOCATION = Location:
By right mouse clicking, CTRL+SPACE or CTRL+ALT+SPACE you can automatically enter text of your choice in the order dialog. This is the main text for the Machine location.
If nothing is entered here no line will appear when pressing CTRL+ALT+SPACE.

MACHINE NO AND ID NO

Example: MACHINE NO AND ID NO = Machine number and ID number:
By right mouse clicking, CTRL+SPACE or CTRL+ALT+SPACE you can automatically enter text of your choice in the order dialog. This is the main text for the Machine number and id number.
If nothing is entered here no line will appear when pressing CTRL+ALT+SPACE.

MODEL

Example: MODEL = Model:
By right mouse clicking, CTRL+SPACE or CTRL+ALT+SPACE you can automatically enter text of your choice in the order dialog. This is the main text for the Machine model description.
If nothing is entered here no line will appear when pressing CTRL+ALT+SPACE.

MODEL TYPE

Example: MODEL TYPE = Model:
By right mouse clicking, CTRL+SPACE or CTRL+ALT+SPACE you can automatically enter text of your choice in the order dialog. This is the main text for the Machine model type.
If nothing is entered here no line will appear when pressing CTRL+ALT+SPACE.

PROJECT/TASK NO

Example: PROJECT/TASK NO = Task number:
By right mouse clicking, CTRL+SPACE or CTRL+ALT+SPACE you can automatically enter text of your choice in the order dialog. This is the main text for the Project number and Task number.
If nothing is entered here no line will appear when pressing CTRL+ALT+SPACE.

PROJECT DESC

By right mouse clicking, CTRL+SPACE or CTRL+ALT+SPACE you can automatically enter text of your choice in the order dialog. This is the main text for the Project description.
If nothing is entered here no line will appear when pressing CTRL+ALT+SPACE.

PROJECT NO

Example: PROJECT NO = Project:
By right mouse clicking, CTRL+SPACE or CTRL+ALT+SPACE you can automatically enter text of your choice in the order dialog. This is the main text for the Project number.
If nothing is entered here no line will appear when pressing CTRL+ALT+SPACE.

REMOVE CR LF

If checked, then remove line breaks in the text lines that are added to the order.

TASK ACTION

Example: TASK ACTION = Task Action:
By right mouse clicking, CTRL+SPACE or CTRL+ALT+SPACE you can automatically enter text of your choice in the order dialog. This is the main text for the Task Action.
If nothing is entered here no line will appear when pressing CTRL+ALT+SPACE.

TASK NO

Example: TASK NO = Task:
By right mouse clicking, CTRL+SPACE or CTRL+ALT+SPACE you can automatically enter text of your choice in the order dialog. This is the main text for the Task number.
If nothing is entered here no line will appear when pressing CTRL+ALT+SPACE.

TASK SYMPTOM

Example: TASK SYMPTOM = Reported problem:
By right mouse clicking, CTRL+SPACE or CTRL+ALT+SPACE you can automatically enter text of your choice in the order dialog. This is the main text for the Symptom.
If nothing is entered here no line will appear when pressing CTRL+ALT+SPACE.

TASK TITLE

Example: TASK TITLE = Task title
By right mouse clicking, CTRL+SPACE or CTRL+ALT+SPACE you can automatically enter text of your choice in the order dialog. This is the main text for the Task title.
If nothing is entered here no line will appear when pressing CTRL+ALT+SPACE.

TECHNICIAN

Example: TECHNICIAN = Completed by:
By right mouse clicking, CTRL+SPACE or CTRL+ALT+SPACE you can automatically enter text of your choice in the order dialog. This is the main text for the Resource.
If nothing is entered here no line will appear when pressing CTRL+ALT+SPACE.

ORDER TEXT SUPPORT

CUSTOMER VISIT NAME

Example: CUSTOMER VISIT NAME = Smith Group
Enter text of your choice in the order dialog. This is the main text for the Customer name.

JOB DONE

Example: JOB DONE = Completion date:
Enter text of your choice in the order dialog. This is the main text for the Completion date.

MACHINE

Example: MACHINE = Serial number:
Enter text of your choice in the order dialog. This is the main text for the Machine number.

MACHINE ID NO

Example: MACHINE ID NO = ID number:
By right mouse clicking, CTRL+SPACE or CTRL+ALT+SPACE you can automatically enter text of your choice in the order dialog. This is the main text for the Machine id number.
If nothing is entered here no line will appear when pressing CTRL+ALT+SPACE.

MACHINE LOCATION

Example: MACHINE LOCATION = Location:
Enter text of your choice in the order dialog. This is the main text for the Machine location.

MACHINE NO AND ID NO

Example: MACHINE NO AND ID NO = Machine number and ID number:
By right mouse clicking, CTRL+SPACE or CTRL+ALT+SPACE you can automatically enter text of your choice in the order dialog. This is the main text for the Machine number and id number.
If nothing is entered here no line will appear when pressing CTRL+ALT+SPACE.

MODEL

Example: MODEL = Model:
Enter text of your choice in the order dialog. This is the main text for the Machine model type.

PROJECT/TASK NO

Example: PROJECT/TASK NO = Support no/Task no:
Enter text of your choice in the order dialog. This is the main text for the Project number and Task number.

PROJECT DESC

Example: PROJECT DESC = Description:
Enter text of your choice in the order dialog. This is the main text for the Project description.

PROJECT NO

Example: PROJECT NO = Project:
Enter text of your choice in the order dialog. This is the main text for the Project number.

TASK ACTION

Example: TASK ACTION = Solution:
Enter text of your choice in the order dialog. This is the main text for the Task Action.

TASK NO

Example: TASK NO = Task:
Enter text of your choice in the order dialog. This is the main text for the Task number.

TASK SYMPTOM

Example: TASK SYMPTOM = Reported problem:
Enter text of your choice in the order dialog. This is the main text for the Symptom.

TECHNICIAN

Example: TECHNICIAN = Completed by:
Enter text of your choice in the order dialog. This is the main text for the Support resource.

ORDER WARNING

LIMIT ARTICLES SG1 VALUES

Example: LIMIT ARTICLES SG1 = 01
If you want to limit the articles that gives warnings in the order window you can set the sortgroup values to check in these settings
Blank value means all articles.
If you add values for example LIMIT ARTICLES SG1 VALUES and LIMIT ARTICLES SG2 VALUES then the system must find a match on the article on both SG1 and SG2 to give a warning.
Examples:
LIMIT ARTICLES SG1 VALUES = 01;02;03;
LIMIT ARTICLES SG2 VALUES = Part;
In this combination only articles with SG1 = 01 or 02 or 03 and SG2 = Part , will give warning.

LIMIT ARTICLES SG2 VALUES

Example: LIMIT ARTICLES SG2 = 01
If you want to limit the articles that gives warnings in the order window you can set the sortgroup values to check in these settings
Blank value means all articles.
If you add values for example LIMIT ARTICLES SG1 VALUES and LIMIT ARTICLES SG2 VALUES then the system must find a match on the article on both SG1 and SG2 to give a warning.
Examples:
LIMIT ARTICLES SG1 VALUES = 01;02;03;
LIMIT ARTICLES SG2 VALUES = Part;
In this combination only articles with SG1 = 01 or 02 or 03 and SG2 = Part , will give warning.

LIMIT ARTICLES SG3 VALUES

Example: LIMIT ARTICLES SG3 = 01
If you want to limit the articles that gives warnings in the order window you can set the sortgroup values to check in these settings
Blank value means all articles.
If you add values for example LIMIT ARTICLES SG1 VALUES and LIMIT ARTICLES SG2 VALUES then the system must find a match on the article on both SG1 and SG2 to give a warning.
Examples:
LIMIT ARTICLES SG1 VALUES = 01;02;03;
LIMIT ARTICLES SG2 VALUES = Part;
In this combination only articles with SG1 = 01 or 02 or 03 and SG2 = Part , will give warning.

LIMIT ARTICLES SG4 VALUES

Example: LIMIT ARTICLES SG4 = 01
If you want to limit the articles that gives warnings in the order window you can set the sortgroup values to check in these settings
Blank value means all articles.
If you add values for example LIMIT ARTICLES SG1 VALUES and LIMIT ARTICLES SG2 VALUES then the system must find a match on the article on both SG1 and SG2 to give a warning.
Examples:
LIMIT ARTICLES SG1 VALUES = 01;02;03;
LIMIT ARTICLES SG2 VALUES = Part;
In this combination only articles with SG1 = 01 or 02 or 03 and SG2 = Part , will give warning.

LIMIT ARTICLES SG5 VALUES

Example: LIMIT ARTICLES SG5 = 01
If you want to limit the articles that gives warnings in the order window you can set the sortgroup values to check in these settings
Blank value means all articles.
If you add values for example LIMIT ARTICLES SG1 VALUES and LIMIT ARTICLES SG2 VALUES then the system must find a match on the article on both SG1 and SG2 to give a warning.
Examples:
LIMIT ARTICLES SG1 VALUES = 01;02;03;
LIMIT ARTICLES SG2 VALUES = Part;
In this combination only articles with SG1 = 01 or 02 or 03 and SG2 = Part , will give warning.

ON

Should order warning be used for orderlines.
Example warning on:
1) When the user adds a new order/order lines in Evatic Service the system will check for following parameters.
a) On open order - If this article already is ordered on the same machine on another order that is open, the system warns the user by a warning-column (visual signal) on the order-line for this article/machine combination.
b) Finished orders - Number of Days - How many days since this part was ordered for the same machine
c) If less than x days - the system shows this as a warning
d) The checks will not be executed on credit lines (quantity less than 1)
e) If an order/invoice is credited this order will not be part of the calculation in b) and c)
f) If the order lines on this order or last order has a quantity bigger than 1 this will be treated the same way as if the quantity was 1

WARNING NO OF DAYS

Example: WARNING NO OF DAYS = 10
Number of Days - How many days since this part was ordered for the same machine (closed orders)
If less than x days - the system shows this as a warning
The system then checks the difference between the order date on the order and to days date.

PACKING SLIP

HEADING TEXT

Example: HEADING TEXT = Packing slip
What should the heading be on the print out for the Packing slip?

PRINT SERVICEORDER

CUSTOMER PROP 1 CODE

Example: CUSTOMER PROP 1 CODE = IN
When printing service orders several fields are available. 5 codes from the customer property fields can be added

Not available in the standard layout. This can be added by the Report Designer or by your supplier.
The setting INSERT CUSTOMER PROPERTIES must be checked.
Datafield in the report (report designer):
CUSTOMER_PROP_1 (including also 2-5)

CUSTOMER PROP 2 CODE

Example: CUSTOMER PROP 2 CODE = PR
When printing service orders several fields are available. 5 codes from the customer property fields can be added

Not available in the standard layout. This can be added by the Report Designer or by your supplier.
The setting INSERT CUSTOMER PROPERTIES must be checked.

CUSTOMER PROP 3 CODE

Example: CUSTOMER PROP 3 CODE = A
When printing service orders several fields are available. 5 codes from the customer property fields can be added

Not available in the standard layout. This can be added by the Report Designer or by your supplier.
The setting INSERT CUSTOMER PROPERTIES must be checked.

CUSTOMER PROP 4 CODE

Example: CUSTOMER PROP 4 CODE = TEST
When printing service orders several fields are available. 5 codes from the customer property fields can be added

Not available in the standard layout. This can be added by the Report Designer or by your supplier.
The setting INSERT CUSTOMER PROPERTIES must be checked.

CUSTOMER PROP 5 CODE

Example: CUSTOMER PROP 5 CODE = TEST2
When printing service orders several fields are available. 5 codes from the customer property fields can be added

Not available in the standard layout. This can be added by the Report Designer or by your supplier.
The setting INSERT CUSTOMER PROPERTIES must be checked.

INSERT BUSINESSHOUR DATA

When printing service orders several fields are available. Should Business hours be included?

Not available in the standard layout. This can be added by the Report Designer or by your supplier.

INSERT CUSTOMER PROPERTIES

When printing service orders several fields are available. Should customer properties be included?

Not available in the standard layout. This can be added by the Report Designer or by your supplier.

INSERT FOLLOW UP DATA

When printing service orders several fields are available. Should Follow up be included?

Not available in the standard layout. This can be added by the Report Designer or by your supplier.

INSERT MACHINE PROPERTIES

When printing service orders several fields are available. Should machine properties be included?

Not available in the standard layout. This can be added by the Report Designer or by your supplier.

INSERT MACHINEACCESORIES DATA

When printing service orders several fields are available. Should Accessories for the machine be included?

Not available in the standard layout. This can be added by the Report Designer or by your supplier.

INSERT METER DATA

When printing service orders several fields are available. Should Contract information for every meter on the machine be included?

INSERT OLD PROJECT DATA

When printing service orders several fields are available. Should information about the last service tasks for your machine be included?

Not available in the standard layout. This can be added by the Report Designer or by your supplier.

INSERT OLD PROJECT DATA QTY

Example: INSERT OLD PROJECT DATA QTY = 10
The maximum number of historical projects that is included when printing Serviceorders and Servicereport.

Not available in the standard layout. This can be added by the Report Designer or by your supplier.

INSERT PROJECT PREORDER

When printing service orders several fields are available. Should information about pre-orders be included?

Not available in the standard layout. This can be added by the Report Designer or by your supplier.
The data field 'PreOrderSum.' must be used on the layout.
When setting PRINT_SERVICEREPORT or PRINT_SERVICE_ORDER \ INSERT USED ARTICLES DATA must be checked.

INSERT RESOURCE DATA

When printing service orders several fields are available. Should information about who the tasks were allocated to be included?

INSERT START TRAVEL END WORKTIME

When printing service orders several fields are available. Should information about travel and worktime be included?
You can then use the following DataField values:
StartTravel
EndTravel
StartWork
EndWork

INSERT USED ART DATA IN DETAIL

If checked, then article data can be used in the 'Detail' section of the Report Designer. This can be used when the article data contains line feed that needs to be part of the report.
If this setting is checked the setting INSERT PROJECT TASKS HISTORY ON will not give any result.

INSERT USED ARTICLES DATA

When printing service orders several fields are available. Should eventual information about the articles already used in the project be included? (Note! Order lines flagged 'hide' will not be shown on the service order)

INSERT USED ARTICLES DATA ALL

If this setting is checked, all orderlines from order is printed on the Serviceorder or Servicereport, and not only the orderlines linked to the project task.

INSERT USED ARTICLES TEXT LINES

If this setting is turned off, the free text lines on the order are not displayed on the serviceorder.

INSERT WORK TRAVEL DETAILS

Should each working and travel time interval be shown on the service order?
New datafields:
W_T_TECHNICIAN_NO
W_T_TECHNICIAN_NAME
W_T_FROM
W_T_TO
W_T_QTY
W_T_DESCRIPTION
W_T_ARTICLE NO

PRINT SERVICEORDER\INSERT START TRAVEL END WORKTIME must be checked.

MACHINE PROP 1 CODE

Example: MACHINE PROP 1 CODE = SW
When printing service orders several fields are available. 5 codes from the machine property fields can be added

Not available in the standard layout. This can be added by the Report Designer or by your supplier.
The setting INSERT_MACHINE PROPERTIES must be checked.
Datafield in the report (report designer):
MACHINE_PROP_1 (including also 2-5)

MACHINE PROP 2 CODE

Example: MACHINE PROP 2 CODE = IP
When printing service orders several fields are available. 5 codes from the machine property fields can be added

Not available in the standard layout. This can be added by the Report Designer or by your supplier.
The setting INSERT_MACHINE PROPERTIES must be checked.

MACHINE PROP 3 CODE

Example: MACHINE PROP 3 CODE = UP
When printing service orders several fields are available. 5 codes from the machine property fields can be added

Not available in the standard layout. This can be added by the Report Designer or by your supplier.
The setting INSERT_MACHINE PROPERTIES must be checked.

MACHINE PROP 4 CODE

Example: MACHINE PROP 4 CODE = DO
When printing service orders several fields are available. 5 codes from the machine property fields can be added

Not available in the standard layout. This can be added by the Report Designer or by your supplier.
The setting INSERT_MACHINE PROPERTIES must be set checked.

MACHINE PROP 5 CODE

Example: MACHINE PROP 5 CODE = TEST
When printing service orders several fields are available. 5 codes from the machine property fields can be added

Not available in the standard layout. This can be added by the Report Designer or by your supplier.
The setting INSERT_MACHINE PROPERTIES must be checked.

SHOW PREVIEW

Do you want a preview of your service order or should it be directly sent to the printer? If checked preview will be shown, if not printout will be done.

PROBLEM MANAGEMENT

ALPHANUMERIC SEARCH

Should it be possible to use a alphanumeric search or not?
(see also SERIAL NO PREFIX)

AUTO ADD NAME DATE IN INFO FIELD

Should Evatic automatically add (name, date and time) in the note field when entering information.

The same as CTRL + N.

MAIL BODY DEFAULT

Example: MAIL BODY DEFAULT = Dear Customer,.........
Default email text from the problem window.
Example:
Dear customer,
We have fount that the problem you've reported is part of a bigger problem. We will keep you informed about solutions as soon as we find a way of getting around this problem.
Problem Summary:
Problem no: <PROBLEM_NO>
Name: <PROBLEM_NAME>
Description: <PROBLEM_DESCRIPTION>
Reported: <PROBLEM_REPORTED>
Solution: <SOLUTION_CUSTOMER_DESC>
Workaround: <WORKAROUND_CUSTOMER_DESC>
Project and /task no: <PROJECT/TASK NO> (only for emails send from the incidents tab)

MAIL BODY DEFAULT MACH

Example: MAIL BODY DEFAULT_MACH= Dear Customer,.........
Default email text from the problem window regarding machine. (See MAIL BODY DEFAULT)
Example bookmark:
Machine and model: <MACHINE NO/MODEL TYPE> (only for emails send from the incidents tab)

MAIL BODY SOLUTION

Example: MAIL BODY SOLUTION = Dear customer,........
Default solution email text from the problem window.
Example:
Dear customer,
We have the following solution to your problem <PROBLEM_NO>.....

MAIL BODY SOLUTION MACH

Example: MAIL BODY SOLUTION MACH = Dear customer,........
Default solution email text from the problem window regarding machine.
Example bookmark:
Machine and model: <MACHINE NO/MODEL TYPE> (only for emails send from the incidents tab)

MAIL BODY WORKAROUND

Example: MAIL BODY WORKAROUND = Workaround for this problem......
Default workaround email text from the problem window (see above)

MAIL BODY WORKAROUND MACH

Example: MAIL BODY WORKAROUND MACH = Workaround for this problem......
Default workaround email text from the problem window regarding machine.(see above)
Example bookmark:
Machine and model: <MACHINE NO/MODEL TYPE> (only for emails send from the incidents tab)

MAIL REPLY ADDRESS

Example: MAIL REPLY ADDRESS = support@evatic.com
Displays as from address when sending e-mail with information from Evatic.

MAIL SUBJECT DEFAULT

Example: MAIL SUBJECT DEFAULT = Problem:
Subject on general mails to customers from the problem window in Evatic.

MAIL SUBJECT DEFAULT MACH

Example: MAIL SUBJECT DEFAULT = Problem:
Subject on general mails to customers from the problem window in Evatic (regarding machine/model)

MAIL SUBJECT SOLUTION

Example: MAIL SUBJECT SOLUTION = Problem solution:
Subject on solution mails to customers from the problem window in Evatic.

MAIL SUBJECT SOLUTION MACH

Example: MAIL SUBJECT SOLUTION_MACH = Problem solution:
Subject on solution mails to customers from the problem window in Evatic.(regarding machine/model)

MAIL SUBJECT WORKAROUND

Example: MAIL SUBJECT WORKAROUND = Problem workaround:
Subject on workaround mails to customers from the problem window in Evatic.(regarding machine/model)

MANAGER TEAM SERVICE

Example: MANAGER TEAM SERVICE = Team 1
The problem manager is defined by using the team-functionality. Enter the team for service.

MANAGER TEAM SUPPORT

Example: MANAGER TEAM SUPPORT = Team 2
The problem manager is defined by using the team-functionality. Enter the team for support.

MANDATORY ACTION CODE 1

Should action code 1 be filled in before a problem can be saved?

MANDATORY ACTION CODE 2

Should action code 2 be filled in before a problem can be saved?

MANDATORY ACTION CODE 3

Should action code1 be filled in before a problem can be saved?

MANDATORY ACTION CODE 4

Should action code1 be filled in before a problem can be saved and closed?

MANDATORY MODEL TYPE

Should symptom code 1 be filled in before a problem can be saved?

MANDATORY SYMPTOM CODE 1

Should model type be filled in before a problem can be saved?

MANDATORY SYMPTOM CODE 2

Should symptom code 2 be filled in before a problem can be saved?

MANDATORY SYMPTOM CODE 3

Should symptom code 3 be filled in before a problem can be saved?

MANDATORY SYMPTOM CODE 4

Should symptom code 4 be filled in before a problem can be saved?

MATCH ACTION CODE 1

Should action code 1 be matched?

MATCH ACTION CODE 2

Should action code 2 be matched?

MATCH ACTION CODE 3

Should action code 3 be matched?

MATCH ACTION CODE 4

Should action code 4 be matched?

MATCH CHECK

If checked, the system will run the procedure to check for matching problems automatically and if any matches are found, the button will show the number of problems. If no match, the button is disabled. If not checked, the button will be enabled and the checking is done when the button is pressed.

MATCH CHECK COLOR

Example: MATCH CHECK_COLOR=

MATCH MODEL TYPE

Should model type be matched (on tasks/incidents)?

MATCH MODEL TYPE MACHINE

Should model type be matched (on machine problems)?

MATCH PROBLEM

When you create a new support or service -task Evatic will look in the problem-table to see if there are any problems that matches the criteria's you have added to the newtask. Both open and closed task are counted for. The following settings are added to decide which fields must match to be able to connect to a problem:

MATCH SERIAL

Should serial codes be matched (on machine problems)?

MATCH SYMPTOM CODE 1

Should symptom code 1 be matched?

MATCH SYMPTOM CODE 2

Should symptom code 2 be matched?

MATCH SYMPTOM CODE 3

Should symptom code 3 be matched?

MATCH SYMPTOM CODE 4

Should symptom code 4 be matched?

NODE ACCEPTED

Example: NODE ACCEPTED = 1_All_2_Accepted
Denotes the node in the task tree for accepted problem tasks.

NODE ACCEPTED SERVICE

Example: NODE ACCEPTED_SERVICE = 1_All_2_Accepted_3_Service
Denotes the node in the task tree for accepted problem tasks service.

NODE ACCEPTED SUPPORT

Example: NODE ACCEPTED_SUPPORT = 1_All_2_Accepted_3_Support
Denotes the node in the task tree for accepted problem tasks support

NODE INSERT TASK SERVICE

Example: NODE INSERT TASK SERVICE = 1_All_2_Team Service
This setting will be used to determine the node service tasks will be placed into for problem approval

NODE INSERT TASK SUPPORT

Example: NODE INSERT TASK SUPPORT = _All_2_Team Support
This setting will be used to determine the node support tasks will be placed into for problem approval

NODE REJECTED

Example: NODE REJECTED = 1_All_2_Rejected
Denotes the node in the task tree for rejected problem tasks.

NODE REJECTED SERVICE

Example: NODE REJECTED SERVICE = 1_All_2_Rejected_3_Service
Denotes the node in the task tree for rejected problem tasks service

NODE REJECTED SUPPORT

Example: NODE REJECTED SUPPORT = 1_All_2_Rejected_3_Support
Denotes the node in the task tree for rejected problem tasks support

ON

Should the problem management be accessible for the users or not.

SERIAL NO PREFIX

Example: SERIAL NO PREFIX = 4
When matching machine problems by serial number from-to, should the system consider the used prefix on serial numbers or not. Enter the number of prefix here.
Example: SERIAL NO PREFIX = 2
SN1234
SN1235
SN1236

SHOW MACHINE

Should the machine-functionality be disabled or not. If checked, the machine tab and functionality will be available.

SHOW TASK

Should the task-functionality be disabled or not. If checked, the incidents-tab and all its functionality will be enabled

SUPPORT TYPE ACCEPTED

Example: SUPPORT TYPE ACCEPTED = AC
When accepting a problem, which support type should automatically be added? (se info under start/stop time).

SUPPORT TYPE ACCEPTED DESC

Example: SUPPORT TYPE ACCEPTED DESC = Accepted
When accepting a problem, which support type description should automatically be added? (se info under start/stop time).

SUPPORT TYPE NEW

Example: SUPPORT TYPE NEW = NEW
When adding a task to a problem, which support type should automatically be added? (se info under start/stop time).

SUPPORT TYPE NEW DESC

Example: SUPPORT TYPE NEW DESC =New task
When adding a task to a problem, which support type description should automatically be added? (se info under start/stop time).

SUPPORT TYPE REJECTED

Example: SUPPORT TYPE REJECTED = RJ
When rejecting a problem, which support type should automatically be added? (se info under start/stop time).

SUPPORT TYPE REJECTED DESC

Example: SUPPORT TYPE REJECTED DESC = Rejecting
When rejecting a problem, which support type description should automatically be added? (se info under)

PROJECT

ALERT DAYS SINCE LAST VISIT

Example: ALERT DAYS SINCE LAST VISIT = 0
For setting up number of days for color alert when there has been less than 90 days since the machine was visited. The field will turn red.
Regarding the field <No of days since last visit> (see Project/Machine tab) in Evatic Service

ALLOW FINISH PROJECT W O TASKS

Should it be possible to end a project without having completed all connected tasks?
If not checked, you can not end the project before you have ended all tasks. If checked, you are allowed to finish the project, but you receive a warning telling you that not all tasks are finished (the tasks, which are not completed will then automatically also be completed).

AUTO ASSIGN

Should a new project automatically be assigned to the technician responsible for the machine.

AUTO ASSIGN OLD PROJECT ON

Should an already registered project (which is not yet assigned) automatically be assigned to the technician responsible for the machine. Evatic will ask if you want to assign the project. This happens every time F7 (= Allocate technician in Project Overview) is selected,or whenever you press F12 (save).

AUTO ASSIGN WARNING

Should Evatic ask if you want to assign the new project to the technician responsible for the machine.

AUTO RECEIVED DATE AS CREATE DATE

Should the receive date/time for recurring projects be the same as the date the project was created?

AUTO TASK LAST CHECK IN SYMPTOM

Example: AUTO TASK LAST CHECK IN SYMPTOM = #1_PM#
Setting where recurring projects will not generate a new project until the previous one is checked in from the technician. This can only be used together with mobile solutions.
This is controlled by a defined symptom code

AUTO TASK PROJECT PR TASK ON

Setting where one recurring projects with several tasks will appear as x number of projects in the project summary and not as 1 project with several task. If checked (= x number of projects), if not checked (= 1 project with several tasks).

AUTO TASK USE LAST ORDER DATE ON

If checked the recurring project is generated x number of days after.

CHECK LIST AUTO ADD DEF VALUES

Should the previous value be set as default for the upcoming checklists?

CHECK LIST ID PROP

Example: CHECK LIST ID PROP = IDS
Which ID properties (= machine property code) should be accessible in the drop down list when selecting checklist in Evatic Service/Evatic Mobile.

CHECK LIST PRINT STAT GROUP

Example: CHECK LIST PRINT STAT GROUP = OPP, AV
Here you can enter the checklist statistic group which should be shown on the print outs. If no values are entered, all the values are shown.

CHECKLIST SHOW MACHINE

Should it be possible to select machine on the checklist in Evatic Service?

CONTRACT TYPE ENABLE

Should it be possible to change the contract type on a project?

CONTRACT TYPE ONLY VALID

Should only contract types linked to the customer/machine (see contract) be visible in the drop down list.

If checked, the setting CONTRACT TYPE ENABLE must also be checked.

DEF CHECK LIST STAT GROUP

Example: DEF CHECK LIST STAT GROUP = OPP
Here you can define a default statistic group for the check lists. See more in Evatic Service (Settings/Project/Check list stat. group)

DEF NO TO FINISH AFTER ORDER

When finishing service order, the system will ask if the task/project should be closed as well, when the project screen is displayed. You can select yes or no. The default button is YES. Should the default button be NO? If checked, no button will be set as default. If not checked yes button will be set as default.

DEF SYMPTOM CODE 1 INSTALLATION

Example: DEF SYMPTOM CODE 1 INSTALLATION = INST
Here you can define default symptom codes to be added when a project is generated from sales calc or sales order. Note! Regarding sales order, the following setting COMPANY XXX\ Evatic Service\MACHINE NEW CREATE TASK must be checked

DEF SYMPTOM CODE 2 INSTALLATION

Example: DEF SYMPTOM CODE 2 INSTALLATION = INST
Here you can define default symptom codes to be added when a project is generated from sales calc or sales order. Note! Regarding sales order, the following setting COMPANY XXX\ Evatic Service\MACHINE NEW CREATE TASK must be checked

DEF SYMPTOM CODE 3 INSTALLATION

Example: DEF SYMPTOM CODE 3 INSTALLATION = INST
Here you can define default symptom codes to be added when a project is generated from sales calc or sales order. Note! Regarding sales order, the following setting COMPANY XXX\ Evatic Service\MACHINE NEW CREATE TASK must be checked

DEF SYMPTOM TEXT INSTALLATION

Example: DEF SYMPTOM TEXT INSTALLATION = Installation machine
Here you can define default symptom text to be added when a project is generated from sales calc or sales order. Note! Regarding sales order, the following setting COMPANY XXX\ Evatic Service\MACHINE NEW CREATE TASK must be checked

DEF TASK TREE LEVELS

Example: DEF TASK TREE LEVEL = 3
Here you can define the level you want to use as default when opening the task tree. 0 = all levels, 1 = first level, 2 = second level etc.

DEF TASK TREE LEVELS CHECKLIST

Example: DEF TASK TREE LEVEL CHECKLIST = 2
Here you can define the level you want to use as default when opening the Checklist-tree. 0 = all levels, 1 = first level, 2 = second level etc.

DEFAULT DURATION

Example: DEFAULT DURATION = 30
The number of minutes to be set as the default duration on a project. Default is 30 Minutes.

DEFAULT SOLUTION TIME

Example: DEFAULT SOLUTION TIME = 8
The number of hours to be set as the solution time for tasks connected to a machine not covered by a contract.

DEFAULT SYMPTOM CODE 1

Example: DEFAULT SYMPTOM CODE 1 = SER
If this setting has a value this values should automatically be set as default value for symptom code 1(..3) when the user push new project.

DEFAULT SYMPTOM CODE 2

Example: DEFAULT SYMPTOM CODE 2 = SER
If this setting has a value this values should automatically be set as default value for symptom code 1(..3) when the user push new project.

DEFAULT SYMPTOM CODE 3

Example: DEFAULT SYMPTOM CODE 3 = SER
If this setting has a value this values should automatically be set as default value for symptom code 1(..3) when the user push new project.

DEPT ALL ALARM COLOR

Example: DEPT ALL ALARM COLOR = <Select colour from window>
Setting to use when you have a tree structure (see Project) equal for all departments: The colour that is to be used in the Project Overview for tasks where the response time has almost expired.

DEPT ALL ASSIGNED COL ONLY COL

Setting to use when you have a tree structure (see Project) equal for all departments: Show assign colour only in resource column?

DEPT ALL ASSIGNED COLOR

Example: DEPT ALL ASSIGNED COLOR = <Select colour from window>
Setting to use when you have a tree structure (see Project) equal for all departments: The colour to be used in the Project Overview for tasks that have been allocated to a resource.

FORM CAPTION EXTRA

Example: FORM CAPTION EXTRA = (default blank)
Setting to decide witch information should be added to the project blue title line. Default is project number and customer name.
E.g: [<PROJECT DESC>] - '<SYMPTOM_TEXT>' =>Projectno, Customer name, Project description and symptomtext.
(or also <INFO 01> .. <INFO 06> and <TASK TITLE>).

HIDE CHECKLIST ID

Should checklist ID be hidden in Evatic Service? If checked checklist ID is shown

HIDE RESPONSE DATE TIME

Should responstime be hidden in Evatic Service ? In order for the responstime to be hidden, the number of hours entered here, must be higher then the responstime or set to 0.

INSERT CHECK LIST FILETYPE

Example: INSERT CHECK LIST FILETYPE = PDF
Setting to decide which file type should be used when generating/preview document from checklists (see Evatic Service/Project/Checklist tab)

INSERT SERVICE ORDER TEXT

Example: INSERT SERVICE ORDER TEXT = Including free....
This text is inserted into the print of all service orders, and can be used for inserting custom text into the serviceorder. To use this text in a serviceorder, set 'ServiceTextFromAdmin' in the 'Datafield'-property in Evatic Admin Report Designer on the layout.

INSERT SERVICE ORDER TITEL

Example: INSERT SERVICE ORDER TITLE = Project
This text is inserted into the print of all service orders, and can be used for inserting custom text into the serviceorder. To use this text in a serviceorder, set 'ReportTitle' in the 'Datafield'-property in Evatic Admin Report Designer on the layout.

INSERT SERVICE REPORT FILENAME

Example: INSERT SERVICE REPORT FILENAME = T
The filename on the file automatically created.
The text can contain codes between ## that will be replaced by data from the current project. The available data is:
CUSTOMER_NAME = Customer name
CUSTOMER_NO = Customer no
MACHINE = machine no
P = project no
T = task no
DD = current date on the specified format
The default value = P#-#T# #CUSTOMER_NAME# #YYYY-MM-DD'
(which could return the following filename: 123-1 Software Data 2004-06-17)

INSERT SERVICE REPORT FILETYPE

Example: INSERT SERVICE REPORT FILETYPE = PDF
This setting decides which filetype the file created automatically when returning to the project after registering consumables. The available values are (The default value is PDF):

• PDF
• HTML
• RTF

INSERT SERVICE REPORT ON

This setting is for creating a file based on the service report automatically when returning to the project after registering consumables. The file is inserted in the database, and can be found on the document-tab on the project.
If not checked, no file is created when returning to the project. If checked file is created.

INSERT SERVICE REPORT TEXT

Example: INSERT SERVICE REPORT TEXT = Report for......
This text is inserted into the print of all service reports, and can be used for inserting custom text into the servicereport. To use this text in a servicereport, set 'ServiceTextFromAdmin' in the 'Datafield'-property in Evatic Admin Report Designer on the layout.

INSERT SERVICE REPORT TITLE

Example: INSERT SERVICE REPORT TITLE = Report
This text is inserted into the print of all service reports, and can be used for inserting custom text into the service report. To use this text in a servicereport, set 'ReportTitle' in the 'Datafield'-property in Evatic Admin Report Designer on the layout.

LINK BUTTON 1 ACTION

Example: LINK BUTTON 1 ACTION = http://www.evatic.com/
In the project screen, what command should be run when clicking link button 1?
Enter the command as you would enter it in the Start --> Run window in Windows
Bookmarks:
<CUSTOMER_NO> selected customer
<USERNAME> the logged in user in Evatic Service
<PASSWORD> the password the user logged in to Evatic with.
Also the bookmarks under COMPANY XXX \ MAIL PROJECT \ TECHNICIAN MESSAGE can be used.

LINK BUTTON 1 TEXT

Example: LINK BUTTON 1 TEXT = Evatic Homepage
In the project screen, what text should appear on link button 1?

LINK BUTTON 2 ACTION

Example: LINK BUTTON 2 ACTION = winword.exe
In the project screen, what command should be run when clicking link button 2?
Enter the command as you would enter it in the Start --> Run window in Windows
Bookmarks:
<CUSTOMER_NO> selected customer
<USERNAME> the logged in user in Evatic Service
<PASSWORD> the password the user logged in to Evatic with.
Also the bookmarks under COMPANY XXX / MAIL PROJECT / TECHNICIAN MESSAGE can be used.

LINK BUTTON 2 TEXT

Example: LINK BUTTON 2 TEXT = Microsoft Word
In the project screen, what text should appear on link button 2?

LINK BUTTON 3 ACTION

Example: LINK BUTTON 3 ACTION = notepad.exe
In the project screen, what command should be run when clicking link button 3?
Enter the command as you would enter it in the Start --> Run window in Windows
Bookmarks:
<CUSTOMER_NO> selected customer
<USERNAME> the logged in user in Evatic Service
<PASSWORD> the password the user logged in to Evatic with.
Also the bookmarks under COMPANY XXX \ MAIL PROJECT \ TECHNICIAN MESSAGE can be used.

LINK BUTTON 3 TEXT

Example: LINK BUTTON 3 TEXT = Open Notepad
In the customer screen, what text should appear on link button 3?

LINK BUTTON 4 ACTION

Example: LINK BUTTON 4 ACTION = mstsc.exe 192.168.XXX.XXX
In the project screen, what command should be run when clicking link button 4?
Enter the command as you would enter it in the Start --> Run window in Windows
Bookmarks:
<CUSTOMER_NO> selected customer
<USERNAME> the logged in user in Evatic Service
<PASSWORD> the password the user logged in to Evatic with.
Also the bookmarks under COMPANY XXX / MAIL PROJECT / TECHNICIAN MESSAGE can be used.

LINK BUTTON 4 TEXT

Example: LINK BUTTON 4 TEXT = Remote Desktop to office
In the project screen, what text should appear on link button 4?

LOCK PROJECT

Should the project be locked when you open it and another user has it open at the same time.

If it is open for all users, setting not checked, the information can be overwritten.

LOG FOLDER MOVE

Makes the button for 'log folder move' available on project, checked for available. This track all tasks and movements between folders (Database log).

LOG MAIL SENDING

Setting to decide to log the event of sending mail form the project module in Evatic Service. The setting LOG FOLDER MOVE must be checked, because it is this button which shows the emails send to the customer/technician.

LOG PROJECT TASK STATUS

Setting to add to the logs info field when a project change task status. The status 1 in Evatic log folder means completed. If not checked, do not show task status, if checked, show task status.

MACHINE CONTACT ONLY

Setting to set the contact person from the machine dialog screen on project (see general tab).
Example when the setting is checked:
- If a machine is connected to the task, the contact person on the machine should be shown as the contact person (see General tab)
- If a machine is connected to the task and the contact person field on the machine is blank, the contact person (see General tab) on the task is blank.
- If no machine is connected to the task, the contact person (see General tab) on the task is blank.

In order for this setting to work, MACHINE SHOW ALL CONTACTS ON must not be checked.

MACHINE NO COPY DESCRIPTION

Example: MACHINE NO COPY DESCRIPTION = replaced with machine no
This text is inserted into the action text field (Project). This text in combination with 2 different machine numbers will help you to copy machine no and text into a new task.

MACHINE SHOW ALL CONTACTS ON

Should all contacts be available or only the machine related contacts when you register a project?

MAX NUMBER VISIT ADDRESS

Example: MAX NUMBER VISIT ADDRESS = 5
Setting to improve the speed connected to getting available visit-addresses on a project. If the number in this setting is higher than 0, this will be the limit of automatically fetched addresses. If there are more addresses than this available, you will get a message.

NEW PROJECT ACTIVE FIELD

Example: NEW PROJECT ACTIVE FIELD = CUSTOMER_NO (default)
Which field should be active when entering new project tasks?
General tab
CUSTOMER_NO, CUSTOMER_NAME, ADDRESS_NAME
Machine tab
MACHINE NO, VISIT_NAME
(see the setting DEPARTMENT XXX/PROJECT/PROJECT TAB to set the focus on General- or Machine tab)

NODE ADD NOT ASSIGNED NUM

Example: NODE ADD NOT ASSIGNED NUM = 0
Should the number behind a folder in the tree structure (see Project) include 1 or 2 numbers? E.g. First number is the number of tasks in the folder that not is assigned to the technician and the second number is the number of tasks in the folder that is assigned to the technician. If you have an folder name 'Meyer', 2 task is not assigned and 4 are. Then the folder will look like this: Meyer (2) (4)

NODE ADD TOTAL NUM

Example: NODE ADD TOTAL NUM = 0
Should the number behind a folder in the tree structure show the total (number of task in the folder + sub-folders).E.g. (6 / 10). 1 for yes and 0 for no.
Only be used SELECTED NODE ONLY = 1, NODE ADD ASSIGNED NUM can be 0 or 1. (Note! It will not show the total number if the folder is a 'technician' folder. But for other folders that have sub folders)

PRE ORDER QTY CHECK OTHER NODES

Example: PRE ORDER QTY CHECK OTHER NODES= 1_All_2_Incoming,1_All_2_To be planned
The system will go through the Tasks in the listed node(s) and look for the Tasks that can be completed ordering the same Article(s) from the same Stock. The sum of these Articles is reported in Qty. already planned, found in the Project dialog, under the Task tab, under the Pre-Order tab. This will facilitate stock management decisions like choosing between internal stock movement or Supplier order.
If no value is given for this setting, the system will always show 0.

PRE ORDER SHOW STOCK INFORMATION

Should the columns that show information about stock on pre-order article list be displayed?

PROJECT ACTIVITIES ON

Should the button for entering project activities in Evatic Service (see Project/General tab) be visible or not?

The activities can also be added to each service article line (see Order) in Evatic Service, see Company XXX/ORDER_INFO/INFO LINE 03.

PROJECT CHECK PLANNED AFTER

Example: PROJECT CHECK PLANNED AFTER = 7
Setting to set default value for planned date after. Value is number of days after to days date.

PROJECT CHECK PLANNED BEFORE

Example: PROJECT CHECK PLANNED BEFORE = 5
Setting to set default value for planned date before. Value is number of days before to days date.

PROJECT CHECK RESP AFTER

Example: PROJECT CHECK PLANNED AFTER = 7
Setting to set default value for response date after. Value is number of days after to days date.

PROJECT CHECK RESP BEFORE

Example: PROJECT CHECK RESP BEFORE = 0
Setting to set default value for response date before. Value is number of days before to days date.

PROJECT TASK CHECK AUTO

Should the number of project task in the same area be visible on the button or not?

RECEIVED BY ENABLE

Should the <Received by> field be protected/impossible to change.

REMINDER DEFAULT ADD MINUTES

Example: REMINDER DEFAULT ADD MINUTES = 60
Default number of minutes before start date on reminder/activity.
Note! If the value is 60 and you create the reminder at 08:40 the system will suggest that the calendar activity starts at 09:40

REMINDER DEFAULT COMMENT

Example: REMINDER DEFAULT COMMENT = <CUSTOMER_NAME>
Default comment on reminder created from a project.
You can use the same bookmarks as the bookmarks for COMPANY XXX/MAIL_PROJECT/TECHNICIAN MESSAGE

REMINDER DEFAULT DUR MINUTES

Example: REMINDER DEFAULT DUR MINUTES = 10
Default number of minutes duration on the calendar activity created

REMINDER DEFAULT REMINDER MINUTES

Example: REMINDER DEFAULT REMINDER MINUTES = 10
Default number of minutes 'reminder before' on the calendar activity created

REMINDER DEFAULT SUBJECT

Example: REMINDER DEFAULT SUBJECT = <PROJECT NO>/<TASK NO>
Default subject on reminder created from a project.
You can use the same bookmarks as the bookmarks for COMPANY XXX/MAIL PROJECT/TECHNICIAN MESSAGE

RES MAN INFO TEXT TYPE

Example: RES MAN INFO TEXT TYPE = 4
Which information should be displayed in all the columns under resource management?
1= Customer name
2 = Address name
3 = Address1 + post description
4 = Machine no
5 = Machine location
6 = Machine no + model type
7 = Machine no + machine location

RES MAN SHOW ACTIVITIES

Should also normal activities be added to the resource calendar and resource planning?

SEARCH SALE PROJECT NO

Should it be possible to search for sale project number in the service project search?

SEND MAIL ON FINISH

Should the email screen dialog (CTRL + E) always open automatically whenever a task is completed?

SERVICE INTERVAL ACTION CODE

Example: SERVICE INTERVAL ACTION CODE = PM
See: General about all settings beginning with SERVICE INTERVAL 
Here you can define the value of the action code selected in SERVICE INTERVAL ACTION CODE_NO if the task is periodic service.

SERVICE INTERVAL ACTION CODE NO

Example: SERVICE INTERVAL ACTION CODE = 3
See: General about all settings beginning with SERVICE INTERVAL 
Here you can define if it is Action_Code 1, 2 or 3 that signifies if a task is a periodic service.

SERVICE INTERVAL CHECK ON

See: General about all settings beginning with SERVICE INTERVAL 
Check if you want Evatic to attempt to calculate a PM-number.

SERVICE INTERVAL TASK CODE

Example: SERVICE INTERVAL TASK CODE = PM
See: General about all settings beginning with SERVICE INTERVAL 
Here you can define the value of the symptom code selected in SERVICE INTERVAL TASK CODE_NO if the task is periodic service.

SERVICE INTERVAL TASK CODE NO

Example: SERVICE INTERVAL TASK CODE_NO =1
See: General about all settings beginning with SERVICE_INTERVAL_
Here you can define if it is symptom code1, 2 or 3 that signifies if the task is periodic service.

SERVICE ORDER DATE TODAY ON

Check if the todays date should be displayed automatically whenever you add service lines to the order.

SHOW CUSTOMER DOCUMENTS

Should it be possible to see the documents stored under the customer card in the project module (see the document tab?

SHOW MANUALLY CHECK OUT

Should it be possible manually check out a project send to mobile.
(See project/solution tab and project summary, where you can right click and select <check out> from a menu.

SHOW MODEL AS TYPE OR DESC

When adding a machine to a task (project/support) (see drop down list, F3), customer call window and project search (F9)
If not checked then show model type (MODEL.MODEL TYPE)
If checked then show description (MODEL.DESCRIPTION)

SHOW PLANNED DUR HOURS

Should the planned duration be entered as minutes or hours. If checked, hours.

SHOW SELECT SERVICE ARTICLE

If checked then there will be possible to select service article on each task on the tab 'Task' (project and recurring project)
The dispatcher can then choose the service articles code separately for each task before the task is assigned to a technician.
If the task has a service article selected this choice will be used instead of (default) service articles selected on the machine, technician, department etc.

It is also possible to setup default service article code that are connected to different symptomcodes. Then you don't have to choose service article codes manually.

SHOW SUMMARY ACTION

Should action text be shown as a column in the project summary list or not?

SHOW SUPPLIER ORDER STATUS

Show a tab in project window with information about supplier orders connected to the project (also shows a icon on this tab if any information).

Can only be used if GLOBAL_USER \ STOCK ADMIN \ ON = 1 (and you have a license for using stock admin)

SHOW SYMPTOMCODE TOOLTIP ON

Should tooltips (= symptomcode description) be shown when marking symptomcode 1-3?

SHOW WORKED TIME

Should worked time be shown on a project or not (see Solution tab). If checked extra columns (worked and remaining) next to the technician will be displayed.

In Evatic Service/Settings/Project/Service articles you can set up service articles types (W1-W3, T1-T3) They can be part of calculating (worked and remaining) , see SHOW WORKED TIME_SERVICES_TYPE.

SHOW WORKED TIME SERVICES TYPE

Example: SHOW WORKED TIME SERVICES TYPE = #W1#
Which service articles types (W1-W3, T1-T3) (see Evatic Service/Settings/Project/Service articles) should be part of calculating (worked and remaining). See SHOW WORKED TIME.
E.g.
#W1#
#W1#T1#W3#

STATUS ASSIGNED

Example: STATUS ASSIGNED = T
In Project- Overview there is a list containing all open tasks. One of the fields in this list is task status. Evatic can automatically change the value in this field when the task is allocated to a technician for the first time. Here you can enter the status required for the task.

STATUS DEFAULT

Example: STATUS DEFAULT= DEL
Which status should be default? Note! STATUS SHOW PROJECT DETAILS must be checked.

STATUS DELIVERED

Example: STATUS DELIVERED = OK
In Project- Overview there is a list containing all open tasks. One of the fields in this list is task status. Evatic can automatically change the value in this field when articles from express orders arrive. This is only valid for users of stock control in Evatic. Here you can enter the status required for the task.

This function will work if the setting COMPANY_YYY \ STOCK_ADMIN_PROJECT_ORDER \ UPDATE STATUS NODE ALL DELIVERED is not checked.

STATUS SHOW PROJECT DETAILS

Should the task status field be visible in the project window/task tab?

SUMMARY ASK PLANNED DATE

Should it be possible to set planned duration for a task when assigning a task by drag & drop to the technician list? A new screen dialog will open where you can set date and time.

SUMMARY CALENDAR SHOW TECH NAME

Should the technician's name or number/code show in the project calendar? If checked, name is shown.

SUMMARY EDIT ON

In Project- Overview there is a list containing all open tasks. One of the fields in this list is task status. If you want to be able to edit this field directly in Project-Overview, enter yes here.

SUMMARY SHOW SYMPTOM DESC

Should the symptomtext or -code show in the project summary? If checked, text is shown.

SUMMARY SHOW TECH MOBILE

Should the technician's mobile phone number be show in the project summary?

SUMMARY SHOW TECHNICIAN NAME

Should the technician's name or number/code show in the project summary? If checked, name is shown.

SUMMARY TECH TASKS NOT SHOW NODE

Example: SUMMARY TECH TASKS NOT SHOW NODE = #1_All_2_Awaiting parts#
When double clicking on a technician in the technician list (see Project summary), all assign tasks for the selected technician, despite which folder the tasks are placed in, will be shown in the task list. If some assign tasks should not be displayed when double clicking, the name of the folders where the tasked are placed can be set up here.
E.g.:
#1_All_2_Awaiting parts#
#1_All_2_Awaiting parts#1_All_2_Assign#

SYMPTOM TEXT FOCUS ON TOP

Should the focus in the symptom text box be at the end of the text (standard) or at the start of the text. If checked display on top.

SYMPTOM TREE KEY ON

See: General about symptom tree
If checked the folder structure (e.g. Copy machine/Digital/CLC300/Paper in/Paper crash) will be returned to the symptom description in the project.

SYMPTOM TREE ON

See: General about symptom tree
This must be checked if the functionality is to be available.

SYMPTOM TREE TAG ON

See: General about symptom tree
If checked you can enter a code or text behind each node of the symptom tree (when the symptom tree is set up), and this value will be returned to the symptom description for the project.

TECH CALENDAR FINISHED TASK TEXT

Example: TECH CALENDAR FINISHED TASK TEXT = <PROJECT_TEXT> <PROJECT_TASK_PROJECT NO>/<PROJECT_TASK_TASK NO> <CUSTOMER_CUSTOMER_NO> <CUSTOMER_CUSTOMER_NAME>'
(This text is default). Bookmarks can be used to decide the information displayed on finished task in the technician calendar.
Bookmarks:
<PROJECT_TASK_PROJECT NO>
<PROJECT_TASK_TASK NO>
<PROJECT_TASK_CONTACT>
<PROJECT_TASK_RECEIVED_BY>
<PROJECT_TASK_RESPONSE_DATE>
<PROJECT_TASK SYMPTOM_TEXT>
<PROJECT_TASK ACTION_TEXT>
<PROJECT_TASK_COMMENT_INTERNAL>
<PROJECT_TASK_TASK TITLE>
<CUSTOMER_CUSTOMER_NO>
<CUSTOMER_SEARCH_NAME>
<CUSTOMER_CUSTOMER_NAME>
<CUSTOMER_ADDRESS_1>
<CUSTOMER_ADDRESS_2>
<CUSTOMER_ADDRESS_3>
<CUSTOMER_COUNTRY>
<CUSTOMER_POSTAL_CODE>
<CUSTOMER_POSTAL_DESCRIPTION>
<MACHINE_ADDRESS_NAME>
<MACHINE_ADDRESS_1>
<MACHINE_ADDRESS_2>
<MACHINE_ADDRESS_3>
<MACHINE_COUNTRY>
<MACHINE_POSTAL_CODE>
<MACHINE_POSTAL_DESCRIPTION>
<MACHINE MACHINE NO>
<MACHINE LOCATION>
<MACHINE_PHONE_NO>
<MACHINE_FAX_NO>
<MACHINE MODEL TYPE>
<MACHINE_MODEL_DESCRIPTION>
<MACHINE_CONTRACT_TYPE>
<MACHINE_CONTRACT_VALID_TO>
<P_INFO 01>
<P_INFO 02>
<P_INFO 03>
<P_INFO 04>
<P_INFO 05>
<P_INFO 06>
<SYMPTOM_CODE_1>
<SYMPTOM_CODE_2>
<SYMPTOM_CODE_3>
<SYMPTOM_CODE_1_TEXT>
<SYMPTOM_CODE_2_TEXT>
<SYMPTOM_CODE_3_TEXT>

TECH CALENDAR ORDER TEXT

Example: TECH CALENDAR ORDER TEXT= <ORDER_TEXT> <ORDER_ORDER NO> <CUSTOMER_CUSTOMER_NO> <CUSTOMER_CUSTOMER_NAME>
(This text is default). Bookmarks can be used to decide the information displayed from order in the technician calendar (not linked to project)
Bookmarks:
<CUSTOMER_CUSTOMER_NO>
<CUSTOMER_SEARCH_NAME>
<CUSTOMER_CUSTOMER_NAME>
<ORDER_ORDER NO>

TECH CALENDAR PLANNED TASK TEXT

Example: TECH CALENDAR PLANNED TASK TEXT = <PLANNED_TEXT> <PROJECT_TASK_PROJECT NO>/<PROJECT_TASK_TASK NO> <CUSTOMER_CUSTOMER_NO> <CUSTOMER_CUSTOMER_NAME>. <PROJECT_TASK SYMPTOM_TEXT>
(This text is default). Bookmarks can be used to decide the information displayed on planned task in the technician calendar.

TECH CALENDAR RECUR DATE FORMAT

Example: TECH CALENDAR RECUR DATE FORMAT = YY-MM-DD
Date format displayed in the calendar activity for recurring tasks. Eg.: YY-MM-DD (default)
DD-MM-YYYY
DD/MM/YY
DD/MM/YYYY
DD.MM.YYYY

TECH CALENDAR RECUR TASK TEXT

Example: TECH CALENDAR RECUR TASK TEXT = (Default: 'Recurring task: <PROJECT_TASK_PROJECT NO>/<PROJECT_TASK_TASK NO> <CUSTOMER_CUSTOMER_NO> <CUSTOMER_CUSTOMER_NAME> <PROJECT_TASK SYMPTOM_TEXT>')
Text displayed in the calendar activity for recurring tasks.
Bookmarks:
<PROJECT_TASK_PROJECT NO>
<PROJECT_TASK_TASK NO>
<PROJECT_TASK_CONTACT>
<PROJECT_TASK_RECEIVED_BY>
<PROJECT_TASK_RESPONSE_DATE>
<PROJECT_TASK SYMPTOM_TEXT>
<PROJECT_TASK ACTION_TEXT>
<PROJECT_TASK_COMMENT_INTERNAL>
<PROJECT_TASK_TASK TITLE>
<CUSTOMER_CUSTOMER_NO>
<CUSTOMER_SEARCH_NAME>
<CUSTOMER_CUSTOMER_NAME>
<MACHINE_ADDRESS_NAME>
<MACHINE_ADDRESS_1>
<MACHINE_ADDRESS_2>
<MACHINE_ADDRESS_3>
<MACHINE_COUNTRY>
<MACHINE_POSTAL_CODE>
<MACHINE_POSTAL_DESCRIPTION>
<MACHINE MACHINE NO>
<MACHINE LOCATION>
<MACHINE_PHONE_NO>
<MACHINE_FAX_NO>
<MACHINE MODEL TYPE>
<MACHINE_MODEL_DESCRIPTION>
<MACHINE_CONTRACT_TYPE>
<MACHINE_CONTRACT_VALID_TO>
<P_INFO 01>
<P_INFO 02>
<P_INFO 03>
<P_INFO 04>
<P_INFO 05>
<P_INFO 06>

TECH CALENDAR RECUR TIM SEP

Example: TECH CALENDAR RECUR TIM SEP = \
Sign used for separating hours and minutes displayed in the calendar for recurring tasks. Eg. (: = default, \ etc)

TECHNICIAN START STOP T COLOR

Example: TECHNICIAN START STOP W COLOR = green
Color for start/stop travel time (see COMPANY YYY \ Evatic Mobile \ SHOW TECHNICIAN START STOP)

TECHNICIAN START STOP W COLOR

Example: TECHNICIAN START STOP W COLOR = green
Color for start/stop work time (see COMPANY YYY \ Evatic Mobile \ SHOW TECHNICIAN START STOP)

TRANSFER INFO FIELDS TO ORDER

Example: TRANSFER INFO FIELDS TO ORDER = 2#3#4#
Should the project info fields (1-6) be transferred automatically to the order screen and the order info fields (1-6)? 0 for no or e.g. 2#3#4#

USE ACTION CODE DEPENDENCIES

If checked show the tree for the action codes dependencies.

USE ACTION CODE STRONG RELATION

Check if you want to have a strong relation between the action code. The relation between the action code is set up in a separate window under Settings->Project->Actioncode dependencies. When this is on, only the action code 1 is filled when creating a new project. The user has to select from action code 1 and then action code 2 is filled with values that are related to the value in action code 1. The same relation between action code 2 and 3.

USE CUSTOMER DEPT ON

If checked the system uses the department from customer, if not checked it uses the department from user.

USE SYMPTOM CODE DEPENDENCIES

Check to show the tree for the symptom codes dependencies.

USE SYMPTOM CODE STRONG RELATION

Check if you want to have a strong relation between the symptom code. The relation between the symptom code is set up in a separate window under Settings->Project->Symptom dependencies (Evatic). When this is on, only the symptom code 1 is filled when creating a new project. The user has to select from symptom code 1 and then symptom code 2 is filled with values that are related to the value in symptom code 1. The same relation between symptom code 2 and 3.

PROJECT INFO

INFO 01

Example: INFO 01 = Information
Within the project dialog it is possible to add extra 6 fields which can be used freely. The text entered here will be the field name for the first field. Only the settings with a value will be displayed.

INFO 02

Example: INFO 02 = Information
Within the project dialog it is possible to add extra 6 fields which can be used freely. The text entered here will be the field name for the second field. Only the settings with a value will be displayed.

INFO 03

Example: INFO 03 = Information
Within the project dialog it is possible to add extra 6 fields which can be used freely. The text entered here will be the field name for the third field. Only the settings with a value will be displayed.

INFO 04

Example: INFO 04 = Information
Within the project dialog it is possible to add extra 6 fields which can be used freely. The text entered here will be the field name for the fourth field. Only the settings with a value will be displayed.

INFO 05

Example: INFO 05 = Information
Within the project dialog it is possible to add extra 6 fields which can be used freely. The text entered here will be the field name for the second fifth. Only the settings with a value will be displayed.

INFO 06

Example: INFO 06 = Information
Within the project dialog it is possible to add extra 6 fields which can be used freely. The text entered here will be the field name for the sixth field. Only the settings with a value will be displayed.

INVOICE FILE PATH

Example: INVOICE FILE PATH = C:\Pogram files\Evatic Service\Invoice#DATE#_#TIME#.pdf
Folder and filename for automatically store invoice print outs. #DATE# will be changed to date and #TIME# to time.

INVOICE FILE TYPE

Example: INVOICE FILE TYPE = PDF
The file which should be saved. Evatic Service only has support for PDF.

INVOICE INDEX FIELDS

Example: INVOICE INDEX FIELDS = <FILE NAME>, <OrderNo>, <InvoiceNo>
Fields which are to be included in the index file (see Report designer).

INVOICE INDEX FILE PATH

Example: INVOICE INDEX FILE PATH = c:\temp\invoice_index.txt
Path to a file where the information is saved as one row for each print.

If INVOICE INDEX ONE FILE=0, then INVOICE INDEX FILE PATH must contain the character .
will be replaced with the PDF file name
Example: c:\temp*.txt
The * will be replaced with the name of the file created, so the index file has the same name as the PDF

INVOICE INDEX ON

Should a Index file containing meta-data about the invoice report file be created?

INVOICE INDEX ONE FILE

If checked it will be one index file for all PDF's. If not checked index file for each PDF.

INVOICE ON

Should the system automatically create a PDF file or not.

INVOICE REMINDER FILE PATH

Example: INVOICE REMINDER FILE PATH =C:\Program files\Evatic Service\InvoiceRem#DATE#_#TIME#.pdf
Folder and filename for automatically store invoice reminder print outs. #DATE# will be changed to date and #TIME# to time.

INVOICE REMINDER FILE TYPE

Example: INVOICE REMINDER FILE TYPE = PDF
The file which should be saved. Evatic Service only support PDF.

INVOICE REMINDER ON

Should the system automatically create a PDF file or not.

ORDER CONF INDEX FIELDS

Example: ORDER CONF INDEX FIELDS = <FILE NAME>,<ProjectNo>
Fields which are to be included in the index file (see Report designer).

ORDER CONF INDEX FILE PATH

Example: ORDER CONF INDEX FILE PATH = c:\temp\orderconf_index.txt
Path to a file where the information is saved as one row for each print.
If ORDER CONF INDEX ONE FILE=0, then ORDER CONF INDEX FILE PATH=*
* will be replaced with the PDF file name
Example: c:\temp*.txt
The * will be replaced with the name of the file created, so the index file has the same name as the PDF

ORDER CONF INDEX ON

Should index file containing meta-data about the order confirmation report file be created?

ORDER CONF INDEX ONE FILE

If checked it will be one index file for all PDF's. If not checked index file for each PDF.

ORDER CONFIRMATION FILE PATH

Example: ORDER CONFIRMATION FILE PATH = C:\Program files\Evatic Service\ORDER_CONFIRMATION#DATE#_#TIME#.pdf
Folder and filename for automatically store order confirmation print outs. #DATE# will be changed to date and #TIME# to time.

ORDER CONFIRMATION FILE TYPE

Example: INVOICE REMINDER FILE TYPE = PDF
The file which should be saved. Evatic Service only support PDF.

ORDER CONFIRMATION ON

Should the system automatically create a PDF file or not.

PACKING SLIP FILE PATH

Example: PACKING SLIP FILE PATH = C:\Program files\Evatic Service\PackingSlip#DATE#_#TIME#.pdf
Folder and filename for automatically store packing slip print outs. #DATE# will be changed to date and #TIME# to time.

PACKING SLIP FILE TYPE

Example: PACKING SLIP FILE TYPE = PDF
The file which should be saved. Evatic Service only support PDF.

PACKING SLIP INDEX FIELDS

Example: PACKING SLIP INDEX FIELDS = <FILE NAME>,<CustomerNo>,<PackingSlipNo>
Fields which are to be included in the index file (see Report designer).

PACKING SLIP INDEX FILE PATH

Example: PACKING SLIP INDEX FILE PATH = c:\temp\packingslip_index.txt
Path to a file where the information is saved as one row for each print.

If PACKING SLIP INDEX ONE FILE checked, then PACKING SLIP INDEX FILE PATH=*
* will be replaced with the PDF file name
Example: c:\temp*.txt
Then the * will be replaced with the name of the file created, so the index file has the same name as the PDF

PACKING SLIP INDEX ON

Should a Index file containing meta-data about the packing slip report file be created?

PACKING SLIP INDEX ONE FILE

If checked it will be one index file for all PDF's. If not checked index file for each PDF.

PACKING SLIP ON

Should the system automatically create a PDF file or not.

REPORT TO FILE

The settings under REPORT TO FILE gives you the possibility to automatically create a PDF file. The PDF file will be stored under the path C:\Program files\Evatic Service\InvoiceRem#DATE#_#TIME#.pdf
Example on how to set up this for invoice:
COMPANY XXX \ REPORT TO FILE \ INVOICE INDEX ON = 1
COMPANY XXX \ REPORT TO FILE \ INVOICE INDEX FIELDS = <FILE NAME>, <OrderNo>, <InvoiceNo>, <CustomerName>
<FILE NAME> = the PDF file that contains the invoice
All other settings are the same as the fields you have available in report designer for the same print.
If you want to use the data field OrderNo from the report designer = <OrderNo> etc. Each field is separated by comma.
COMPANY XXX \ REPORT TO FILE \ INVOICE INDEX FILE PATH = c:\temp\invoice_index.txt
Full path to a file where the information is saved as one row for each print. This file should be deleted when the files are imported to the external program.

SERVICE ORDER FILE PATH

Example: SERVICE ORDER FILE PATH = C:\Program files\Evatic Service\ServiceOrder#DATE#_#TIME#.pdf
Folder and filename for automatically store service order print outs. #DATE# will be changed to date and #TIME# to time.

SERVICE ORDER FILE TYPE

Example:SERVICE ORDER FILE TYPE = PDF
The file which should be saved. Evatic Service only support PDF.

SERVICE ORDER INDEX FIELDS

Example: SERVICE ORDER INDEX FIELDS = <FILE NAME>, <ProjectNo>
Fields which are to be included in the index file (see Report designer).

SERVICE ORDER INDEX FILE PATH

Example: SERVICE ORDER INDEX FILE PATH = c:\temp\serviceorder_index.txt
Path to a file where the information is saved as one row for each print.

If SERVICE_ORDER  INDEX ONE FILE=0, then SERVICE ORDER INDEX FILE PATH=*
* will be replaced with the PDF file name
Example: c:\temp*.txt
Then the * will be replaced with the name of the file created, so the index file has the same name as the PDF

SERVICE ORDER INDEX ON

Should index file containing meta-data about the service order report file be created?

SERVICE ORDER INDEX ONE FILE

If checked it will be one index file for all PDF's. If not checked index file for each PDF.

SERVICE ORDER ON

Should the system automatically create a PDF file or not.

SERVICE REPORT FILE PATH

Example: SERVICE REPORT FILE PATH = C:\Program files\Evatic Service\ServiceReport#DATE#_#TIME#.pdf
Folder and filename for automatically store service report print outs. #DATE# will be changed to date and #TIME# to time.

SERVICE REPORT FILE TYPE

Example: SERVICE REPORT FILE TYPE = PDF
The file which should be saved. Evatic Service only support PDF.

SERVICE REPORT INDEX FIELDS

Example: SERVICE REPORT INDEX FIELDS = <FILE NAME>, <ProjectNo>
Fields which are to be included in the index file (see Report designer).

SERVICE REPORT INDEX FILE PATH

Example: SERVICE REPORT INDEX FILE PATH = c:\temp\servicereport_index.txt
Path to a file where the information is saved as one row for each print.

If SERVICE REPORT INDEX ONE_FILE=0, then SERVICE REPORT INDEX FILE PATH=*
* will be replaced with the PDF file name
Example: c:\temp*.txt
Then the * will be replaced with the name of the file created, so the index file has the same name as the PDF

SERVICE REPORT INDEX ON

Should index file containing meta-data about the service report file be created?

SERVICE REPORT INDEX ONE FILE

If checked it will be one index file for all PDF's. If not checked index file for each PDF.

STOCK MOVE FILE PATH

Example: STOCK MOVE FILE PATH = C:\Program files\Evatic Service\StockMove#DATE#_#TIME#.pdf
Folder and filename for automatically store stock move print outs. #DATE# will be changed to date and #TIME# to time.

STOCK MOVE FILE TYPE

Example: STOCK MOVE FILE TYPE = PDF
The file which should be saved. Evatic Service only support PDF.

STOCK MOVE ON

Should the system automatically create a PDF file or not.

SUPPLIER ORDER FILE PATH

Example: SUPPLIER ORDER FILE PATH = C:\Program files\Evatic Service\SupplierOrder#DATE#_#TIME#.pdf
Folder and filename for automatically store supplier order print outs. #DATE# will be changed to date and #TIME# to time.

SUPPLIER ORDER FILE TYPE

Example: SUPPLIER ORDER FILE TYPE = PDF
The file which should be saved. Evatic Service only support PDF.

SUPPLIER ORDER INDEX FIELDS

Example: SUPPLIER ORDER INDEX FIELDS = <FILE NAME>,<OrderNo>
Fields which are to be included in the index file (see Report designer).

SUPPLIER ORDER INDEX FILE PATH

Example: SUPPLIER ORDER INDEX FILE PATH = c:\temp\supplierorder_index.txt
Path to a file where the information is saved as one row for each print.

If SUPPLIER ORDER INDEX ONE FILE=0, then SUPPLIER ORDER INDEX FILE PATH=*
* will be replaced with the PDF file name
Example: c:\temp*.txt
Then the * will be replaced with the name of the file created, so the index file has the same name as the PDF

SUPPLIER ORDER INDEX ON

Should index file containing meta-data about the supplier order report file be created?

SUPPLIER ORDER INDEX ONE FILE

If checked it will be one index file for all PDF's. If not checked index file for each PDF.

SUPPLIER ORDER ON

Should the system automatically create a PDF file or not.

SUPPLIER ORDER R INDEX FIELDS

Example: SUPPLIER ORDER INDEX FIELDS = <FILE NAME>,<OrderNo>
Fields which are to be included in the index file (see Report designer).

SUPPLIER ORDER R INDEX FILE PATH

Example: SUPPLIER ORDER INDEX FILE PATH = c:\temp\supplierorderreturn_index.txt
Path to a file where the information is saved as one row for each print.

If SUPPLIER ORDER R INDEX ONE FILE=0, then SUPPLIER ORDER R INDEX FILE PATH=*
* will be replaced with the PDF file name
Example: c:\temp*.txt
Then the * will be replaced with the name of the file created, so the index file has the same name as the PDF

SUPPLIER ORDER R INDEX ON

Should index file containing meta-data about the supplier return order report file be created?

SUPPLIER ORDER R INDEX ONE FILE

If checked it will be one index file for all PDF's. If not checked index file for each PDF.

SUPPLIER ORDER RETURN FILE PATH

Example: SUPPLIER ORDER FILE PATH = C:\Program files\Evatic Service\SupplierOrderRet#DATE#_#TIME#.pdf
Folder and filename for automatically store supplier order return print outs. #DATE# will be changed to date and #TIME# to time.

SUPPLIER ORDER RETURN FILE TYPE

Example: SUPPLIER ORDER RETURN FILE TYPE = PDF
The file which should be saved. Evatic Service only support PDF.

SUPPLIER ORDER RETURN ON

Should the system automatically create a PDF file or not.

REPORTS

REPORT PATH

Example: REPORT PATH = m:\Evatic Service\Report
All access reports from this folder will be automatically available from the node; Evatic Service->Reports in Evatic Service.

REPORTS NUMBER PRECISION

Example: REPORTS NUMBER PRECISION = 2
Here you can set the number of decimals that are being used when exporting data from a search-result (F9) into MS Excel.

SALE CALC

HW MAX DISCOUNT

Example: HW MAX DISCOUNT = 15
Max discount the salesman can give on hardware in a calculation in Evatic (In percent).

SALE DOCUMENT

DEFAULT FILENAME FORMAT

Example: DEFAULT FILENAME FORMAT = CCCCCCCC#-#TTTTTTTTTT#-#DDMMYYYY
The default document name can be formatted with a setting i Evatic Admin:
Settings -> Company -> SALE_DOCUMENT -> DEFAULT FILENAME FORMAT
Ex. 'CCCCCCCC#-#TTTTTTTTTT#-#DDMMYYYY', where # is de delimiter and C = Customername, T = Templatename, P = Projectname, DDMMYYYY = Date format. The number of C, T and P decides how many letters is being used from the data.

FOR EACH DEPARTMENT

Should default document tree for customers be dependent on which department the customer belongs to?

INFO CHECKBOX 01

Example: INFO CHECKBOX 01 = Web
Extra columns (1-5) for the customer documents can be added. The text entered here will be the column name. Only the settings with a value will be displayed.
In Evatic Service see document/event tab under customer, sales project and calendar.

INFO CHECKBOX 02

Example: INFO CHECKBOX 02 = Web
Extra columns (1-5) for the customer documents can be added. The text entered here will be the column name. Only the settings with a value will be displayed.
In Evatic Service see document/event tab under customer, sales project and calendar.

INFO CHECKBOX 03

Example: INFO CHECKBOX 03 = Web
Extra columns (1-5) for the customer documents can be added. The text entered here will be the column name. Only the settings with a value will be displayed.
In Evatic Service see document/event tab under customer, sales project and calendar.

INFO CHECKBOX 04

Example: INFO CHECKBOX 04 = Web
Extra columns (1-5) for the customer documents can be added. The text entered here will be the column name. Only the settings with a value will be displayed.
In Evatic Service see document/event tab under customer, sales project and calendar.

INFO CHECKBOX 05

Example: INFO CHECKBOX 05 = Web
Extra columns (1-5) for the customer documents can be added. The text entered here will be the column name. Only the settings with a value will be displayed.
In Evatic Service see document/event tab under customer, sales project and calendar.

TREE EDITABLE

A setting in Evatic Admin decides if you can have individual document-trees for each customer, or if all customers gets the default document-tree.

SALES PROJECT

INSERT PROJECT OL INT INFO

Insert order lines connected to order(s) created from sales project as internal info in service project.

INSERT PROJECT SYMPTOM TEXT

Use the sales project notes as symptom text in the service project. If yes, the order information field on the project is also set equal to the symptom text.

SMS PROJECT

MAIL FORMAT 1 NAME

Example: MAIL FORMAT 1 NAME = Order
Name of the settings in the drop down 'Format' on SMS from Project, Customer.

MAIL FORMAT 1 TEXT

Example: MAIL FORMAT 1 TEXT =
--------------------------------------------------
Job Reported By: <RECEIVED_BY>
Customer : <CUSTOMER_NAME>
Date Reported : <RECEIVED_DATE>
--------------------------------------------------
The content of the message on the SMS if this format is selected. A free text or bookmarks can be used.
**********************
Available codes:
Code
<ACTION_TEXT>
<ACTION_CODE_1>
<ACTION_CODE_2>
<ACTION_CODE_3>
<ADDRESS_NAME>
<ADDRESS_1>
<ADDRESS_2>
<AREA_CODE>
<AREA_TEXT>
<CONTACT>
<CONTRACT_CODE>
<CONTACT_EMAIL>
<CONTRACT_DESCRIPTION>
<CUSTOMER_NO>
<CUSTOMER_NAME>
<DATE_RESPONSE>
<DEPT>
<DATE_REPORTED>
<FAX_NO>
<INFORMATION>
<INSTALLATION_DATE>
<INSTALLATION_NODE>
<LOCATION>
<MACHINE NO>
<MODEL_DESCRIPTION>
<MODEL TYPE>
<NODE>
<NODE STATUS>
<PHONE_NO>
<POSTAL_CODE>
<POST_LOCATION>
<PRIORITY_CODE>
<PRI.PRIORITY_TEXT>
<PROJECT NO>
<PROJECT_TASK_STATUS>
<RECEIVED_BY>
<RECEIVED_DATE>
<RESPONSE_TIME>
<RESPONSE_DATE>
<SYMPTOM_CODE_1>
<SYMPTOM_CODE_2>
<SYMPTOM_CODE_3>
<SYMPTOM_TAG>
<SYMPTOM_TEXT>
<TASK NO>
<TIME_ESTIMATE>

MAIL FORMAT 10 NAME

Example: MAIL FORMAT 10 NAME = Order
Name of the settings in the drop down 'Format' on SMS from Project, Customer.

MAIL FORMAT 10 TEXT

Example: MAIL FORMAT 10 TEXT =
--------------------------------------------------
Job Reported By: <RECEIVED_BY>
Customer : <CUSTOMER_NAME>
Date Reported : <RECEIVED_DATE>
--------------------------------------------------
The content of the message on the SMS if this format is selected. A free text or bookmarks can be used.
**********************
Available codes:
Code
<ACTION_TEXT>
<ACTION_CODE_1>
<ACTION_CODE_2>
<ACTION_CODE_3>
<ADDRESS_NAME>
<ADDRESS_1>
<ADDRESS_2>
<AREA_CODE>
<AREA_TEXT>
<CONTACT>
<CONTRACT_CODE>
<CONTACT_EMAIL>
<CONTRACT_DESCRIPTION>
<CUSTOMER_NO>
<CUSTOMER_NAME>
<DATE_RESPONSE>
<DEPT>
<DATE_REPORTED>
<FAX_NO>
<INFORMATION>
<INSTALLATION_DATE>
<INSTALLATION_NODE>
<LOCATION>
<MACHINE NO>
<MODEL_DESCRIPTION>
<MODEL TYPE>
<NODE>
<NODE STATUS>
<PHONE_NO>
<POSTAL_CODE>
<POST_LOCATION>
<PRIORITY_CODE>
<PRI.PRIORITY_TEXT>
<PROJECT NO>
<PROJECT_TASK_STATUS>
<RECEIVED_BY>
<RECEIVED_DATE>
<RESPONSE_TIME>
<RESPONSE_DATE>
<SYMPTOM_CODE_1>
<SYMPTOM_CODE_2>
<SYMPTOM_CODE_3>
<SYMPTOM_TAG>
<SYMPTOM_TEXT>
<TASK NO>
<TIME_ESTIMATE>

MAIL FORMAT 2 NAME

Example: MAIL FORMAT 2 NAME = Order
Name of the settings in the drop down 'Format' on SMS from Project, Customer.

MAIL FORMAT 2 TEXT

Example: MAIL FORMAT 2 TEXT =
--------------------------------------------------
Job Reported By: <RECEIVED_BY>
Customer : <CUSTOMER_NAME>
Date Reported : <RECEIVED_DATE>
--------------------------------------------------
The content of the message on the SMS if this format is selected. A free text or bookmarks can be used.
**********************
Available codes:
Code
<ACTION_TEXT>
<ACTION_CODE_1>
<ACTION_CODE_2>
<ACTION_CODE_3>
<ADDRESS_NAME>
<ADDRESS_1>
<ADDRESS_2>
<AREA_CODE>
<AREA_TEXT>
<CONTACT>
<CONTRACT_CODE>
<CONTACT_EMAIL>
<CONTRACT_DESCRIPTION>
<CUSTOMER_NO>
<CUSTOMER_NAME>
<DATE_RESPONSE>
<DEPT>
<DATE_REPORTED>
<FAX_NO>
<INFORMATION>
<INSTALLATION_DATE>
<INSTALLATION_NODE>
<LOCATION>
<MACHINE NO>
<MODEL_DESCRIPTION>
<MODEL TYPE>
<NODE>
<NODE STATUS>
<PHONE_NO>
<POSTAL_CODE>
<POST_LOCATION>
<PRIORITY_CODE>
<PRI.PRIORITY_TEXT>
<PROJECT NO>
<PROJECT_TASK_STATUS>
<RECEIVED_BY>
<RECEIVED_DATE>
<RESPONSE_TIME>
<RESPONSE_DATE>
<SYMPTOM_CODE_1>
<SYMPTOM_CODE_2>
<SYMPTOM_CODE_3>
<SYMPTOM_TAG>
<SYMPTOM_TEXT>
<TASK NO>
<TIME_ESTIMATE>

MAIL FORMAT 3 NAME

Example: MAIL FORMAT 3 NAME = Order
Name of the settings in the drop down 'Format' on SMS from Project, Customer.

MAIL FORMAT 3 TEXT

Example: MAIL FORMAT 3 TEXT =
--------------------------------------------------
Job Reported By: <RECEIVED_BY>
Customer : <CUSTOMER_NAME>
Date Reported : <RECEIVED_DATE>
--------------------------------------------------
The content of the message on the SMS if this format is selected. A free text or bookmarks can be used.
**********************
Available codes:
Code
<ACTION_TEXT>
<ACTION_CODE_1>
<ACTION_CODE_2>
<ACTION_CODE_3>
<ADDRESS_NAME>
<ADDRESS_1>
<ADDRESS_2>
<AREA_CODE>
<AREA_TEXT>
<CONTACT>
<CONTRACT_CODE>
<CONTACT_EMAIL>
<CONTRACT_DESCRIPTION>
<CUSTOMER_NO>
<CUSTOMER_NAME>
<DATE_RESPONSE>
<DEPT>
<DATE_REPORTED>
<FAX_NO>
<INFORMATION>
<INSTALLATION_DATE>
<INSTALLATION_NODE>
<LOCATION>
<MACHINE NO>
<MODEL_DESCRIPTION>
<MODEL TYPE>
<NODE>
<NODE STATUS>
<PHONE_NO>
<POSTAL_CODE>
<POST_LOCATION>
<PRIORITY_CODE>
<PRI.PRIORITY_TEXT>
<PROJECT NO>
<PROJECT_TASK_STATUS>
<RECEIVED_BY>
<RECEIVED_DATE>
<RESPONSE_TIME>
<RESPONSE_DATE>
<SYMPTOM_CODE_1>
<SYMPTOM_CODE_2>
<SYMPTOM_CODE_3>
<SYMPTOM_TAG>
<SYMPTOM_TEXT>
<TASK NO>
<TIME_ESTIMATE>

MAIL FORMAT 4 NAME

Example: MAIL FORMAT 4 NAME = Order
Name of the settings in the drop down 'Format' on SMS from Project, Customer.

MAIL FORMAT 4 TEXT

Example: MAIL FORMAT 4 TEXT =
--------------------------------------------------
Job Reported By: <RECEIVED_BY>
Customer : <CUSTOMER_NAME>
Date Reported : <RECEIVED_DATE>
--------------------------------------------------
The content of the message on the SMS if this format is selected. A free text or bookmarks can be used.
**********************
Available codes:
Code
<ACTION_TEXT>
<ACTION_CODE_1>
<ACTION_CODE_2>
<ACTION_CODE_3>
<ADDRESS_NAME>
<ADDRESS_1>
<ADDRESS_2>
<AREA_CODE>
<AREA_TEXT>
<CONTACT>
<CONTRACT_CODE>
<CONTACT_EMAIL>
<CONTRACT_DESCRIPTION>
<CUSTOMER_NO>
<CUSTOMER_NAME>
<DATE_RESPONSE>
<DEPT>
<DATE_REPORTED>
<FAX_NO>
<INFORMATION>
<INSTALLATION_DATE>
<INSTALLATION_NODE>
<LOCATION>
<MACHINE NO>
<MODEL_DESCRIPTION>
<MODEL TYPE>
<NODE>
<NODE STATUS>
<PHONE_NO>
<POSTAL_CODE>
<POST_LOCATION>
<PRIORITY_CODE>
<PRI.PRIORITY_TEXT>
<PROJECT NO>
<PROJECT_TASK_STATUS>
<RECEIVED_BY>
<RECEIVED_DATE>
<RESPONSE_TIME>
<RESPONSE_DATE>
<SYMPTOM_CODE_1>
<SYMPTOM_CODE_2>
<SYMPTOM_CODE_3>
<SYMPTOM_TAG>
<SYMPTOM_TEXT>
<TASK NO>
<TIME_ESTIMATE>

MAIL FORMAT 5 NAME

Example: MAIL FORMAT 5 NAME = Order
Name of the settings in the drop down 'Format' on SMS from Project, Customer.

MAIL FORMAT 5 TEXT

Example: MAIL FORMAT 5 TEXT =
--------------------------------------------------
Job Reported By: <RECEIVED_BY>
Customer : <CUSTOMER_NAME>
Date Reported : <RECEIVED_DATE>
--------------------------------------------------
The content of the message on the SMS if this format is selected. A free text or bookmarks can be used.
**********************
Available codes:
Code
<ACTION_TEXT>
<ACTION_CODE_1>
<ACTION_CODE_2>
<ACTION_CODE_3>
<ADDRESS_NAME>
<ADDRESS_1>
<ADDRESS_2>
<AREA_CODE>
<AREA_TEXT>
<CONTACT>
<CONTRACT_CODE>
<CONTACT_EMAIL>
<CONTRACT_DESCRIPTION>
<CUSTOMER_NO>
<CUSTOMER_NAME>
<DATE_RESPONSE>
<DEPT>
<DATE_REPORTED>
<FAX_NO>
<INFORMATION>
<INSTALLATION_DATE>
<INSTALLATION_NODE>
<LOCATION>
<MACHINE NO>
<MODEL_DESCRIPTION>
<MODEL TYPE>
<NODE>
<NODE STATUS>
<PHONE_NO>
<POSTAL_CODE>
<POST_LOCATION>
<PRIORITY_CODE>
<PRI.PRIORITY_TEXT>
<PROJECT NO>
<PROJECT_TASK_STATUS>
<RECEIVED_BY>
<RECEIVED_DATE>
<RESPONSE_TIME>
<RESPONSE_DATE>
<SYMPTOM_CODE_1>
<SYMPTOM_CODE_2>
<SYMPTOM_CODE_3>
<SYMPTOM_TAG>
<SYMPTOM_TEXT>
<TASK NO>
<TIME_ESTIMATE>

MAIL FORMAT 6 NAME

Example: MAIL FORMAT 6 NAME = Order
Name of the settings in the drop down 'Format' on SMS from Project, Customer.

MAIL FORMAT 6 TEXT

Example: MAIL FORMAT 6 TEXT =
--------------------------------------------------
Job Reported By: <RECEIVED_BY>
Customer : <CUSTOMER_NAME>
Date Reported : <RECEIVED_DATE>
--------------------------------------------------
The content of the message on the SMS if this format is selected. A free text or bookmarks can be used.
**********************
Available codes:
Code
<ACTION_TEXT>
<ACTION_CODE_1>
<ACTION_CODE_2>
<ACTION_CODE_3>
<ADDRESS_NAME>
<ADDRESS_1>
<ADDRESS_2>
<AREA_CODE>
<AREA_TEXT>
<CONTACT>
<CONTRACT_CODE>
<CONTACT_EMAIL>
<CONTRACT_DESCRIPTION>
<CUSTOMER_NO>
<CUSTOMER_NAME>
<DATE_RESPONSE>
<DEPT>
<DATE_REPORTED>
<FAX_NO>
<INFORMATION>
<INSTALLATION_DATE>
<INSTALLATION_NODE>
<LOCATION>
<MACHINE NO>
<MODEL_DESCRIPTION>
<MODEL TYPE>
<NODE>
<NODE STATUS>
<PHONE_NO>
<POSTAL_CODE>
<POST_LOCATION>
<PRIORITY_CODE>
<PRI.PRIORITY_TEXT>
<PROJECT NO>
<PROJECT_TASK_STATUS>
<RECEIVED_BY>
<RECEIVED_DATE>
<RESPONSE_TIME>
<RESPONSE_DATE>
<SYMPTOM_CODE_1>
<SYMPTOM_CODE_2>
<SYMPTOM_CODE_3>
<SYMPTOM_TAG>
<SYMPTOM_TEXT>
<TASK NO>
<TIME_ESTIMATE>

MAIL FORMAT 7 NAME

Example: MAIL FORMAT 7 NAME = Order
Name of the settings in the drop down 'Format' on SMS from Project, Customer.

MAIL FORMAT 7 TEXT

Example: MAIL FORMAT 7 TEXT =
--------------------------------------------------
Job Reported By: <RECEIVED_BY>
Customer : <CUSTOMER_NAME>
Date Reported : <RECEIVED_DATE>
--------------------------------------------------
The content of the message on the SMS if this format is selected. A free text or bookmarks can be used.
**********************
Available codes:
Code
<ACTION_TEXT>
<ACTION_CODE_1>
<ACTION_CODE_2>
<ACTION_CODE_3>
<ADDRESS_NAME>
<ADDRESS_1>
<ADDRESS_2>
<AREA_CODE>
<AREA_TEXT>
<CONTACT>
<CONTRACT_CODE>
<CONTACT_EMAIL>
<CONTRACT_DESCRIPTION>
<CUSTOMER_NO>
<CUSTOMER_NAME>
<DATE_RESPONSE>
<DEPT>
<DATE_REPORTED>
<FAX_NO>
<INFORMATION>
<INSTALLATION_DATE>
<INSTALLATION_NODE>
<LOCATION>
<MACHINE NO>
<MODEL_DESCRIPTION>
<MODEL TYPE>
<NODE>
<NODE STATUS>
<PHONE_NO>
<POSTAL_CODE>
<POST_LOCATION>
<PRIORITY_CODE>
<PRI.PRIORITY_TEXT>
<PROJECT NO>
<PROJECT_TASK_STATUS>
<RECEIVED_BY>
<RECEIVED_DATE>
<RESPONSE_TIME>
<RESPONSE_DATE>
<SYMPTOM_CODE_1>
<SYMPTOM_CODE_2>
<SYMPTOM_CODE_3>
<SYMPTOM_TAG>
<SYMPTOM_TEXT>
<TASK NO>
<TIME_ESTIMATE>

MAIL FORMAT 8 NAME

Example: MAIL FORMAT 8 NAME = Order
Name of the settings in the drop down 'Format' on SMS from Project, Customer.

MAIL FORMAT 8 TEXT

Example: MAIL FORMAT 8 TEXT =
--------------------------------------------------
Job Reported By: <RECEIVED_BY>
Customer : <CUSTOMER_NAME>
Date Reported : <RECEIVED_DATE>
--------------------------------------------------
The content of the message on the SMS if this format is selected. A free text or bookmarks can be used.
**********************
Available codes:
Code
<ACTION_TEXT>
<ACTION_CODE_1>
<ACTION_CODE_2>
<ACTION_CODE_3>
<ADDRESS_NAME>
<ADDRESS_1>
<ADDRESS_2>
<AREA_CODE>
<AREA_TEXT>
<CONTACT>
<CONTRACT_CODE>
<CONTACT_EMAIL>
<CONTRACT_DESCRIPTION>
<CUSTOMER_NO>
<CUSTOMER_NAME>
<DATE_RESPONSE>
<DEPT>
<DATE_REPORTED>
<FAX_NO>
<INFORMATION>
<INSTALLATION_DATE>
<INSTALLATION_NODE>
<LOCATION>
<MACHINE NO>
<MODEL_DESCRIPTION>
<MODEL TYPE>
<NODE>
<NODE STATUS>
<PHONE_NO>
<POSTAL_CODE>
<POST_LOCATION>
<PRIORITY_CODE>
<PRI.PRIORITY_TEXT>
<PROJECT NO>
<PROJECT_TASK_STATUS>
<RECEIVED_BY>
<RECEIVED_DATE>
<RESPONSE_TIME>
<RESPONSE_DATE>
<SYMPTOM_CODE_1>
<SYMPTOM_CODE_2>
<SYMPTOM_CODE_3>
<SYMPTOM_TAG>
<SYMPTOM_TEXT>
<TASK NO>
<TIME_ESTIMATE>

MAIL FORMAT 9 NAME

Example: MAIL FORMAT 9 NAME = Order
Name of the settings in the drop down 'Format' on SMS from Project, Customer.

MAIL FORMAT 9 TEXT

Example: MAIL FORMAT 9 TEXT =
--------------------------------------------------
Job Reported By: <RECEIVED_BY>
Customer : <CUSTOMER_NAME>
Date Reported : <RECEIVED_DATE>
--------------------------------------------------
The content of the message on the SMS if this format is selected. A free text or bookmarks can be used.
**********************
Available codes:
Code
<ACTION_TEXT>
<ACTION_CODE_1>
<ACTION_CODE_2>
<ACTION_CODE_3>
<ADDRESS_NAME>
<ADDRESS_1>
<ADDRESS_2>
<AREA_CODE>
<AREA_TEXT>
<CONTACT>
<CONTRACT_CODE>
<CONTACT_EMAIL>
<CONTRACT_DESCRIPTION>
<CUSTOMER_NO>
<CUSTOMER_NAME>
<DATE_RESPONSE>
<DEPT>
<DATE_REPORTED>
<FAX_NO>
<INFORMATION>
<INSTALLATION_DATE>
<INSTALLATION_NODE>
<LOCATION>
<MACHINE NO>
<MODEL_DESCRIPTION>
<MODEL TYPE>
<NODE>
<NODE STATUS>
<PHONE_NO>
<POSTAL_CODE>
<POST_LOCATION>
<PRIORITY_CODE>
<PRI.PRIORITY_TEXT>
<PROJECT NO>
<PROJECT_TASK_STATUS>
<RECEIVED_BY>
<RECEIVED_DATE>
<RESPONSE_TIME>
<RESPONSE_DATE>
<SYMPTOM_CODE_1>
<SYMPTOM_CODE_2>
<SYMPTOM_CODE_3>
<SYMPTOM_TAG>
<SYMPTOM_TEXT>
<TASK NO>
<TIME_ESTIMATE>

SMS SERVER

Example: SERVER = SMTP.TELENOR.NO
The Mail server that Evatic uses to send sms with information to a customer/technician
In this setting also receiver and message is set up as bookmarks: #RECIPIENTS#
#MESSAGE#
E.g.
https://telenormobil.no/smapi/3/sms?sender=90976944&password=90976944&recipients=
#RECIPIENTS#&sId=90976944&deliveryNotificationNumber=90976944&content=#MESSAGE#
This information will be logged as an mail under Events (see Evatic Service/Projects)

URL PASSWORD

Example: URL PASSWORD = 900
Password for the HTTP service (optional).

URL REQUEST HEADER 1

Example: URL REQUEST HEADER 1 = SMS

URL REQUEST HEADER 1 VALUE

Example: URL REQUEST HEADER 1 VALUE = 10

URL REQUEST HEADER 2

Example: URL REQUEST HEADER 2 = SMS
Request Properties name can be send when HTTP data will be send (optional).

URL REQUEST HEADER 2 VALUE

Example: URL REQUEST HEADER 2 VALUE = 10
Request Properties value can be send when HTTP data will be send (optional).

URL USER NAME

Example: URL USER NAME = mobile
Username for the HTTP service (optional).

SORTGROUP TEXT

CALCMETHOD007TEXT1

Example: CalcMethod007Text1 = Deposit:
Calculation method 007 sends out a deposit. What should be displayed on the invoice? This is only valid for the first and last invoice in 007 contracts.

CALCMETHOD007TEXT2

Example: CalcMethod007Text2 = Invoiced until:
The main text for invoiced until for 007 contracts. Valid for the first and last invoice.

CONTACT INFO

Example: CONTACT_Info = Info
Main text/explanation for Info field on customer contact.

CONTRACTCALCMETHOD 001

Example: ContractCalcMethod 001 = Periodic volume, annually
Main text/explanation of the system's calculation method 001.

CONTRACTCALCMETHOD 002

Example: ContractCalcMethod 002 = Periodic volume, variable length
Main text/explanation of the system's calculation method 002.

CONTRACTCALCMETHOD 003

Example: ContractCalcMethod 003 = Periodic volume, fixed length
Main text/explanation of the system's calculation method 003.

CONTRACTCALCMETHOD 004

Example: ContractCalcMethod 004 = Copies used
Main text/explanation of the system's calculation method 004.

CONTRACTCALCMETHOD 005

Example: ContractCalcMethod 005 = Running volume, with time limit
Main text/explanation of the system's calculation method 005.

CONTRACTCALCMETHOD 006

Example: ContractCalcMethod 006 = Running volume, without time limit Main text/explanation of the system's calculation method 006.

CONTRACTCALCMETHOD 007

Example: ContractCalcMethod 007 = Copies used, with deposit
Main text/explanation of the system's calculation method 007.

CONTRACTCALCMETHOD 008

Example: ContractCalcMethod 008 = Running volume, time limit only
Main text/explanation of the system's calculation method 008.

COSTGROUP1 ARTICLE

Example: CostGroup1 ARTICLE = Accessories
Main text/explanation for cost group 1 on article.

COSTGROUP2 ARTICLE

Example: CostGroup2 ARTICLE = Consumables
Main text/explanation for cost group 2 on article.

COSTGROUP3 ARTICLE

Example: CostGroup3 ARTICLE = Travel
Main text/explanation for cost group 3 on article.

COSTGROUP4 ARTICLE

Example: CostGroup4 ARTICLE = Labour
Main text/explanation for cost group 4 on article.

COSTGROUP5 ARTICLE

Example: CostGroup5 ARTICLE = Machine
Main text/explanation for cost group 5 on article.

COSTGROUP6 ARTICLE

Example: CostGroup6 ARTICLE = Other
Main text/explanation for cost group 6 on article.

SORTGROUP1 ARTICLE

Example: SortGroup1 ARTICLE =Manufacture
Main text/explanation for sort group 1 on article.

SORTGROUP1 CONTRACT

Example: SortGroup1 CONTRACT = Group contract
Main text/explanation for sort group 1 on contract header.

SORTGROUP1 CONTRACT FP

Example: SortGroup1 CONTRACT FP = Auto. Price adjustment.
Main text/explanation for sort group1 on fixed price rows in contract.

SORTGROUP1 CONTRACT PV

Example: SortGroup1 CONTRACT PV = Auto. Price adjustment.
Main text/explanation for sort group1 on volume rows in contract.

SORTGROUP1 CUSTOMER

Example: SortGroup1 CUSTOMER = Customer type
Main text/explanation for sort group 1 in customer.

SORTGROUP1 EXT MACHINE

Example: SortGroup1_EXT_MACHINE = Supplier
Main text/explanation for sort group 1 in external machine.

SORTGROUP1 MACHINE

Example: SortGroup1 MACHINE = Supplier
Main text/explanation for sort group 1 in machine.

SORTGROUP2 ARTICLE

Example: SortGroup2 ARTICLE = Product type
Main text/explanation for sort group 2 in article.

SORTGROUP2 CONTRACT

Example: SortGroup2 CONTRACT = Group contract
Main text/explanation for sort group 2 in contract header.

SORTGROUP2 CONTRACT FP

Example: SortGroup2 CONTRACT FP = Auto. Price adjustment.
Main text/explanation for sort group2 on fixed price rows in contract.

SORTGROUP2 CONTRACT PV

Example: SortGroup2 CONTRACT PV = Auto. Price adjustment.
Main text/explanation for sort group2 on volume rows in contract.

SORTGROUP2 CUSTOMER

Example: SortGroup2 CUSTOMER = Land
Main text/explanation for sort group2 in customer

SORTGROUP2 EXT MACHINE

Example: SortGroup2 EXT MACHINE = Machine type
Main text/explanation for sort group 2 in external machine.

SORTGROUP2 MACHINE

Example: SortGroup2 MACHINE = Machine type
Main text/explanation for sort group 2 in machine.

SORTGROUP3 ARTICLE

Example: SortGroup3 ARTICLE = Detailed product type
Main text/explanation for sort group 3 in article.

SORTGROUP3 CONTRACT

Example: SortGroup3 CONTRACT = Group contract
Main text/explanation for sort group 3 in contract header.

SORTGROUP3 CUSTOMER

Example: SortGroup3 CUSTOMER = Chain store
Main text/explanation for sort group 3 in customer.

SORTGROUP3 EXT MACHINE

Example: SortGroup3 EXT MACHINE = Leasing/Rental/Sale
Main text/explanation for sort group 3 in external machine.

SORTGROUP3 MACHINE

Example: SortGroup3 MACHINE = Leasing/Rental/Sale
Main text/explanation for sort group 3 in machine.

SORTGROUP4 ARTICLE

Example: SortGroup4 ARTICLE = Not in use
Main text/explanation for sort group 4 in article.

SORTGROUP4 CONTRACT

Example: SortGroup4 CONTRACT = Group contract
Main text/explanation for sort group 4 in contract header.

SORTGROUP4 CUSTOMER

Example: SortGroup4 CUSTOMER = Version
Main text/explanation for sort group 4 in customer.

SORTGROUP4 MACHINE

Example: SortGroup4 MACHINE = Not in use
Main text/explanation for sort group 4 on machine.

SORTGROUP5 ARTICLE

Example: SortGroup5 ARTICLE = Not in use
Main text/explanation for sort group 5 on article.

SORTGROUP5 CONTRACT

Example: SortGroup5 CONTRACT = Group contract
Main text/explanation for sort group 5 on contract header.

SORTGROUP5 CUSTOMER

Example: SortGroup5 CUSTOMER = Not in use
Main text/explanation for sort group 5 on customer.

SORTGROUP5 MACHINE

Example: SortGroup5 MACHINE = Not in use
Main text/explanation for sort group 5 on machine.

STOCK ADMIN

ADD SERIAL NO ACC MULTIPLE

Turn on/off if serial numbers automatically should be added for accessories if you sell multiple machines on one row. If checked, serial numbers will automatically be added on accessories for machines when you sell multiple machines and accessories (qty bigger than 1)

ALL ORDER STOCK CHECK

In the order dialog Evatic Service can give a warning if you select an article that no longer exists in the stock you have chosen from. This warning will be displayed on completion of an order, but if you want the warning to appear when selecting all types of articles, you can check this setting.

ALLOW EDIT ACCESSORIES

When the stock admin module is enabled, it's possible to prevent the user from editing the accessories on the machine in the machine window. Check, to allow changes, uncheck to prevent changes.

ALWAYS ALLOW FINISH

Should it be possible to finish an order where an article is under stock administration but;
1. The article does not exist as an article on the chosen stock.
2. The order line does not contain information on which stock to subtract the article from.
If this setting is unchecked, it will not be possible to finish such orders.
If this setting is checked, it will be possible to finish such orders.

ARTICLE LABEL PREVIEW

Do you want a preview of your label or should it be directly sent to the printer? Check for preview, uncheck for printout.

CHECK AVAILABLE

This is a setting to check for availability on stock when opening the drop down list for stock in order lines.
If checked, the column 'Qty available' on a sales order should show the quantity on stock. If articles are used on other orders but not delivered (packing slip not printed) the stock availability will be reduced.
If unchecked, the column 'Qty available' on a sales order should show the quantity on stock. Only delivered articles will reduce the stock availability.

CHECK SERIAL NO ON OPEN ORDER

Articles which require serial number on orders. When this is checked the system will check if the serial number is selected on another open order and stop you from selecting the serial number before the other order is finished.

COMMENT ON INTERNAL MOVE

This setting allows you to add a comment when moving an article between stocks. A pop-up field will appear in which a comment can be added.

COMMENT ON INVENTORY COUNT

This setting allows you to add a comment when counting stocks. A pop-up field will appear in which a comment can be added.

CORRECTIVE MEAN COST PRICE

Should mean cost price be re-calculated if the price on the supplier invoice differ from the cost price used when the articles was received from the supplier.

COST PRICE WRITE BACK ON RECEIVE

Example: COST PRICE WRITE BACK ON RECEIVE = 1
Should the price from the supplier be updated on the linked sales order when the articles are received from the supplier?
(The setting is only used if the supplier order is linked to a sales order)
Values:
0 = Off
1 = On for open orders
2 = On for all orders (will also update closed orders)
Remember
a) DIRECT DELIVERY - If the supplier order is a direct delivery order it will always be updated with the cost price from the supplier if the USE MEAN COST PRICE is set.
If you do not use mean cost price you can use the setting (COST PRICE WRITE BACK ON RECEIVE) to turn the function on. (this function updates the price on the linked sales order even if the order is closed.)
b) If you use mean cost price the mean cost price will in this case automatically update open orders with the new mean cost price.
If you turn on this new setting (COST PRICE WRITE BACK ON RECEIVE) then the cost price from this supplier order will be used to update the linked order instead.
Other open orders that not are linked to a supplier order will be updated with the new mean cost price.
Even if this setting is turned on the new price will be considered in the calculation of the new mean cost price (= when the order is not a direct delivery order)

DELIVER BEFORE FINISH

If the stock admin is used, this setting controls if the user can finish an order before all articles on the order is delivered (= a packing slip is printed). The default value is checked = Order cannot be finished before all articles are delivered (= packing slip must be printed). Unchecked = Order can be finished before all articles is delivered (= no packing slip must be printed).

DIRECT DELIVERY STOCK

Example: DIRECT DELIVERY STOCK = 100
This is the stock no for the stock that is used as a direct delivery-stock. This setting is used as a default stock when the articles being ordered in Stock Admin is to be delivered directly to the end-customer.

The main stock number must not be entered here.

DISABLE IF PACKING SLIP

This setting controls whether the user can make changes to the orderlines on an order where the orderlines have been delivered (on a packing slip). The default value is 1=checked = orderlines can NOT be changed. Unchecked = orderlines can be changed.

HIDE ORDERS WITHOUT ORDER TYPE

Should supplier orders without order-type be hidden or not.

The return orders that create a supplier order must be in Evatic for statistics and functionality reasons.

IM FILE LAYOUT

Example: IM FILE LAYOUT = <ARTICLE NO>;<STOCK_FROM>
Setting to import articles for internal stock movement. The imported file must be a text file. Each line in the text file, will be imported. The following fields which can be imported are as follows:
<ARTICLE NO>
<STOCK_FROM>
<STOCK_TO>
<QUANTITY>
<SERIAL NO>
Example: If the setting is <ARTICLE NO>;<STOCK_FROM>;<STOCK_TO>;<QUANTITY>
The import expect that each line includes all the 4 fields for each line (you do not have to use all). If you use more than 1 field, they need to be separated with ';'

MANDTORY DEPT NEW SUPPLIER ORDER

Should it be mandatory to select department when creating a new supplier order?

MIN DAYS FOR CALCULATION

Example: MIN DAYS FOR CALCULATION = 20
Used in calculating automatic order information in Stock Admin, and are used as a default value. Days between first and last order of article. See Evatic
Service help for more information about this functionality.

NEW SUPPLIER ORDER DEPT CHECK

To be used to limit supplier and stock list based on department in new order tab when you create new supplier orders.

NUM MONTHS USED QTY

Example: NUM MONTHS USED QTY = 6
Used in calculating automatic order information in Stock Admin. In this setting you can choose the number of months for calculating average use (see example below).

NUM WEEKS ORDER POINT

Example: NUM WEEKS ORDER POINT= 2
In this setting you can choose the number of weeks for re-order point (see example below).

NUM WEEKS ORDER QTY OR MAX

Example: NUM WEEKS ORDER QTY OR MAX = 1
In this setting you can choose the number of weeks to order (see example below).
E.g.
a) From Evatic Admin - Number of weeks for re-order point = 2 (NUM WEEKS ORDER POINT)
b) From Evatic Admin - Number of weeks for order quantity = 1 (NUM WEEKS ORDER QTY OR MAX)
c) Used last 6 months is 500 (NUM MONTHS USED QTY)
New re-order point ' 500/26 * 2 = 39
New order qty ' 500/26 * 1 = 19
See Evatic Service/Stock admin/Automatic order info tab.

OPEN SALES ORDER ON RECEIVE

Should Evatic ask if you would like to automatically open the linked sales order when receiving articles to the stock.

The order to the supplier must be linked to a sales order

ORDER EVEN IF OPEN ORDER

Should it be possible to get an order proposal even if you have an open order where the articles are not delivered.?

Only valid for articles that are set up with 'Max Qty' or 'Minimum stock level'.
The system will then order (Max-amount (10) - Amount on stock (2) - Open supplier order amount (2) = 6)

ORDER PROP EXISTS ON AUTO

Should the order lines where the qty on all stocks > qty to order be marked with a color?
(If checked, see ORDER PROP EXISTS ON STOCK COLOR)

ORDER PROP EXISTS ON STOCK COLOR

Example: ORDER PROP EXISTS ON STOCK COLOR = (green)
Should the order lines where the qty on all stocks > qty to order be marked with a color? The color can be selected from this setting.

PRINT LABEL ON RECEIVE

Should a dialog box for printing labels pop up when receiving goods from the supplier?

PRINT SHOW DIALOG

Should the print dialog window open when printing supplier orders?

SERVICE ORDER STOCK CHECK

In the order dialog Evatic Service can give a warning if you select an article that no longer exists in the stock you have chosen from. This warning will be displayed on completion of an order.

SHOW SUPPLIER ORDER OL INFO 01

Show order line info 01 as column on new and existing supplier orders.

SHOW SUPPLIER ORDER OL INFO 02

Show order line info 02 as column on new and existing supplier orders.

STOCK ADMIN ORDER CREATE

(Default checked; Possible to make supplier orders in EMA)
When this setting is checked, then a button 'Order article' will be visible. This button can be used when creating supplier orders from the mobile solution.

STOCK ORDER

Example: STOCK ORDER = F
This setting controls the order in which the articles are taken from stock (sold). This setting only applies when the Stock Admin is used. This setting can have 2 different values. F =FIF0 (First In - First Out). L=LIFO (Last In - First Out). The default value is F.

SUPPLIER ORDER GROUP BY OL INFO

Should the system group by info 01, 02 from order line when supplier orders are created?
This means that only lines with the same values from these fields will be added to the same order.

SUPPLIER ORDER MAIL ATTACH ON

Should the email to the supplier contain a PDF attachment with the ordered articles?

SUPPLIER ORDER MAIL F NAME

Example: SUPPLIER ORDER MAIL F NAME = SUPPLIER_ORDER_<OrderNo>.PDF
This setting decides the name of the PDF attachment (orders)

SUPPLIER ORDER MAIL RET F NAME

Example: SUPPLIER ORDER MAIL F NAME = RETURN_ORDER_<OrderNo>.PDF
This setting decides the name of the PDF attachment (return orders).

UPDATE MEAN COST PRICE ONLY STOCK ORDER

Should the mean cost price only be updated on stock orders?
If the supplier order line is linked to a sales order or to a project task,
THEN: do not update the mean cost price
ELSE: update mean cost price as usual.
Remember:
a) If you use this setting you probably also want to set the setting COST PRICE WRITE BACK ON RECEIVE = 1
b) If you delete a packing slip this will affect the mean cost price even if the setting UPDATE MEAN COST PRICE ONLY STOCK ORDER = checked

USE MEAN COST PRICE

Should the articles mean cost price be used?
If this choice is Yes the articles mean cost price will be used if it is available in the following functions:

• Order, when the user add and order line in Evatic Service's order module.

The mean cost price for the selected article on the selected stock will be used. The cost price on the time the article is added will be used. If the mean cost price changes in the time between the orders are added and the orders are finished the cost price on the order will not change.
Be aware:

• If no mean cost price is available the standard cost price will be used.
• Articles with serial number is already in the current version of Evatic Service added/showed with it's correct cost price.
• When the user is ordering articles from the supplier the standard cost price for the selected combination of article and supplier will be used.

USE MEAN COST PRICE ALL STOCK

If checked, the article will calculate the same mean cost price for all stocks.

If this setting is 'turned on' on an existing database that has used mean cost price before, the mean cost price for all stock on an article is not automatically set before you receive new article from the supplier.

USE ONLY MAX STOCK QTY

Example: USE ONLY MAX STOCK QTY = 2
This setting adds columns to the article screen and stock admin. E.g. a maximum quantity on stock for each article can be decided.
0 = only order amount is displayed
1 = only maximum stock is displayed
2 = both (order amount and maximum stock) are displayed

USE SUPPLIER DISCOUNT

If this setting is checked, then the discount (1 and 2) from the supplier will be used when you create a supplier order in the stock admin window.
Lines added automatically or manually will have cost list price from the article and discount 1 and 2 from the supplier
Lines linked from a normal sales/service order will have cost price from the order and discount 1 and 2 from the supplier.

The supplier order must be created after the setting is set to 1 and Evatic Service is restarted

VALUE REPORT CHECK LAST SUPPLIER INVOICE

Example: VALUE REPORT CHECK LAST SUPPLIER INVOICE = unchecked
Only used if USE MEAN COST PRICE= checked
If the setting VALUE REPORT CHECK LAST SUPPLIER INVOICE = checked
Stock-value-list (stock-module => tab 'stock taking' => button 'print value report')
The cost-price here should be considered like: compare the current mean cost price (use also setting if for all stocks or for each single stock) with the last cost-price (supplier-invoice).
If the last supplier-invoice is lower than the mean cost price, then the value used should be the last supplier-invoice-price to calculate the stock-value. ELSE: the mean cost price should be used for stock-value.
This setting is not used for articles with serial number, articles with serial number will get the price for the specific serial number

STOCK ADMIN PROJECT ORDER

ADD PRE ORDER

if the setting is checked; When all articles are booked, the task would be moved to a special-folder: UPDATE STATUS NODE ALL DELIVERED = checked
Add the articles received as pre order
If STOCK ADMIN PROJECT ORDER \ DUPLICATE TASK = unchecked the articles are added on the original task
If STOCK ADMIN PROJECT ORDER \ DUPLICATE TASK = checked the articles are added on the new task
This setting works only if the setting COMPANY YYY \ STOCK ADMIN PROJECT ORDER \ UPDATE STATUS NODE ALL DELIVERED = checked

CHECK STOCK ON ASSIGN

Should the stock move/check open window when you assign a task?
The window checks if the technician has pre-order articles on stock and suggest to move from main stock etc.
This function works on all types off assign in the service module (when the settings is turned on).
It does not work when the users push 'to service' in helpdesk and the task is automatically assigned using area or machine technicians.

CHECK STOCK ON ASSIGN ALWAYS

Should the system always suggest to move or order the articles on pre-order?
If checked, the system will always suggest to move or order the articles on pre-order, even if these articles are available on the technician's stock
If unchecked, the system will suggest to move or order the articles on pre-order only if these articles are not available on the technician's stock
This setting only applies if CHECK STOCK ON ASSIGN = checked

CHECK STOCK ON ASSIGN AUTO MOVE

Should the system automatically move the articles if this is possible instead of asking the user to if the article should be moved?
If it is not possible to move the articles the stock assign window will appear
Only used if CHECK STOCK ON ASSIGN = checked

DUPLICATE TASK

If the setting is checked; When all articles are booked and the task would be moved to a special-folder: UPDATE STATUS NODE ALL DELIVERED = checked
Close the original task and duplicate the task as a new task on the same project.
This setting works only if the setting
COMPANY YYY \ STOCK ADMIN PROJECT ORDER \ UPDATE STATUS NODE ALL DELIVERED = checked.

DUPLICATE TASK ASSIGNED TECHS

If this setting is checked, then also the assigned technicians will be assigned the new task created.
Only used if STOCK ADMIN PROJECT ORDER \ DUPLICATE TASK = checked.

DUPLICATE TASK SYMPTOM CODE 1 -> 3

Example: DUPLICATE TASK SYMPTOM_CODE_1 -> 3= INS
Symptom code 1,2,3 to use on the new task if STOCK ADMIN PROJECT ORDER \ DUPLICATE TASK = 1
if this setting is blank the original symptom code is used.

DUPLICATE TASK SYMPTOM TEXT

Example: DUPLICATE TASK SYMPTOM TEXT= The goods have arrived....
Symptom text to use on the new task if STOCK ADMIN PROJECT ORDER \ DUPLICATE TASK = checked
if this setting is blank the original symptom text is used.

ORDER FROM PRE ORDER NODE

Example: ORDER FROM PRE ORDER NODE= 1_All_2_Wait for parts
When the user right clicks on pre order and order articles from supplier, should the task be moved to a pre-defined folder?
Add the node of the folder here. If the setting is blank the task is not moved.
If the setting GLOBAL USER \ TREE \ FOR EACH DEPARTMENT = checked, then the setting COMPANY YYY \ STOCK ADMIN PROJECT ORDER \ ZZZ ORDER FROM PRE ORDER NODE is used

STATUS DELIVERED

Example: STATUS DELIVERED= 1
In Project- Overview there is a list containing all open tasks. One of the fields in this list is task status. Evatic can automatically change the value in this field when articles from express orders arrive. This is only valid for users of stock control in Evatic. Here you can enter the status required for the task.

STATUS DELIVERED NODE

Example: STATUS DELIVERED NODE= 1_All_2_Delivered parts
Denotes the standard node in the project tree for tasks when all the articles that are ordered from the supplier for this project are received. The project task will then move to this node automatically.

UPDATE STATUS NODE ALL DELIVERED

If this setting is 1 then status and node will be updated on the project task when all the articles that are ordered from the supplier for this project are received.
For the function to work you must also set the settings:
COMPANY YYY \ STOCK ADMIN PROJECT ORDER \ STATUS DELIVERED - Status on the task when all articles are delivered.
If the setting GLOBAL USER \ TREE \ FOR EACH DEPARTMENT is unchecked
COMPANY YYY \ STOCK ADMIN PROJECT ORDER \ STATUS DELIVERED NODE - Node in the project tree when all articles are delivered.
If the setting GLOBAL USER \ TREE \ FOR EACH DEPARTMENT is checked and the supplier order is connected to a department.
COMPANY YYY \ STOCK ADMIN PROJECT ORDER \ ZZZ STATUS DELIVERED NODE - Node in the project tree when all articles are delivered (ZZZ is the department number connected to the supplier order).
Previously the status on a task would be changed automatically if the setting 'COMPANY YYY \ PROJECT \ STATUS DELIVERED' had a value and the supplier order was an express order. This function is not changed and will work if the setting COMPANY YYY \ STOCK ADMIN PROJECT ORDER \ UPDATE STATUS NODE ALL DELIVERED = unchecked.

SUPPLIER

DEPT LIMITATION ON

Should it be possible to limit on department when entering supplier or not.

SUPPORT

ACTION TREE EXPAND LEVEL

Example: ACTION TREE EXPAND LEVEL= 0
Here you can define the level you want to use as default when opening the action code tree. 0 = all levels, 1 = first level, 2 = second level etc.

ADD ON LOG MOVED FROM ON HOLD

Example: ADD ON LOG MOVED FROM ON HOLD = Moved from on hold
Should the system log information (see start/stop list)?

• when the task is moved back from on hold and
• information about which folder it was moved to.

ADD ON SAME ORDER PROJECT

When finishing a task should the system add the order lines to an existing order, if an open order exists on the same HelpDesk project.

ALARM COLOR EVEN IF WORK

Should the rows have alarm color even if the task has registered work or is checked out
(then the alarm color will always show (according to alarm minutes and response time) except if the task has priority with priority level 1)

ALARM COLOR EVEN IF WORK ADD NEW

Should the rows have alarm color even if the task has registered work as received time?
If the setting AUTO ADD TIME NEW SUP is checked, then work hours will automatically be added on a task that is manually registered.
The work type that is added is set AUTO ADD TIME NEW TYPE
If the setting ALARM COLOR EVEN IF WORK ADD NEW is checked, then the alarm color will show even if it exists work time with work type AUTO ADD TIME NEW TYPE.
If there are work time with other types or the task is checked out, then the task will not have alarm color.

ALARM COLOUR

Example: ALARM COLOUR = <Select color from window>
The color that is to be used in the HelpDesk Overview for tasks where the response time has almost expired.

ALARM MINUTES

Example: ALARM MINUTES = 30
How many minutes should it go before the response time deadline, and the color changes? (see ALARM COLOUR)

AUTO ADD NEW TIME TYP

Example: AUTO ADD NEW TIME TYP = TEL
The standard HelpDesk type forHelpDesk tasks (see Evatic Service/Settings/Support)

AUTO ADD TEXT LINES

Evatic Service can automatically add text lines to the order you make when finishing a HelpDesk task. (See ORDER_TEXT_SUPPORT).

AUTO ADD TIME NEW SUP

Should the time the user uses for HelpDesk be saved or not (meaning time used before you press create, e.g. searching customer etc.).
For information:
When AUTO ADD TIME NEW SUP is checked, the registered support-time was previously used to act on response time. This means that if the task was manually registered the task would not change color based on the expiring of response time.
Based on this a new setting (ALARM COLOR EVEN IF WORK ADD NEW) was added to disregard the time used to register the task, and only look at worked time on the task. If there is no worked time, but only registered time on the task, then the task will change color regarding the response time alarm settings on the priority code dialogue under settings - Helpdesk

AUTO CLOSE SECONDS AUTO MESSAGE

Example: AUTO CLOSE SECONDS AUTO MESSAGE = 5
When using advanced HelpDesk settings (see Customer card in Evatic Service), e-mail messages can be send automatically to customers. A pop-up message will appear to inform the user that a message has been send. Here you can define how many seconds it should take for the pop up message to appear. E.g. 1, 5, 10 seconds.

CHECK MACHINE BEFORE CREATE

Should Evatic check that a machine is connected to the task before the user can create (save) the task.
If you uncheck, you will still get the possibility to choose Yes or No: "This task is not connected to a machine. Do you still want to create the task?'

CHECK MACHINE BEFORE FINISH

Should Evatic check that a machine is connected to the task before the user can finish the task.
If you uncheck, you will still get the possibility to choose Yes or No: "This task is not connected to a machine. Do you still want to finish the task?'

CLOSURE STATUS ON

Should it be possible to add a closure status on a HelpDesk task?

CONTRACT TYPE ENABLE

Should it be possible to change the contract type on a HelpDesk task?

CONTRACT TYPE ONLY VALID

Should only contract types linked to the customer/machine (see contract) be visible in the drop down list.

If checked, the setting CONTRACT TYPE ENABLE must also be checked.

CUSTOMER SORT GROUP NO LIMIT TAS

Example: CUSTOMER SORT GROUP NO LIMIT TAS = 5
This setting is linked to the temporarily settings in the HelpDesk module 'Max number of task each group'.
It decides what should be perceived as a group. The value here is linked to the customer sortgroups 1-5. E.g If the setting is 5, all customer with the same value in Sortgroup 5, will be perceived as the same customer group. If the 'Max number of task each group' = 10, all customers with the same value in SG5 will only be shown with maximum 10 task in the HelpDesk list.

DEF ON HOLD TIME

Example: DEF ON HOLD TIME = 09:00
Default time on day when the task is to get back from on hold. Example: If this setting is 08:00 the system will suggest on hold date: today + 1 day at 08:00. Remember to check the calendar in "Evatic Admin \ Calendar' to check if the next day is a work day. The date that is suggested must always be the next work day. Note! This is when the 'on hold' button is used. Whenever the 'No Answer' button is used the support job is put on hold for 10 minutes.

DEF PRIORITY CODE

Example: DEF PRIORITY CODE = Urgent
The standard priority code for HelpDesk tasks.

DEF SYMPTOM CODE 1

Example: DEF SYMPTOM CODE 1 = 100
The standard symptom code 1 for new HelpDesk tasks.

DEF WORK TYPE

Example: DEF WORK TYPE = 3
The standard work type for HelpDesk task

DEFAULT INCIDENT STATUS

Example: DEFAULT INCIDENT STATUS = NEW
Standard incident status when creating a new HelpDesk task.

DEFAULT RESPONSE TIME

Example: DEFAULT RESPONSE TIME = 1
The number of hours to be set as the response time for HelpDesk tasks connected to a machine not covered by a contract.

DEFAULT SERVICEARTICLES CODE

Example: DEFAULT SERVICEARTICLES CODE = STD
Standard service articles when creating a new HelpDesk task. This value will be automatically added as service article when creating a new order.

DEFAULT SOLUTION TIME

Example: DEFAULT SOLUTION TIME = 8
The number of hours to be set as the solution time for HelpDesk tasks connected to a machine not covered by a contract.

DEFAULT SUPPORT NODE

Example: DEFAULT SUPPORT NODE = 1_All_2_Team1
Denotes the standard node in the HelpDesk tree for incoming tasks.

This is handle mainly by the setup folder for the resource handling HelpDesk task. There you set up the resource default folder. (see Evatic Service Settings/Technician/Technician). If you are not using a folder per resource, you will use this default setting (DEFAULT SUPPORT NODE)

DEFAULT SYMPTOM CODE 1

Example: DEFAULT SOLUTION TIME = SUP
If this setting has a value this values should automatically be set as default value for symptom code 1(..4) when the user push New HelpDesk

DEFAULT SYMPTOM CODE 2

Example: DEFAULT SOLUTION TIME = SUP
If this setting has a value this values should automatically be set as default value for symptom code 1(..4) when the user push New HelpDesk

DEFAULT SYMPTOM CODE 3

Example: DEFAULT SOLUTION TIME = SUP
If this setting has a value this values should automatically be set as default value for symptom code 1(..4) when the user push New HelpDesk

DEFAULT SYMPTOM CODE 4

Example: DEFAULT SOLUTION TIME = SUP
If this setting has a value this values should automatically be set as default value for symptom code 1(..4) when the user push New HelpDesk

FILTER PUBLIC FOLDERS

Example: FILTER PUBLIC FOLDERS = 0
Add filter on the 'public' folders: pause node, on hold node and problem management nodes, so that only tasks that originally belonged to the users team(s) are visible. 1 for yes and 0 for no.
Filter for the folders defined in these settings:

• SUPPORT \ PAUSED TASK NODE
• SUPPORT \ SUPPORT ON HOLD PRIORITY NODE
• PROBLEM MANAGEMENT \ NODE ACCEPTED SUPPORT
• PROBLEM MANAGEMENT \ NODE INSERT TASK SUPPORT
• PROBLEM MANAGEMENT \ NODE REJECTED SUPPORT

INCIDENT STATUS ON

Should incident status be available for the HelpDesk module or not.

LINK BUTTON 1 ACTION

Example: LINK BUTTON 1 ACTION = http://www.evatic.com/
In the HelpDesk list screen, what command should be run when clicking link button 1?
Enter the command as you would enter it in the Start --> Run window in Windows
Bookmarks:
<CUSTOMER_NO> selected customer
<USERNAME> the logged in user in Evatic Service
<PASSWORD> the password the user logged in to Evatic with.
Also the bookmarks under COMPANY XXX \ MAIL PROJECT \ TECHNICIAN MESSAGE can be used.

LINK BUTTON 1 TEXT

Example: LINK BUTTON 1 TEXT = Evatic Homepage
In the HelpDesk list screen, what text should appear on link button 1?

LINK BUTTON 2 ACTION

Example: LINK BUTTON 2 ACTION = winword.exe
In the HelpDesk list screen, what command should be run when clicking link button 2?
Enter the command as you would enter it in the Start --> Run window in Windows
Bookmarks:
<CUSTOMER_NO> selected customer
<USERNAME> the logged in user in Evatic Service
<PASSWORD> the password the user logged in to Evatic with.
Also the bookmarks under COMPANY XXX / MAIL PROJECT / TECHNICIAN MESSAGE can be used.

LINK BUTTON 2 TEXT

Example: LINK BUTTON 2 TEXT = Microsoft Word
In the HelpDesk list screen, what text should appear on link button 2?

LINK BUTTON 3 ACTION

Example: LINK BUTTON 3 ACTION = notepad.exe
In the HelpDesk list screen, what command should be run when clicking link button 3?
Enter the command as you would enter it in the Start --> Run window in Windows
Bookmarks:
<CUSTOMER_NO> selected customer
<USERNAME> the logged in user in Evatic Service
<PASSWORD> the password the user logged in to Evatic with.
Also the bookmarks under COMPANY XXX \ MAIL PROJECT \ TECHNICIAN MESSAGE can be used.

LINK BUTTON 3 TEXT

Example: LINK BUTTON 3 TEXT = Open Notepad
In the HelpDesk list screen, what text should appear on link button 3?

LINK BUTTON 4 ACTION

Example: LINK BUTTON 4 ACTION = mstsc.exe 192.168.XXX.XXX
In the HelpDesk list screen, what command should be run when clicking link button 4?
Enter the command as you would enter it in the Start --> Run window in Windows
Bookmarks:
<CUSTOMER_NO> selected customer
<USERNAME> the logged in user in Evatic Service
<PASSWORD> the password the user logged in to Evatic with.
Also the bookmarks under COMPANY XXX / MAIL PROJECT / TECHNICIAN MESSAGE can be used.

LINK BUTTON 4 TEXT

Example: LINK BUTTON 4 TEXT = Remote Desktop to office
In the HelpDesk list screen, what text should appear on link button 4?

MACHINE LIST SG NOT VISIBLE

Example: MACHINE LIST SG NOT VISIBLE = #1_ACCESSORIE#3_HEATER#
Default sort groups from model can be added here. This in order to limit the search list in the HelpDesk module. If machine has a model with sort groups added here, they will not be displayed in the search.
Example:
#1_ACCESSORIE#
Search list will not include machines with models with sort group 1 and value ACCESSORIE
#1_ACCESSORIE#3_HEATER#
Search list will not include machines with models with sort group 1 and value ACCESSORIE or with sort group 3 and value HEATER.

MACHINE SHOW ALL CONTACTS ON

Should all contacts be available or only the machine related contacts when you register a HelpDesk task?

MAIL DEFAULT MESSAGE

Example: MAIL DEFAULT MESSAGE =
--------------------------------------------------
Job Reported By: <RECEIVED_BY>
Customer : <CUSTOMER_NAME>
Date Reported : <RECEIVED_DATE>
--------------------------------------------------
The message contents when Evatic sends e-mail with HelpDesk information to a customer (see MAIL PROJECT)

MAIL FINISHED MESSAGE

Example: MAIL FINISHED MESSAGE = Dear customer.........
The message contents when Evatic sends e-mail with HelpDesk information to a customer. The email message can automatically be shown when finishing a HelpDesk task. See also Evatic Service help file.

MAIL FOLDER CHANGE MESSAGE

Example: MAIL FOLDER CHANGE MESSAGE = Dear customer.........
The message contents when Evatic sends e-mail with HelpDesk information to a customer. The email message can automatically be shown when moving a HelpDesk task to another folder. See also Evatic Service help file.

MAIL NEW MESSAGE

Example: MAIL NEW MESSAGE = Dear customer.........
The message contents when Evatic sends e-mail with HelpDesk information to a customer. The email message can automatically be shown when registering a HelpDesk task. See also Evatic Service help file.

MAIL NO ANSWER MESSAGE

Example: MAIL NO ANSWER MESSAGE = Dear customer.........
The message contents when Evatic sends e-mail with information to a customer. The email message can automatically be shown when pressing the button <No answer> on a HelpDesktask. See also Evatic Service help file.

MAIL REMOTE ACCESS MESSAGE

Example: MAIL REMOTE ACCESS MESSAGE = Dear customer.........
The message contents when Evatic sends e-mail to give the customer access to share the camera with the Evatic user.
The bookmark for the token that the customer needs is available in the list (<REMOTE_ACCESS_TOKEN>)
This token can be combined with your url to customer web: https://ecw.test.com/<REMOTE_ACCESS_TOKEN>

MANDATORY ACTION CODE

MANDATORY ACTION TEXT

MANDATORY ALSO TO SERVICE

Example: MANDATORY ALSO TO SERVICE = 1
If this setting is checked, then the mandatory settings that are used for the finish button also should be used for the 'to service' button:
Examples of settings that also should be checked if MANDATORY ALSO TO SERVICE = checked and the user push the 'to service'

MANDATORY SYMPTOM CODE

Example: MANDATORY SYMPTOM CODE = 1
Should symptom codes be mandatory to enter? 0 = no. If the setting is 1; symptom code 1 must be selected before the task can be created. If the setting is 2 symptoms code 1 and symptom code 2 must be selected before the task can be created. If the setting is 3 then 1, 2 and 3 must be selected, if the setting is 4 then 1, 2, 3 and 4 must be selected.

MANDATORY SYMPTOM TEXT

Example: MANDATORY SYMPTOM TEXT = 1
Should symptom text be mandatory to enter?

MOVE TO SER CHANGE RECEIVED DATE

Example: MOVE TO SER CHANGE RECEIVED DATE = 1
When sending HelpDesk tasks to service should receive date be set when pressing the button (->Service) or not.

MOVE TO SUP CHANGE RECEIVED DATE

Example: MOVE TO SUP CHANGE RECEIVED DATE = 1
When sending service tasks to HelpDesk, should receive date be set when pressing the button (Send to HelpDesk) or not.

NO ANSWER ON HOLD MINUTES

Example: NO ANSWER ON HOLD MINUTES = 7
Number of minutes the HelpDesk task automatically should be set on hold when pressing the 'No answer' button.

NO ANSWER ON HOLD MINUTES PRI 1

Example: NO ANSWER ON HOLD MINUTES PRI 1 = 5
Number of minutes the HelpDesk task with priority 1 automatically should be set on hold when pressing the 'No answer' button.

ORDER TYPE

Example: ORDER TYPE = SUP
Order types are a method of sorting/grouping orders generated by Evatic Service to allow for easy tracking the origin of the orders at a later time. Here you can denote the default order type from HelpDesk.

PAUSED TASK NODE

Example: PAUSED TASK NODE = 1_All_2_Team Support_3_On hold
This setting will be used to determine the node HelpDesk tasks will be placed into when pressing the <Pause> button. If this node is blank nothing should be executed.

REMINDER DEFAULT ADD MINUTES

Example: REMINDER DEFAULT ADD MINUTES = 60
Default number of minutes before start date on reminder/activity.

If the value is 60 and you create the reminder at 08:40 the system will suggest that the calendar activity starts at 09:40

REMINDER DEFAULT COMMENT

Example: REMINDER DEFAULT COMMENT = <CUSTOMER_NAME>
Default comment on reminder created from a HeplDesk task.
You can use the same bookmarks as the bookmarks for COMPANY XXX/MAIL PROJECT/TECHNICIAN MESSAGE

REMINDER DEFAULT DUR MINUTES

Example: REMINDER DEFAULT DUR MINUTES = 10
Default number of minutes duration on the calendar activity created

REMINDER DEFAULT REMINDER MINUTES

Example: REMINDER DEFAULT REMINDER MINUTES = 10
Default number of minutes 'reminder before' on the calendar activity created

REMINDER DEFAULT SUBJECT

Example: REMINDER DEFAULT SUBJECT = <PROJECT NO>/<TASK NO>
Default subject on reminder created from a project.
You can use the same bookmarks as the bookmarks for COMPANY XXX/MAIL PROJECT/TECHNICIAN MESSAGE

REMOTE PROGRAM

Path and parameters for remote program. Possible parameters:
<ADDRESS> - from remote access
<ACCESS_TYPE> - from remote access
<CONNECTION_TYPE> - from remote access
<COORD_X> - button coord
<COORD_Y> - button coord
E.g: Remoteprogram.exe <ADDRESS>, <ACCESS_TYPE>, <CONNECTION_TYPE>
Microsoft Remote Desktop: c:\windows\system32\mstsc.exe /v:<ADDRESS> (the first part refers to where the program is installed on your PC)

REMOTE PROGRAM SHOW

Should the <Remote> function be displayed within the HelpDesk dialog in Evatic?

S

HOW SELECT SERVICE ARTICLE

Should the user be able to select a service article in the HelpDesk window?

SEARCH CUSTOMER SIMPLE

Example: SEARCH CUSTOMER SIMPLE = 1
Should customer search when entering a new HelpDesk task be simple and only search for customer number and -name.

SEARCH DEFAULT MACHINE

Example: SEARCH DEFAULT MACHINE = 1
Should customer or machine search (option) be default. If this is 1 the option machine should be default, if 0 the customer search is default.

SEARCH MACHINE SIMPLE

Should machine search when entering a new HelpDesk task be simple and only search for machine number and -customer name/customer search name.

SEARCH SHOW C NAME 2

Example: SEARCH SHOW C NAME 2 = 0
Should customer name 2 be shown in the drop-down list when searching for customers

Only when COMPANY_XXX \ SUPPORT \ SEARCH CUSTOMER SIMPLE = 0

SEARCH SHOW C NAME 3

Example: SEARCH SHOW C NAME 3 = 0
Should customer name 3 be shown in the drop-down list when searching for customers.

Only when COMPANY_XXX \ SUPPORT \ SEARCH CUSTOMER SIMPLE = 0

SEARCH SHOW C NAME 4

Should customer name 4 be shown in the drop-down list when searching for customers. 1

Only when COMPANY_XXX \ SUPPORT \ SEARCH CUSTOMER SIMPLE = 0

SHOW MODEL AS TYPE OR DESC

Decides if model type or model description should be visible in the HelpDesk module
If this setting is unchecked, then show model type (MODEL.MODEL TYPE)
if this setting is checked then show description (MODEL.DESCRIPTION)

SHOW ORDER AFTER FINISH

If something on the order is invoice able, should the Order dialog screen be displayed.

SHOW PRIORITY ALERT MESSAGE

Should a big red alert message box pop up whenever you have a task with priority 1.

SHOW QUEUE WINDOW

Should the HelpDesk project queue window be displayed or not?
Note! A HelpDesk project is queued if the user creates a new project without stopping the clock on the project he/she is currently working on.

SHOW SELECT WARNING

Example: SHOW SELECT WARNING = 0
If this setting is checked, then the following should happen: If the user selects start or assign a task and another task exists with a lower response date a warning should appear: "Project XX\YY as a lower response date than the selected task'
Example:
TASK A) Project no 3445 Task 1 response date = 2007-03-05 14:00
TASK B) Project no 3666 Task 1 response date = 2007-03-05 14:05
If the user push assign "to me' or "start' on task B and task B is not previously assigned to the user a message should appear: "Project 3445\1 as a lower response date than the selected task, do you want to continue?'
The same message should appear if a task exists in the list with a priority that as PRI=1 and the user selects another task.

SMS DEFAULT MESSAGE

Example: SMS DEFAULT MESSAGE =
--------------------------------------------------
Job Reported By: <RECEIVED_BY>
Customer : <CUSTOMER_NAME>
Date Reported : <RECEIVED_DATE>
--------------------------------------------------
The message contents when Evatic sends SMS with HelpDesk information to a customer (see MAIL PROJECT)

SMS FINISHED MESSAGE

Example: SMS FINISHED MESSAGE = Dear customer.........
The message contents when Evatic sends SMS with HelpDesk information to a customer. The SMS message can automatically be shown when finishing a HelpDesk task.

SMS FOLDER CHANGE MESSAGE

Example: SMS FOLDER CHANGE MESSAGE = Dear customer.........
The message contents when Evatic sends SMSwith HelpDesk information to a customer. The SMS message can automatically be shown when moving a HelpDesk task to another folder.

SMS NEW MESSAGE

Example: MAIL NEW MESSAGE = Dear customer.........
The message contents when Evatic sends SMS with HelpDesk information to a customer. The SMS message can automatically be shown when registering a HelpDesk task.

SMS NO ANSWER MESSAGE

Example: SMS NO ANSWER MESSAGE = Dear customer.........
The message contents when Evatic sends SMS with information to a customer. The SMS message can automatically be shown when pressing the button <No answer> on a HelpDesk task.

SORT SUPPORT TYPE DESC

Setting to decide how HelpDesk type should be sorted.
If this is checked (default) then the list will be sorted on the field description any other value, the list will be sorted on code (the field code is a text so it will be sorted as text)

START BEFORE FINISH

If this setting is checked, then the user must push start before he can push finish. (time must be running)

START TIME AUTO

If a user starts to write in the symptom text, action text or internal comment field on support tasks the clock should start immediately. This means that the same function as if the user clicked start.

SUPPORT LIST REFRESH INTERVAL

Example: SUPPORT LIST REFRESH INTERVAL = 5
How often should the Support Overview dialog be refreshed when using the window?
E.g.:
0 Never, the user need to press F5 to refresh manually.
15 (every 15 Second)
30
45
60
90
120

SUPPORT ON HOLD PRIORITY CODE

Example: SUPPORT ON HOLD PRIORITY CODE = HOLD
The standard priority code when the task is set on hold.

SUPPORT ON HOLD PRIORITY NODE

Example: SUPPORT ON HOLD PRIORITY NODE =1_All_2_Team A_3_On hold
The standard node where the task is moved when it is on hold.

SYMPTOM TREE EXPAND LEVEL

Example: SYMPTOM TREE EXPAND LEVEL= 0
Here you can define the level you want to use as default when opening the symptom code tree. 0 = all levels, 1 = first level, 2 = second level etc.

TO SERVICE CHECK CONTRACT TYPE

Example: TO SERVICE CHECK CONTRACT TYPE= 0
Change contract type on task moved to service. If the setting is checked;
When a task is transferred to service.
On the service task:
Set Contract type again directly (with check on service contract types) from the customer \machine

TO SERVICE USE INFO FROM MACHINE

Setting that will ensure that more information is fetched directly from the machine instead of from the HelpDesk task
If checked: When a task is linked to a machine and the task is transferred to service.
On the service task:
Set visit address again directly from the information on the machine
Set department again directly from the information on the machine
If the setting is unchecked the information from the HelpDesk task is used.

USE ACTION CODE DEPENDENCIES

Check to show the tree for the action codes dependencies and uncheck when not.

USE ACTION CODE STRONG RELATION

Check if you want to have a strong relation between the action code. The relation between the action code is set up in a separate window under Settings->Project->Support-> Action code dependencies. When this is on, only the action code 1 is filled when creating a new project. The user has to select from action code 1 and then action code 2 is filled with values that are related to the value in action code 1. The same relation between action code 2 and 3.

USE DEFAULT RESPONSE TIME

Example: USE DEFAULT RESPONSE TIME = 1
The number of hours to be set as the default response time on HelpDesk task.

USE SAME SYMPTOM TO SERVICE SC 1

Example: USE SAME SYMPTOM TO SERVICE SC 1 =
Should the symptom code 1 (2 and 3) used in the HelpDesk module also be used when the user push the 'to service' button (default values for symptom codes when the 'to service' window opens)
Examples:
If COMPANY XXX \ SUPPORT \ USE SAME SYMPTOM TO SERVICE SC 1 = A;B;C; and the selected symptom code 1 for the HelpDesk task is Y then symptom code 1 in the 'to service' window is empty
If COMPANY XXX \ SUPPORT \ USE SAME SYMPTOM TO SERVICE SC 1 = A;B;C; and the selected symptom code 1 for the HelpDesk task is B then symptom code 1 in the 'to service' window should be B
If COMPANY XXX \ SUPPORT \ USE SAME SYMPTOM TO SERVICE SC 2 = TR;ER;VV; and the selected symptom code 2 for the HelpDesk task is GF then symptom code 1 in the 'to service' window should be empty
If COMPANY XXX \ SUPPORT \ USE SAME SYMPTOM TO SERVICE SC 2 = TR;ER;VV; and the selected symptom code 2 for the HelpDesk task is TR then symptom code 1 in the 'to service' window should be TR

USE SAME SYMPTOM TO SERVICE SC 2

Example: USE SAME SYMPTOM TO SERVICE SC 2 =
Should the symptom code 1 (2 and 3) used in the HelpDesk module also be used when the user push the 'to service' button (default values for symptom codes when the 'to service' window opens)
Examples:
If COMPANY XXX \ SUPPORT \ USE SAME SYMPTOM TO SERVICE SC 1 = A;B;C; and the selected symptom code 1 for the HelpDesk task is Y then symptom code 1 in the 'to service' window is empty
If COMPANY XXX \ SUPPORT \ USE SAME SYMPTOM TO SERVICE SC 1 = A;B;C; and the selected symptom code 1 for the HelpDesk task is B then symptom code 1 in the 'to service' window should be B
If COMPANY XXX \ SUPPORT \ USE SAME SYMPTOM TO SERVICE SC 2 = TR;ER;VV; and the selected symptom code 2 for the HelpDesk task is GF then symptom code 1 in the 'to service' window should be empty
If COMPANY XXX \ SUPPORT \ USE SAME SYMPTOM TO SERVICE SC 2 = TR;ER;VV; and the selected symptom code 2 for the HelpDesk task is TR then symptom code 1 in the 'to service' window should be TR

USE SAME SYMPTOM TO SERVICE SC 3

Example: USE SAME SYMPTOM TO SERVICE SC 3 =
Should the symptom code 1 (2 and 3) used in the HelpDesk module also be used when the user push the 'to service' button (default values for symptom codes when the 'to service' window opens)
Examples:
If COMPANY XXX \ SUPPORT \ USE SAME SYMPTOM TO SERVICE SC 1 = A;B;C; and the selected symptom code 1 for the HelpDesk task is Y then symptom code 1 in the 'to service' window is empty
If COMPANY XXX \ SUPPORT \ USE SAME SYMPTOM TO SERVICE SC 1 = A;B;C; and the selected symptom code 1 for the HelpDesk task is B then symptom code 1 in the 'to service' window should be B
If COMPANY XXX \ SUPPORT \ USE SAME SYMPTOM TO SERVICE SC 2 = TR;ER;VV; and the selected symptom code 2 for the HelpDesk task is GF then symptom code 1 in the 'to service' window should be empty
If COMPANY XXX \ SUPPORT \ USE SAME SYMPTOM TO SERVICE SC 2 = TR;ER;VV; and the selected symptom code 2 for the HelpDesk task is TR then symptom code 1 in the 'to service' window should be TR

USE SYMPTOM CODE DEPENDENCIES

Check to show the tree for the symptom codes dependencies and uncheck when not.

USE SYMPTOM CODE STRONG RELATION

Example: USE SYMPTOM CODE STRONG RELATION = 1
Set this to 1 if you want to have a strong relation between the symptom code. The relation between the symptom code is set up in a separate window under Settings->Project->Support->Symptom dependencies (Evatic). When this is on, only the symptom code 1 is filled when creating a new project. The user has to select from symptom code 1 and then symptom code 2 is filled with values that are related to the value in symptom code 1. The same relation between symptom code 2 and 3.

SUPPORT TASK INFO

INFO 01

Example: INFO 01 = Information
Within the HelpDesk dialog it is possible to add 6 extra fields which can be used freely. The text entered here is the label for the first field. Only the settings with a value will be displayed.

INFO 02

Example: INFO 02 = Information
Within the HelpDesk dialog it is possible to add 6 extra fields which can be used freely. The text entered here is the label for the second field. Only the settings with a value will be displayed.

INFO 03

Example: INFO 03 = Information
Within the HelpDesk dialog it is possible to add 6 extra fields which can be used freely. The text entered here is the label for the third field. Only the settings with a value will be displayed.

INFO 04

Example: INFO 04 = Information
Within the HelpDesk dialog it is possible to add 6 extra fields which can be used freely. The text entered here is the label for the fourth field. Only the settings with a value will be displayed.

INFO 05

Example: INFO 05 = Information
Within the HelpDesk dialog it is possible to add 6 extra fields which can be used freely. The text entered here is the label for the fifth field. Only the settings with a value will be displayed.

INFO 06

Example: INFO 06 = Information
Within the HelpDesk dialog it is possible to add 6 extra fields which can be used freely. The text entered here is the label for the sixth field. Only the settings with a value will be displayed.

TASK INFO

INFO 01

Example: INFO 01 = Information 1
Within the project dialog (info tab) it is possible to add 6 extra fields which can be used freely. The text entered here will be used as the label for the first field.
This field can be found under Task details in EMS.
Only the settings with a value will be displayed.

INFO 02

Example: INFO 02 = Information 2
Within the project dialog (info tab) it is possible to add 6 extra fields which can be used freely. The text entered here will be used as the label for the second field.
This field can be found under Task details in EMS.
Only the settings with a value will be displayed.

INFO 03

Example: INFO 03 = Information 3
Within the project dialog (info tab) it is possible to add 6 extra fields which can be used freely. The text entered here will be used as the label for the third field.
This field can be found under Task details in EMS.
Only the settings with a value will be displayed.

INFO 04

Example: INFO 04 = Information 4
Within the project dialog (info tab) it is possible to add 6 extra fields which can be used freely. The text entered here will be used as the label for the fourth field.
Only the settings with a value will be displayed.
This field can be found under Task details in EMS.

INFO 05

Example: INFO 05 = Information 5
Within the project dialog (info tab) it is possible to add 6 extra fields which can be used freely. The text entered here will be used as the label for the fifth field.
Only the settings with a value will be displayed.
This field can be found under Task details in EMS.

INFO 06

Example: INFO 06 = Information 6
Within the project dialog (info tab) it is possible to add 6 extra fields which can be used freely. The text entered here will be used as the label for the sixth field.
Only the settings with a value will be displayed.
This field can be found under Task details in EMS.

WARRANTY

INFO 1

Example: INFO 1 = Information
Within the warranty dialog it is possible to add extra 5 fields which can be used freely. The text entered here will be the field name for the first field. Only the settings with a value will be displayed.

INFO 2

Example: INFO 2 = Information
Within the warranty dialog it is possible to add extra 5 fields which can be used freely. The text entered here will be the field name for the second field. Only the settings with a value will be displayed.

INFO 3

Example: INFO 3 = Information
Within the warranty dialog it is possible to add extra 5 fields which can be used freely. The text entered here will be the field name for the third field. Only the settings with a value will be displayed.

INFO 4

Example: INFO 4 = Information
Within the warranty dialog it is possible to add extra 5 fields which can be used freely. The text entered here will be the field name for the fourth field. Only the settings with a value will be displayed.

INFO 5

Example: INFO 5 = Information
Within the warranty dialog it is possible to add extra 5 fields which can be used freely. The text entered here will be the field name for the second fifth. Only the settings with a value will be displayed.

ON

Should warranty module in Evatic be accessible or not?

STATUS

Example: STATUS = OK;NOTOK
List of possible status in the warranty window, delimited by semicolon.

USE ORDER LINES

Should the order lines from the warranty screen be used or not?

GLOBAL USER

CONTACT

CONTACT TITLES

When entering or changing a contact you are given the possibility to select a title for the person. Here you can set up the different titles to be available for selection. Each title is separated by; (semicolon) e.g. Mr.;Mrs.

CUSTOMER ACCOUNT

ON

Should access to customer accounts receivable be available in Evatic?
This setting can be overridden by the serial code.

DATABASE PROPERTY

TYPE

Type of database, used for Example to tag local databases used for synchronizing in Evatic Service Mobile, e.g. EVATIC SERVICE

Evatic Admin

COMMAND TIMEOUT

What is the maximum waiting time for response from Evatic database? Time in seconds

Evatic Link

ARTICLE IMPORT ON

For some integrations with accounting systems, this is used to switch on and off the import of articles.

CUSTOMER IMPORT ON

For some integrations with accounting systems, this is used to switch on and off the import of customers.

ORDER EXPORT ON

For some integrations with accounting systems, this is used to switch on and off the import of orders.

Evatic Mobile

APNS CERTIFICATE FILE NAME

System setting set by the Setup. Do not edit.

APNS CERTIFICATE FILE PASSWORD

System setting set by the Setup. Do not edit.

APNS IS PRODUCTION

System setting set by the Setup. Do not edit.

ENABLE ANDROID PUSH

Should it be possible to receive push notifications on Android devices?

ENABLE APPLE PUSH

Should it be possible to receive push notifications on Apple devices?

ENABLE PUSH NOTIFICATION

Should it be possible to receive push notifications?

GCM API KEY

System setting set by the Setup. Do not edit.

GCM PROJECT ID

System setting set by the Setup. Do not edit.

MAX HISTORY PROJECTS

How many previous tasks on a machine should be retrieved by Evatic Mobile when a new task on the machine is allocated?

MAX PROJECTS

The number of tasks that can be checked out at any given time for each technician.

Evatic Sales

ARTICLE NO EXT CONTRACT

Using calculation in Evatic old leasing contracts that's not finished gets distributed as a cost on the new leasing contract. This is the article number that decides if distributed amount from old external contract should be calculated with vat. Only the vat code from this article will be used.

ARTICLE NO INT CONTRACT

Using calculation in Evatic old leasing contracts that's not finished gets distributed as a cost on the new leasing contract. This is the article number that decides if distributed amount from old internal contract should be calculated with vat. Only the vat code from this article will be used.

CALC ARTICLE FEE PRICE

Should article fee price on the sales calculation/order lines tab be shown or not.

CALC ENABLE COST PRICE

Should the cost price should be editable in the order line within Calculation?

CALC ENABLE SALES PRICE

Should the sales price should be editable in the order line within Calculation?

CALC ENABLE SALES PRICE VIRTUAL

Should the sales price discounted should be editable in the order line within Calculation?

CALC MAX PERC PROPRICE

How much discount the salesman can give before loosing all his provision.

CALC ORDERLINE ARTICLE COLOR

Here you can select the color for the order lines within Calculation.

CALC ORDERLINE MODEL COLOR

Here you can select the color of the order lines that are connected to a model, within Calculation.

CALC PROVISION TYPE

The method used to calculate salesman provision. This setting has 2 different values:
0 = calculate provision from sales price - cost price
1 = calculate provision from sales price
The default value is 0

CALC SHOW ARTICLE FEE

Should article fee on the article screen/calculation tab be shown or not

CALC SHOW COST PRICE

Here you can set up if the cost price is to be displayed on the order lines in Calculation.

CALC SHOW SALES INCOME PERCENT

Here you can set up if the column result (%) is to be displayed on the order lines in Calculation.

CALC SHOW SALES PRICE TOTAL

Here you can set up if the column sum is to be displayed on the order lines in Calculation

CALC SHOW SALES PRICE VIRTUAL

Here you can set up if the column sales price discounted is to be displayed on the order lines in Calculation.

CALC SHOW SALES RESULT

Here you can set up if the column total is to be displayed on the order lines in Calculation.

CALC SHOW SALESMAN

Here you can set up if the column salesman is to be displayed on the order lines in Calculation.

CALC SHOW STOCK

Here you can set up if the column stock is to be displayed on the order lines in Calculation.

CALC STATUS NOT VALID COLOR

Here you can set the color to be displayed when non valid values are entered in Calculation.

CALENDAR CALVIEW BACK COLOR

Here you can select the background color for the month view within the calendar.

CALENDAR CALVIEW WEEK COLOR

Here you can select the background color for the day view within the calendar.

CALENDAR DAYVIEW COMPLETED COLOR

Here you can select the background color for the activities in the day view that you have completed.

CALENDAR DAYVIEW NOT OWN COLOR

Here you can select the background color for the activities in the day view that other users have selected you as a participant.

CALENDAR DAYVIEW OTHER COLOR

Here you can select the background color for the activities in the day view that other users have created on your calendar.

CALENDAR LIMIT1 COLOR

Here you can select the background color in the month view that have a total time below limit 1.

CALENDAR LIMIT2 COLOR

Here you can select the background color in the month view that have a total time below limit 2.

CALENDAR LIMIT3 COLOR

Here you can select the background color in the month view that have a total time over limit 3.

CALENDAR MINUTE LIMIT1

The limit (in minutes) that decides the color in the month view.

CALENDAR MINUTE LIMIT2

The limit (in minutes) that decides the color in the month view.

CALENDAR MINUTE LIMIT3

The limit (in minutes) that decides the color in the month view.

CALENDAR OUTLOOK BACK COLOR

Here you can select the background color for the activities in the day view that comes from Outlook.

COMMAND TIMEOUT

What is the maximum waiting time for response from Evatic Service database? Time in seconds

CREDIT CHECK

If credit-control is being used in the system, enable this setting, if not disable. (All new customers will be prospects and only users with write permission on "Sale Credit Approve." will be able to change the prospect to customer). If you do want service users to be able to change the prospect to customer set this setting; COMPANY XXX \ CUSTOMER \ CHANGE STATUS
If this setting is enabled and the user got write permission on "Sale Credit Approve" then the user can change the status directly in the combo box on the tab details (see Customer/Evatic Service)).

FORM BACK COLOR

Here you can select the standard background-color off all the windows in the Evatic Service program.

LOCAL TASK MAIL INTEGRATION

This controls if the mails that are sent automatically from the system (e.g. reminder of activities) are sent from the client or from the Evatic Server.
If LOCAL TASK MAIL INTEGRATION is set and the setting COMPANY XXX\MAIL\USE MAILSETTINGS FOR EACH DEPT is set, then the from address will be COMPANY XXX\MAIL[dept] FROM ADDRESS (Department is here the department the owner of the activity is linked to).
If COMPANY XXX\MAIL[dept] FROM ADDRESS is blank or the users is not linked to a department, then the COMPANY XXX \ MAIL \ FROM ADDRESS is used.

SALE APP TITLE

The title on the first node in the Navigator, typically the company's name.

SALE APPROVE

This setting control if the projects in Evatic has to be approved by someone before orders can be placed on the customer.

Not for existing customers.

SALESMAN ONLY OWN

This setting allows the user to only see the customers where the user is the salesman (his own customers).

USE SALE CALCULATION

This setting control if the calculations module is being used in project.

USE SALEPROJECT ORDERLINES

This setting control if order lines can be inserted at a sales project.

WORK END TIME

This setting is deciding the primary time in the day view on calendar e.g. 17:00.

WORK START TIME

This setting is deciding the primary time in the day view on calendar e.g. 09:00.

Evatic Server

COMMAND TIMEOUT

What is the maximum waiting time for response from Evatic database? Time in seconds

OPEN LOCKED OBJECTS HOURS

This is a setting to automatically re-open locked object (orders and projects). If the setting is set larger then 0, all the objects will be re-opened at 23:55.
E.g.
If you set this setting to 2, all objects that have been locked before 21:55 will be re-opened.

Evatic Service

AUDIT LOG

If set activities against customers, contacts, sale projects, sale tasks, documents and tasks are logged to the table AUDIT LOG. The following activities are logged:

• OPEN

• INSERT
• DELETE
• UPDATE

To view the audit log in Evatic Service, a sql report must be created.

Run a select against the table to check the results: select * from AUDIT LOG order by LOG TIME

CHARSET

Which characters should be used in Evatic Service. 0 = Western, 204 = Cyrillic, 178 = Arabic

COMMAND TIMEOUT

What is the maximum waiting time for response from Evatic database? Time in seconds

DEFAULT COMPANY

Standard Company.

DEFAULT COUNTRY

Standard country. For example, when setting up a new user.

DEFAULT DEPT

Standard department. For example, when entering a new user.

FONT NAME

Font name used for Evatic Service. For example, Arial

FONT SIZE

Font size used for Evatic Service

SERIAL CODE

Serial code. Sent from Evatic AS

SESSION PREFIX

If you are using terminalserver/citrix and session ID is used on the printer name, the prefix that is set before the session ID, can be entered here. E.g. 'HP Laserjet (redirected 2)', where session ID = 2, and session prefix = redirected.

The prefix entered here is depending on the windows language, so e.g. for Swedish you enter here "omdirigerade" and not "redirected".

Evatic Web

DEFAULT TASK WEB NODE

Here you can set up in which folder new incoming tasks from Evatic Web should be placed. Only valid if USE DEFAULT TASK NODE disabled. If if USE DEFAULT TASK NODE is set, the folder set up by the machine will be used.

PROJECT DESC

The entered text will be placed under General project description within the General tab of the project in Evatic Service e.g. Project from internet

FILE

GRID LAYOUT SAVE DELAY

This setting inserts a delay (in milliseconds) between each grid-layout file being saved. The setting is for solving problems with Windows NT, where fast storage of layout-files causes an internal Windows error.
This setting should only be used when experiencing problems with saving the grid-layout files on the clients.
The default value for this setting is blank (nothing)
Internal use for Evatic

INCLUDED ARTICLES

ON

Should access to the button 'Articles include' in Evatic be allowed

SHOW MSG ALL MADE INVOICE ABLE

This setting shows that a message is displayed distinguishing used articles from included articles. Only displayed when the setting Company XXX/ORDER/INCLUDED ARTICLE AUTOSPLIT is set. The message states: "The customer has already exceeded the maximum number of articles included for this period. The order line has automatically changed status to invoiceable."

SHOW OK MSG

Shows a message to be displayed distinguishing used articles from included articles even when the number is not over the limit allowed for the period.
The message includes information about the number of included articles left in the period and when the next period starts.

LEASING

ON

Should access to leasing functions on fixed price contract rows be available in Evatic.
This setting can be overridden by the serial code.

MAC

SHELL

For users installing both Vista and e.g. Windows XP for their users, this setting must be set, in order for the Evatic serial code to work.

The user must use the IP address and not the server name when he logs into the Evatic Service application.

MAIL

READING LETTER INTEGRATION ON

Should the user have access to send meter reading letters via e-mail in Evatic
This setting can be overridden by the serial code.

SERVICE ORDER INTEGRATION ON

Should the user have access to send e-mail project confirmations and e-mails to resources in Evatic?
This setting can be overridden by the serial code.

METER READING LETTER

FOR EACH DEPARTMENT

Do you want to set up a layout per department for the meter reading letters?

MAIL SENDING DELAY

Here you can insert a value in millisecond, that will be used as a delay between each meter reading letter being sent by mail. For example, 100 = 0.1 sec, 1000 = 1 sec. Use this setting if you have problems with sending many mails through the SMPT-server.

SET DATE GENERA AUTO ON SUCCESS

If set, the letters send by email will receive the status "Letter send", and the once with error messages as "Letter not send".

ORDER

USE AUTOMATIC TRAVEL TIME

If this is set, Evatic will automatically attempt to calculate travel time as a function of allocating time and working time, when working time is entered in register use.

PROGRESS BAR

COLOR

Select the background color for the status indicator in Evatic.

PROJECT

PROJECT NO

Setting to set the next project number

STOCK ADMIN

ON

Should the user have access to stock control in Evatic?
This setting can be overwritten by the serial code.

SAVE HISTORIC DATA TYPE

Should Evatic save historic stock values? (This function is added to Evatic Server)

• 0 = No save of historic data

• 3 = Every day (23:55)
• 2 = Each Sunday (23:55)
• 1 = Last day each month (23:55)

TRANSLATION

MACHINE NO

You can change here the name of the field machine no to a name of your free choice.

TREE

FOR EACH DEPARTMENT

Should each department in Evatic have its own project structure?

This decision should be taken when starting to use the system. Changing it on a later stage can cause problems for the existing data.

UPDATE INTERVAL

TASK TREE

How often should the Project Overview dialog be refreshed when using the window? Time in minutes.

WARRENTY CHECK

NOT W IF ONE CRITERIA EXPIRED

When warranty is on, should the system not check for warranty if one of the following criteria have expired?
Example:
Months new machine = 36
Units new machine = 50.000
If over 36 month or 50.000 units, no warranty is calculated.

When using meter, the system will check against the main meter (Machine/Model)

ON

Should Evatic check for warranty on parts while finishing orders? You can find more information about warranty in Evatic by reading about the model dialog in the Evatic help file

MACHINE

Evatic Sales

DEFAULT MOBILE DATABASE

This sets up which local database is to function as the synchronizing database for Evatic Service. It is important that this database has the same user name and password as the ones used to log into the main database, otherwise the synchronization will not function.

MAP INTEGRATION

APP PATH

If this machine has map integration installed, where is the map motor located e.g. c:\program files\winmapsql

MAP PATH

If this machine has map integration installed, where are the map files located e.g. c:\program files\Evatic Service\kart

ON

Should map integration in Evatic be allowed on this machine?
This setting can be overridden by the serial code.

USER

DIFFERENT FIELD COLOR FOCUS

COLOR

Here you can select a color, if the user is to have a special color to always highlight the field in which he is located. This is the same setting as under the User/Miscellaneous Settings.

ON

Should there be a color focus when entering information in different fields?

DO NOT PRINT 0 ORDERS

ON

Should the field <Do not print orders without invoice number> in Evatic (see Order/Complete&Print) be selected or not?

ENABLED

AREACODE

Should the user to be allowed to change the area to which an address belongs to?

COST PRICE

Display cost price in all windows for this user.

Evatic Sales

CALENDAR OPEN AT START

When you start Evatic Service you can decide if the calendar should always open automatically or not. (You can also turn this setting on/off under User settings in Evatic Service).

DEF DAYS IN CALENDAR

Here you can decide if the calendar should always show 1, 5 or 7 days as default.

MAIL SIGNATURE

Here you can see the signature you use on the mails from Evatic Service, e.g. Best regards Peter Smith
You create the mail signature under User settings in Evatic Service.

OUTLOOK SAVE ITEMS ON

Here you can turn off the possibility to save emails and contacts. This to avoid problems for some versions of Outlook where the security rules lock the possibility to save mail and contacts in Evatic.

HIDE 0 ORDERS

ON

Should the field <Hide orders without an invoice number> in Evatic (see Order/Complete&Print) be selected or not?

INVOICE

NO OF COPIES

Here you can see who many copies of each invoice which will be printed.

PRINTER

Here you can see the printer used for your invoices e.g. OKIPAGE 14ex

You change the printer and number of copies in Evatic (see File->Printer Setup->Invoice). This changes will be saved here.

ORDER

MACHINE TAB

Which tab is focused when you close the order dialog screen and open it again (If not set, only machine information is shown. If set, showing also model and contract information.)

PACKING SLIP

NO OF COPIES

Here you can see who many copies of each packing slip which will be printed.

PRINTER

Here you can see the printer used for your packing slips e.g. OKIPAGE 14ex

You change the printer and number of copies in Evatic (see File->Printer Setup->Packing slip). This changes will be saved here.

SERVICE ORDER

NO OF COPIES

Here you can see who many copies of each service order which will be printed.

PRINTER

Here you can see the printer used for your service orders, e.g. OKIPAGE 14ex

You change the printer and number of copies in Evatic (see File->Printer Setup->Service order). This changes will be saved here.

SHOW

PROJECT DETAILS LAST JOB

If this setting is set, then you always see the 3 last jobs when you open the project dialog screen. Otherwise the last 3 jobs are not displayed.

SUMMARY DEPT LIST

Display department list for this user.

SUMMARY TECH LIST

Display technician list for this user.